Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout7449 Gall BlvdSONIC PROJECT DATA OWNER SONIC RETAURANTS, INC O 300 JOHNNY BENCH DRIVE OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 13104 ARCHITECT DONALD P. BUTCHER, NCARB 6001 N. SHAWNEE OKLAHOMA CITY, OK '13112 MEP ENGINEER DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 3950 HIGHWAY 360, SUITE 101 GRAPEVINE, TX 16051 APPL IC48LE CODES FLORIDA BUILDING CODE AND ANY STATE OR LOCAL ADMENDMENTS BUILDING: PLUMBING: MECHANICAL: ELECTRICAL: GAS: FIRE: HANDICAPPED: OCCUPANCY LOAD: OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: CONSTRUCTION TYPE: 5UILD ING DATA PROPOSED USE OF BUILDING: DRIVE-IN / DRIVE-THRU RESTAURANT BUILDING AREA: PERCENTAGE OF LOT COVERED BY BUILDING: BUILDING HEIGHT: CANOPY AREA: PERCENTAGE OF LOT COVERED BY CANOPY: CANOPY HEIGHT: SITE DATA SITE AREA: PARKING PROVIDED: ZONING: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER DK ISBELL P.E. 1405 W. CHAPMAN 0200 SANGER TX 16266 CIVIL ENGINEER LA CIVIL 1446 COURT STREET CLEARWATER FL 33156 ZEPHYRhiLLS FIRE DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEES = 10�jcc�,( M-MERCANTILE k- (A S, VI -UNPROTECTED EXISTING N/A NEW 1482 S.F. PUBLIC N/A EMPLOYEE 1482 S.F. TOTAL GROSS 1482 S.F. 4.6 EXISTING N/A NEW 16'-0" EXISTING N/A NEW 5151 S.F. 16 � EXISTING N/A NEW 9'-6" i UNDEVELOPED: N/A DEVELOPED: 32140 Sr-. DRIVE-IN STALLS: 21 STALLS EMPLOYEE PARKING: 5 SPACES TOTAL: 32 SPACES C-2 COMMUNITY COMMERCIAL SYMBOL L EGEND A 10.10 DETAIL REFERENCE REVISION 108 DOOR NUMBER OWINDOW NUMBER A 10.10 DETAIL REFERENCE W A 10.10 BUILDING SECTION LEVEL LINE OR CORNER POINT 104 ROOM NAME AND KITCHEN NUMBER INTERIOR / EXTERIOR A 8113 ELEVATION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER w Ff 0 L2c�c��oQa�9 DroeQ0Cl�D 5M ILL5, FLORID HIGHWAY 301 ! PRETTY POND SONIC. STORE ": 005080 SONIC CORPORATE USE ONLY 0 a NOT SELECTED BUILDING SIZE WIDE (24x60) BUILDING TYPE 05 (NON-BUMPOUT) BUILDING STRUCTURE 130/30/4 BUILDING FRAMING WOOD STUCCO/CMU WAINSCOT FROST DEPTH 24 INCHES DEEP BUILDING UTILITY SERVICE 3 PHASE ELECTRIC W/GAS EXHAUST HOOD SYSTEM STRATO VENT RESTROOM WITH A CORRIDOR USING METAL EXTERIOR CORRIDOR DOOR TRASH ENCLOSURE SIZE 2fo' WIDE TRASH ENCLOSURE MATERIAL SPLIT -FACE BLOCK 8 FT FLUORESCENT STRIP POS LAYOUT LAYOUT A ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL PREVAILING CODES, FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS ORDINANCES ISsU D 'k J U N 2 1 2004 PERMIT REVIEW I - EQUIPMENT OPTIONS • PREP / VEGETABLE SINK O FRONT COUNTER W/3-COMP SINK • BUILT-IN GREASE COLLECTION SYSTEM • 60 INCH GRILL O ONION RING MACHINE O LARGER (36") FOUNTAINETTE • POWER WASH SYSTEM ADDITIONAL OPTIONS • WALL HYDRANTS O PARAPET NEON • ADDITIONAL FLOOR DRAINS O TRENCH DRAIN • ON -DEMAND GAS WATER HEATER • PRE -WIRING FOR ALARM SYSTEM • SITE LIGHTING O HVACUPGRADE O STORAGE BUILDING • FULL LENGTH ROOF LADDER O STAB- IN CANOPY COLUMNS O CANOPY DECK PANS ABOVE STRUCTURE O RESTROOM BASEBOARD NEATER O FREE STANDING DINER TABLES • DRIVE THRU / HOP T14RU O 01 DOUBLE WIDE CANOPY Office Copy PLAN RE'll ED l �- 7 DATE gull ^INC DEPT APPROVED Office Copy SM A55REVIATIONS JAN. JANITOR R.A. RETURN AIR J C. JANITOR CLOSET R.B. RU5 R BASE 0 AT DWG. DRAWING JST. JOIST R.D. ROOF DRAIN A$. ANCHOR BOLT D.W. DRYWALL JT. JOINT R.O. ROUGH OPENING A.D. AREA DRAIN L.L. LIVE LOAD R.D.W. RIGHT OF WAY APP. ABOVE FINISHED E.IFS. EXTERIOR L.L.W. LONG LEG R.S. R.S.C. ROUGH SAWN ROUGH SAWN CEDAR FLOOR INSULATION HORIZONTAL REF: REFERENCE A/C AIR CONDITIONER FINISH SYSTEM L.L.V. LONG LEG VERTICAL ACOUST. ACOUSTICAL E.J. EXPANSION JOINT LT. LIGHT REC. REFRIG. RECESSED REFRIGERATOR ADD. ADDENDUM E.W. EACH WAY LIU. LIGHT WEIGHT REFL. REFLECTED ADJ. ADJUSTABLE E.W.G. ELECTRIC WATER LAM. LAMINATED REINF. REINFORCED OR ADJACENT COOLER LAV. LAVATORY REQ'D. REQUIRED ALT. ALTERNATE EA EACH LG. LONG REV. REVISION AL. ALUMINUM ELEC. ELECTRICAL L.W.B. LIGHT WEIGHT BLOCK RFG. ROOFING ANCR ANCHOR ELEV. ELEVATION LVR LOUVER RM. ROOM ANOD. ANODIZED EMER. EMERGENCY M.O. MASONRY OPENING APPROXAPPROXIMATELY Ea EQUAL M.G. MINERAL GORESONRY S.4v. STAIN 4 VARNISH ARGI-I. ARCHITECTURAL EXH. EXHAUST M.C.J.�CJ. CONTROL gD' SOLID GORE ASP. ASPHALT EXP. EXPANSION JOINT S.D. STORM DRAIN A.T. ACOUSTIC TILE EXT. EXTERIOR MINERAL FIBER S.DISP. SOAP DISPENSER ADAAG AMERICANS WITH p$. FOAM BOARDM.F.R. R S.S. SERVICE SINK DISABILITIES ACT, F$.O. FURNISHED BY MAT MAMA SOONRY S.S. STAINLESS STEEL ACCESSIBILITY OTHERS MAT L. MATERIAL S.S. STORM SEWER GUIDELINES F.D. FLOOR DRAIN IN,gX, MAXIMUM SS.G. SMOOTH SAWN CEDAR BA BATH F.E.ANSEW. FIRE EXTINGUISHER MECH. MECHANICAL SANITARY SEWER. B.C. BOTTOM OF CURB P.E.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER MFG. MANUFACTURING . SECTION BFF. BELOW FINISH AND CABINET MFR. MANUFACTURER SSECEC. SCHEDULE FLOOR FF. FINISHED FLOOR MH. MANHOLE SCW SHEET 5.UJIP BUILT-UP ROOF FIN. FINISH MIN. MINIMUM SHT. SHEATHING BD. BOARD FLG. FLASHING MIR. MIRROR SIM. SIMILIAR BK. BRICK FLR FLOOR MISC. MISCELLANEOUS SL. SLIDING BLDG. BUILDING FND. FOUNDATION MTD. MOUNTED SPA SPACE (S) BLK. BLOCK FT. FOOT MTL. METAL SPEC.(S) SPECIFICATION (S) BLK s. BLOCKING FTG. FOOTING SQ. SQUARE 5M. BEAM F.R. FIRE RATED I`L NORTH STA, STATION B.M. BENCH MARK FRTW. FIRE RETARDANT N.I.G. NOT IN CONTRACT STD. STANDARD BOt. BOTTOM TREATED WOOD N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE STL. STEEL BRG. BEARING F.R.P. FIBERGLASS NO. or M NUMBER STOR. STORAGE BRZ. BRONZE REINFORCED NOM. NOMINAL STRUCT. STRUCTURAL BTU BRITISH THERMAL PANEL O.C. ON CENTER SUSP• SUSPENDED UNIT G.B. GRAB BARS O.D. OUTSIDE DIAMTERE T. TREADS G.B. CATCH BASIN G.G. GENERAL 0.140. OVER HEAD T.45, TOP AND BOTTOM C.I. CAST IRON CONTRACTOR OA. OVERALL TAG. TONGUE AND GROOVE C.J. CONTROL JOINT G.I. GALVANIZED IRON OPNG. OPENING TB. TACK50ARD C.L. CENTER LINE GA GAUGE OPP. OPPOSITE T.C. TOP OF CURB C.M.U. CONCRETE GALV. GALVANIZED O.N. OPPOSITE HAND T.O. TOP OF MASONRY UNIT GL. GLASS OVN. OVEN T.O.S. TOP OF STEEL C.O. CASED OPENING GR. GRADE P.C. PRECAST TEL. TELEPHONE C.O. CLEAN OUT GYP. GYPSUM P.E.J. PREMOLDED TEMP. TEMPERED C.Y. CUBIC YARD GYP.BD. GYPSUM BOARD EXPANSION JOINT THK THICK CEM. CEMENT PF. PRE -FINISHED TV TELEVISION CLG. CEILING HG. HOLLOW CORE P.L. PROPERTY LINE TYP. TYPICAL CLR CLEAR W.M. HOLLOW METAL PP. POWER POLE V.B. VAPOR BARRIER COL. COLUMN HMD. HOLLOW METAL P.T.D. PAPER TOWEL V.G.T. VINYL COMPOSITION COMP. COMPOSITION DOOR DISPENSER TILE CONC. CONCRETE HJM P. HOLLOW METAL P-TR PAPER TOWEL V,W,C. VINYL WALL COVERING CONST. CONSTRUCTION FRAME RECEPTOR VAR VARIES CONT. CONTINUOUS HD. HEAD PL. PLATE VERT. VERTICAL CONTR CONTRACTOR HDR. HEADER PLAM. PLASTIC LAMINATE VFP. VINYL FACED PANEL C8. COUNTER SINK HDWR HARDWARE PLYWD. PLYWOOD D. DRYER WOR• HORIZONTAL P.O.S. POINT OF SALE W.C.WATER CLOSET OP. DRINKING FOUNTAIN HRD. HT. HARD HEIGHT PR PSF PAIR POUNDS PER SQUARE W WPM. WIDE FLANGE WELDED FRAME D.I. D.L. DROP INLET DEAD LOAD HTG. HEATING FOOT W.H. WALL HYDRANT D.S. DOWN SPOUT HVAC HEATING/VENTILATING/ PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE WJ-IYD. WATER HEATER DW, DISHWASHER AIR CONDITIONING INCH W.P. WATER PROOF DBL. DOUBLE I.D. INSIDE DIAMETER PT. PAINT WWF. W/ WELDED WIRE FABRIC WITH DIA DIAMETER IN. INCH PTD. PVC. PAINTED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE W/O WITHOUT DIAL. DIAGONAL INCL. INCLUDE F' t• PAVEMENT WOOD DIM. DIMENSION INSUL. INSULATION W WS WAINSCOT DR DOOR INT. INTERIOR R. RISER WT. WEIGHT DTL. DETAIL R. RADIUS W.S. WEATHER STRIP SHEET INDEX --- COVER SHEET, SHEET INDEX, INFORMATION, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SITE DEVELOPMENT C-1 CIVIL COVER SHEET C-2 SURVEY C-3 DEMOLITION PLAN C-4 SITE PLAN C-5 PAVING, GRADING t DRAINAGE PLAN C-6 UTILITY PLAN C-1 GENERAL CIVIL NOTES C-8 DETAIL SHEET C-S DETAIL SHEET C-10 DETAIL SHEET L-1 LANDSCAPE PLAN 802 SONIC SITE DETAILS 503 SONIC SITE DETAILS SD4 SONIC SITE DETAILS ADDENDU" IS ADI ADDENDUM SHEET 1 ARCHITECTURAL Al SCHEDULES / FLOOR PLAN A2 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A2A BUILDING SECTIONS A3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A5 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A6 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS Al REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 048 ROOF DETAILS / ROOF PLAN AS FLOOR FINISH PLAN CANOPY ARCHITECTURAL CAI CANOPY ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS CANOPY STRUCTURAL CSI CANOPY FRAMING PLAN CS2 CANOPY STRUCTURAL DETAILS STRUCTURAL 81 FOUNDATION PLAN S1A ROOF FRAMING PLAN 82 STRUCTURAL FOUNDATION DETAILS S3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING DETAILS ELECTRICAL E1 CANOPY / MENU WIRING PLAN E2 LIGHTING PLAN / LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE E3 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN / ROOF POWER PLAN E4 NOT USED E5 ELECTRICAL RISERS / PANELS / DETAILS MECHANICAL MI MECHANICAL PLAN M2 HOOD SYSTEM DETAILS M3 AIR BALANCE PROCEDURES M4 AIR BALANCE PROCEDURES Pi DRAIN, WASTE, t VENT PIPING PLAN / SCHEDULES PIA DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PLAN P2 PLUMBING RISERS / PLUMBING DETAILS KITCHEN EQUIPMENT KI EQUIPMENT PLAN K2 EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS K3 EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS K4 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SPECIFICATIONS SPI SPECIFICATIONS SP2 SPECIFICATIONS SP3 SPECIFICATIONS SP4 SPECIFICATIONS SP5 SPECIFICATIONS SP6 SPECIFICATIONS ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA SONIC TYPE 05LW WOOD FRAME / STUCCO 4 CMU SONIC STORE • 005080 ARCHITECT PROJECT M 005080 4-1-04 3-22-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 4-1-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 fo -8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 fo-8-04 6 -8-04 r-mm1m, (O -8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 (0-8-04 (o -8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 (0-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6-6-04 6-8-04 6-8-04 6 -8-04 6-8-04 NO DATE ISSUES AND REVISIONS NO DATE ISSUES AND REVISIONS 08-08-2004 ISSUED GENERAL NOTES 1. FOR THE PURPOSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND THE ACCOMPANYING SPECIFICATIONS THE TERM "BY G.C." WILL REFER TO ITEMS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS AND OR AGENTS. THE TERM "BY OWNER" WILL REFER TO ITEMS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR THE TERM N.I.C. WILL REFER TO ITEMS NOT IN CONTRACT OR PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE OWNER AND OR THEIR AGENTS. 2. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL ITEMS ARE ASSUMED TO BE BY 3. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL GOVERNING FEDERAL, STATE AND MUNICIPAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. 4. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. S. ANY DEVIATION FROM THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ON THE PART OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ANY SUBCONTRACTOR VENDOR AND/OR SUPPLIER, OR USE OF THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT ANY LOCATION OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THEY WERE INTENDED, SHALL RELEASE SONIC INDUSTRIES, SONIC CORP., AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, AND THEIR OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, SHAREHOLDERS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, REPRESENTATIVES, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS, FROM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY INCURRED IN LITIGATION OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE CONSTRUCTION OF THIS DRIVE-IN. NOTICE OF CONFIDENTIALITY AND COPYRIGHT THESE DRAWINGS AND ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THEM (A) ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL PROPERTY OF SONIC CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES, (B) ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED IN ANY MATTER IN WHOLE OR IN PART, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SONIC CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES, (C) ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN BY THE DESIGNATED SONIC DRIVE-IN FRANCHISEE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE DRAWN DRIVE-IN AT THE SPECIFIED LOCATION. THESE DRAWINGS ARE COPYRIGHTED. UNAUTHORIZED COPYING OR OTHER MISUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS MAY SUBJECT THE VIOLATOR TO CIVIL AND CRIMINAL FINES AND PENALTIES. UPON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION OR AT THE REQUEST OF SONIC CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES, WHICHEVER IS SOONER ALL COPIES AND SETS OF THESE DRAWINGS MUST BE RETURNED TO SONIC CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES. u SONIC 6'-6 MENU BOARD (OR — PREVIEW BOARD, SEE SITE PLAN) SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER 4"x4"x4'-0" SQUARE TUBE SUPLLIED WITH MENU BOARD SPEAKER PEDESTAL SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER— INSTRUCTIONS: 1. POSITION PREFORMED LOOP APPROXIMATELY 1'46" TO 2'-0" FROM CURB CENTERED IN FRONT OF MENU50ARD OR SPEAKER POST 2. LOOP SHOULD BE INSTALLED 2" TO 3" BELOW THE SURFACE OF THE PAVEMENT (5" MAX. DEPTH) DO NOT USE METALIC HARDWARE AS SUPPORT IF INSTALLED IN ASPHALT, COVER LOOP WITH A MIN. OF V SOIL OR SAND TO PROTECT FROM HOT ASPHALT 3. CONNECT LOOP TO 1/2" CONDUIT STUBBING UP IN SPEAKER POST 4. WIRE MESH OR REINFORCEMENT IN CONCRETE 514OULD BE CUT AWAY FROM PERIMETER OF LOOP A MIN. OF 6" 5. ALL CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES TO LOOP WIRES MUST BE SOLDERED EXTEND CONDUIT NOTE: LOOP AND CABLE FURNISHED BY OWNER UP ABOVE PIPE AND INSTALLED BY G.G., FINAL HOOK UP BY P.O.S. VENDOR III I1 PRE -FORMED BASE PLATE I) I II AND ANCHOR BOLTS 0 i II SUPPLIED BY OWNER 4 II i cv i� INSTALLED BY G.G. MFR'S PREFORMED LOOP (L I ( II PAVEMENT — III I — — — GRADE GRADE Ii GRADE < I' III a I I- I' -1 1 <II .Ii. it 4 I 1=1' 1 1=�' LL OE r° / -6"i DIA. — o• 3/4" CONDUIT FROM I \_ DETECTOR LOOP WIRE TO ELEC. PANEL TO MENU ( SPEAKER FROM BOARD FOR POWER I PRE -FORMED LOOP TO BUILDING J-BOX —.__------/ NOTE: SEE SITE PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION (IF USED) SEE SHEET E-i FOR WIRING. 07 DRIVE.THfqw%_w1 MENU BOARD PROFILE 3/4" i' -0" VERIFY SIZE, COLOR, WORDING, ETC. WITH LOCAL TRAFFIC ENGINEERING DEPT. ADDITIONAL SIGN ONLY REQUIRED At VAN ACCESSIBLE SPACES PARKING RMIT ONLY N0000 rxs VAN CCESSIBLE 4o 2" X 4" X 1/8" PAINTED STEEL CHANNEL FINISH GRADE a 12" DIAMETER CONCRETE FOOTING u a 4 - � d VERIFY WITH LOCAL CONDITIONS 6" DIA. CONC STEEL POST 5" CONCRETE 18" DIAMETER CONCRETE FC VERIFY WITH LOCAL CONDITIONS �w O IU r 0 l3 m� - i' -0" ILLUMINATED SIGN CABINET. FURNISHED 4 INSTALLED BY OTHERS. 2" DIA. X 4' LONG DIRECT BURIAL COLUMN. FURNISHED BY OTHERS INSTALLED BY G.C. WATER PROOF J-BOX - DISCONNECT BY E.G. 12" DIA. X 2' DEEP 3000 PSI CONCRETE FOOTING INSTALLED BY G.C. 3/4" W.P. CONDUIT BY. E.G. 04 -ENTER/EXITSIGN 1/2" = 1'-0" 1-1/2" O.D. STANDARD ROUND PIPE RAIL, PRIME AND PAINT TO MATCH CANOPY COLUMNS.(TYPICAL) TYPICAL SECTIONS \-- WELD AND GRIND SMOOTH (TYPICAL) TYPICAL CENTER POST CONDITION %9 TYPICAL END POST CONDITION in CENTER OF RAIL 10" FROM FACE 0 OF CURBING. REF. SITE PLAN. iv MIN. 12" DEEP PENETRATION 77 ,; I :I IF USED. SEE SITE PLAN I 1 u FOR LOCATION. u, 10 PA I L INn 3/4" 0 1'-/III NOTE; T415 FLAN 15 GENERIC. REF. 5D 1 FOR EXACT SUIL-DING / DRIVE-T" 4RU LAYOUT. Step *3 --- Step *1 Step *4 GUIDELINES FOR LOCATION OF DRI VE - THRU MENU 50ARD AND Pf'�W§ TTIP�I3gRB'LA POINT EVEN WITH THE DRIVER'S WINDOW ON THE F1FTI-4 CAR IN THE DRIVE-THRU LANE (APPROXIMATELY 90' OF CURB LENGTH FROM THE FRONT FF CNEAL'NME15i kl!5 LAR TO THE CURES, MARK A POINT 1'-�0" BEHIND THE FACE OF THE CURB. THIS WILL BE THE CENTER POINT R!F t F', '� L�1�G DL T ' A 45-DEGREE ANGLE TO THE FIRST LINE. MARK A POINT (0'-0" FROM THE CENTER OF THE SPEAKER PEDESTAL. THIS SECOND POINT WILL BE THE Elf f191 j�TU jgbZ�6 'k?OPMARK A POINT ON CURB EVEN WITH THE DRIVER'S WINDOW OF THE SIXTH CAR IN THE DRIVE-THRU LANE (APPROXIMATELY 110' OF CURB 61= W HAT5 W ff fi � FA 4 L�3;aL ATE THE CENTER OF THE PREVIEW BOARD 4'-0" FROM CURB. MOUNT PREVIEW BOARD PARALLEL TO FACE OF CURB. NOTE: PREVIEW BOARD NOT TO INTRUDE INTO WALKING SPACE FOR SIDEWALK OR RAMP. IF SO, MOVE PREVIEW BOARD TO OTHER SIDE OF SIDEWALK AS SHOWN IN THIS ILLUSTRATION. SIGN SQ. FT. 30 OVERALL HGT. UP TO 10' OWNER TO CONTACT SONIC BRAND DEVELOPMENT DEPT. AT 405-280-1654 TO DETERMINE WHICH SIGN(S) TO USE. G.C. t0 CONFIRM SIZE AND TYPE OF SIGN WITH SONIC OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. SIZE Or - FOOTING DETERMINED BY SIGN SIGN COMPANY ANCHOR BOLTS FURNISHED BY SIGN CO. INSTALLED BY G.G. UNDER SIGN CO. SUPERVISION. BOLT TEMPLTE PROVIDED WITH BOLTS. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION(S) (IF USED) 101 50 UP TO 10' SONIC 10 '30 OPTIONS: 23', 29', 34' OPTIONS: 24', 30', 35' SIGN SQ, FT. 110 110 150 OVERALL HGT. OPTIONS: 30', 35' 40' 50' MONUMENT PYLON FAMILY OF SIGNS NO SCALE TYP. ALL d� a m� 17 11 CAIRPOP" 4 " 1-1/211 1,-0" NOTES: 1. ALL LETTERING, GRAPHICS AND LINES TO BE DONE IN REFLECTIVE WHITE ON PANTONE RED 485 BACKGROUND UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, TOUCH UP SCREW HEADS WITH PAINT TO MATCH, 2. ALL LETTERING TO BE 2" TALL FUTURA CONDENSED EXTRA BOLD UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. IF USED, SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION 4. SUPPLIED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY G.C. PICK UP ORDER" SIGNAGE 19 HANDICAP SICsN I 20 BOLLARD I 2 1 MENU BOARD LAYOUT I 23 I Gam! O Im It W. Q � l ( V a i5 F 09 A ®a O 7 V V nz w8< Zma e ® Wow a Z z 8 z 0 O IL . Q aNLU oA ul W N OIL 1 O N D1A16: 005080—SD2 1" = N.T.S. soNlc t�n n rrn� a�vwu� �vuuuc� 21'-4" FIELD VERIFY W/OPENING r 0� 4" x 6" x 3/16" TUBE STL. COLUMN a `- (4) PIPEBOLLARDS - . REFSD-2.20rcTT 2" x 2" x 3/1b" FILLED WITH CONCRETE IN 2'-0" DEEP 18" DIA. FOOTING: ANGLES - 0 GATES AND FENCE ARE 2" x 2" x 3/16" ANGLE GATE 6" CEDAR (FINISH WITH FRAME (PRIME AND PAINT GRAY) 0 0 WOOD PRESERVATIVE) - A SECURE 1" x 6" CEDAR PLANKS (4) CANE BOLTS - - COPE AND LAP A TO GATE FRAME WITH CARRIAGE REF DETAIL Q BOLTS - (4) PER PLANK 1-1 (3) GATE POSTS cp i— roo ooe EMBEDDED IN 2'-O" DEEP (3) 4" x 6" GATE 1,F.Marl 18" DIA, CONCRETE FOOTING r ` % I( POSTS IN V-0" DEEP 18 DIA. ---------------- I I I �` -------------- I I I I NOTE: FOOTINGS L U G L U J L U G PAINT FRAME W/CANOPY CANE BOLT 7 GATE HINGE (MODEL" BHL BY (8) STL. SLEEVES IN STRUCTURE PAINT TRIPLES STEEL 800-392-3655) 13'-2" 13'-2" CONC. TO RECEIVE WELDED t0 COLUMN AND GATE I I CANE BOLT - REF. I N ANGLE - REF. SO-3.00 FOR 44 6 SO-3.0S ADD'L HINGE MOUNTING INFO. z 01 'RASH ENCLOSUREFLAN 'RASH ENCLOSUREELEV. GATE FRAME GATE Hit.q.nE FLNOdu 1/4" 1'-Oil 1/4" _ 1'-0" 8 SMOOTH BLOCK CAP PEN SIDE OF HINGE FIELD WELD (4) 1" DIA. SOLID STEEL ROD - (MATCH BLOCK COLOR) TO GATE ANGLE CANE BOLT V-0" LONG CARRIAGE BOLTS ul CONC. BOND BM. W/2-04 �• GONt. FILL W/ GROUT 1-1/8" WIDE x 8" DEEP SLOT CUT INTO PIPE _ 0 _0 _ b% 0 0 o (4) 1-1/4" O.D. PIPE WELDED TO GATE FRAME 1'-4" LONG z 2-05 a 24"o.c. IN GROUT II I \ \ I \ 1 1/4"II FILLED CELLS BEARING II SIDE OF II I \\ � NOTE: `t PROVIDE 9 GA. WIRE HINGE FIELD WELD TO II I \ \ PROVIDE 1-1/2" I.D. x 2" DEEP STL. SLEEVE SET IN lil REBAR POSITIONERS IN 5 I/4" BED JOINTS ib "o,c• COLUMN II I \ \ \ CONCRETE AS SHOWN IN "TRASH ENCLOSURE PLAN" • —- 0 VERT. SPACING TO RECEIVE BOLTS , . ; "•' ' •L 2" x 2" x 3/16" ANGLE FRAME ' 5 1/4" 8"x8"xl6" CMU BLOCK 0 8 TS4x6x3/16 GALV. STL. COLUMN FILLED WITH CONCRETE 0 9 10 11 12 II CAFE HINGE ELV& CANE 5OLT 1-1/2" 1'-0" 1'-0" 4X8XI6 SPLIT -FACE CMU W/ TIES 0 16" O.G. I*4 m 16"o.c. EACH WAY 3/4" STEEL BASE PLATE (10"xi0") W I ® W Q r ° IF DOWELS ARE 1/4" STEEL LEVELING PLATE (10"x101) � O c% W ILE ILE iv ?7-A USED PROVIDE ° ° 3/4" GROUT 3000 PSI MIN. ® ZZ W ��',' 0: a : 30" LAP At BASE OF CMU LIGHT AS SPEC. U z 8 WA ° LL N -v W coWW "4 CONT. - PROVIDE ACI STD. HOOKS FOR NV30F_su w S VERT IN CMU LL POLE AS SPEC. � oQ? W �{ 2 -M4 TOP t 80T W/ CORNER BARS n �j 2" HANDHOLE ®~AIM o O wow � W �° i'-0" F THREADED BOLT PROJECTION o� U1 U (2 1/2" MIN., 3" MAX.) = wld i08 13�SNCE 14 15 16 = 18" SONOTUBE H 3/4"x24" ANCHOR BOLTS 3/�4" = 1' -oil Q• .° ' :1•. (4) REQ'D. 1/2" CLR. FINISH GRADE a c� cl az VERT. RE INF. (4) 45 BARS ALTERNATE LOCATIONS FROM ANCHOR BOLTS. NOTES: d .� ° 1I '•r' I. HORIZ. REINF. "3 HOOPS o LL •--1 1. THIS FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED ON AN ALLOWABLE BEARING CAPACITY OF 2000 p.s.f. , in 0 10 O.G. jL Q 0`.l .�r IF THESE SOIL CONDITIONS DO NOT EXIST, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING NEW DESIGN BASED ON ACTUAL SOIL " " �' •' 3/4" HEAVY WALL CONDUIT y�.. (— �j� Lu CONDITIONS. C •' I C== _ 2. THIS FOUNDATION IS BASED ON WIND LOADS OF W mph (3 SEC GUST). 3500 PSI CONC. - PLACE O o• IL lU 3. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO DIRECTLY AGAINST UNDISTURBED EARTH (TYP.) Its N ASTM GRADE 60. FIRM, DRY, UNDISTURBED 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR EARTH ITYP.) y VERIFYING THE BASE PLATE BOLT PATTERN. 5. WHEN ORDERING BLOCK FINISHES, ADDITIONAL 8"0 BOLT CIRCLE SHEET LEAD TIME IS REQUIRED. PROVIDE 3"x3" HOLE IN BASE t LEVELING PLATE S 3 a 19 20 21 22 23 FOR CONDUIT ACCESS LIGHT 15ASE oETAIL D1WO: 1/2„ = I,_�„ 005080-SD3 5�+.�Mt12 cZn►v►n2 C/`/u vY%__j 1=n n MR I'm a�vuvu� lb) vuwuLlLj X PLANTING OR OTHER X NON -WALKING SURFACE � 1:18 RISE AROUND CANOPY COLUMNS TO AVOID COOL EDGE FLARED SIDE FAINT AINR �PW W W W W W W W W W STANDING WATER SIGNIFICANTLY W W y W W W W W W NOA CONT. REBAR SEALANT (SONOLASTIC SR-1) 4,_0„ CONTRASTING VALUE PER REQUIRED CODE CANOPY COLUMN SEALANT (SONOLASTIC SR -I) (7 x 6 8/8 W.W.M. SIDEWALK PARKING 30 LB. FELT - HOLD DOWN (TYPICAL) W W W Y W W Y W W W NO3 REBAR At 24" O.C. = 1'-6" 30 LB. FELT AROUND COLUMN I/2" OR USE ZIP STRIP W W W W W W W W W EACH DIRECTION HOLD DOWN OR USE ZIP STRIP SLOPE 1/4" PER FOOT i 1 10 10 5" CONCRETE :: _ �� MIN. 5 MAX. NO3 REBAR AT 24" O.C. EACH DIRECTIONCA) FLARED SfDES CS) RETURNED CURB --—.' •�---. ,-:.a�-,.:-T�:—�'4"CONCRETE4 . ::::TOP•.. X IS LESS THAN 48" THEN , P-""..7 ;�' �a• .4 ••4, •••i. V...t , :,+, a :, • }•.,�1.y~'�:i?�':; •'� ; '••,,•,;,`IF ``THE ,�� �•• ::;:..:•,.,� ::; ;� i.. - r . 6. • •, '•bh• �;J•: ';;•• 5 CONCRETEPIER SLOPE OF THE FLARED NOTES,,;..;:;. I SIDE SHALL NOT EXCEED 1:12 RAMPS MUST COMPLY WITH NATIONAL AND LOCAL ,,;;�;• •.�,;� � ,,;R.,• � •,,M•Y',,,,rM ;�•.M,J•,•Y •� SUBGRADE REF: CODES COLUMN PER ' ' '�N'" '' "' �' '' ,: `a:'° =•, ";. SOILS REPORT 12 1:12 MAX SLOPE ALL "ACCESSIBLE ROUTE" SIDEWALKS FROM PARK REF CS-2 (ADJOINING SLOPE SPACE RAMP TO THE PATIO AREA OR RESTROOMS SHALL NOT EXCEED 1:20) SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. STANDARDS FOR WIDTH, SIDE SLOPE (1:50 OR LESS), AND RUNNING SLOPE (LESS THAN 1:20) 44 wa.ic STMET CURB RAMP SLOPES PROVIDE TACTILE SURFACING ON RAMP SURFACES: 01 FAVINn AT CANOPY COLUMN CUR5 AT STALLS / FAVING 1/8" DEEP GROOVES 1/4" - 3/4" WIDE, AND 2" O.G. ARRANGED SO THAT WATER WILL NOT ACCUMULATE CUR5 RAMPS au 1" = 1'-0" 1�� = 1'-�" 1/411 z Z 07 08 09 10 11 12 1010 9'-6" all# �t ®pc � YY V o z � W�y Ila O�Z �GW O F 3'-4° o •�z �o$ 13 14 15 16 _0 o � 1L J N O yr J Q R4'-4" NOTEz ALL TRAFFIC FLOW ARROWS TO BE SOLID YELLOW .. ) - REFLECTIVE TRAFFIC PAINT AS PER DIMENSIONS ABOVE. oloo ul N 2' - 8" 3' -011 -3" iA loo 6' -11" SHEET 4 19 20 21 22 2 3 TRAFFIC FLOW ARROW Dwa: 005080-SD4 c9nrumrp c�nn rvmt? NJt in GENERAL: THE ADDENDUM ITEMS LISTED ON THIS PAGE MODIFY, CLARIFY, AND SUPERSEDE THE ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT THE TIME THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WERE ISSUED. ADDENDA ITEM 01: THIS ITEM MODIFIES THE SWING: BIDE OF THE VESTIBULE DOORS (101A t 10115). THIS CHANGE SUPERSEDES THE DOOR SWINGS AS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN (A-1.03) BY REVERSING THE SIDE OF JAMB ON WHICH THE DOOR 18 HINGED. REFERENCE PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN (AD-1.01) FOR REVISED HINGE LOCATIONS. DDENDA IT =M 02: THIS ITEM INVOLVES SUBSTITUTING A "DURO-LAST" FLEXIBLE SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM FOR THE BUILT-UP MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFINGS AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 01525, ON SHEET SP-1. THIS ALSO INVOLVES REVISING THE RIGID ROOF INSULATION AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 01212, ON SHEET SPI. REFERENCE REVISED SECTION 01212 (BELOW) FOR THE RIGID ROOF INSULATION SPECIFICATION, AND SUBSTITUTED SECTION 01533 (BELOW) FOR THE FLEXIBLE SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION. MODIFY ROOF CONSTRUCTION FOR ANY DETAILS AT ROOF PENETRATIONS, JOINTS, EDGE, FLASHING, AND DRAIN CONDITIONS PER MANUFACTURERS STANDARD DETAILS. 07212 RIGID ROOF INSULATION 1. RIGID ROOF INSULATION SHALL BE POLYISCCYANURATE BOARD, 3' THICK, WITH AN MINIMUM R-VALUE OF 20.0. INSULATION SHALL BE WITH MECHANICAL FASTENERS IN CONFORMANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND FACTORY MUTUAL 1-60 REQUIREMENTS. 2. TAPERED INSULATION FOR CRICKETS SHALL BE POLYISOCYANURATE, MINIMUM 3/4' THICK, WITH 1/2' PER 12' SLOPE, INSTALLED AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 3. SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA ON INSULATION BOARDS. 07533 FLEXIBLE SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM 1. FLEXIBLE SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH DURO-LAST SPECIFICATION FOR CO -POLYMER ALLOY SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE, OVER RIGID INSULATION. 2. MATERIAL SHALL BE DURC-LAST 40 MIL SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE. a APPLICATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 4, ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD DETAILS. 5. SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA. S. ROOFING SYSTEM SHALL HAVE MINIMUM FIFTEEN (15) YEAR GUARANTEE ON THE MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP, 7. DURO-LAST ROOFING, INC. 1-800-248-0280. 525 MORLEY DRIVE, SAGINAW, MI 48601 FAX # 1-800-422-9331 ADDENDA ITEM 13: THIS ITEM SUPERSEDES AND CLARIFIES THE POWER AND DATA REQUIREMENTS AS SHOWN ON SHEET E-4 FOR THE POS SYSTEM INSTALLATION. ADDENDA ITEM 104: THIS ITEM SUPERSEDES SPECIFICATION SECTION 08410 AND SPECIFICATION SECTION 08110 (BUT DOES NOT INCLUDE CHANGES TO HARDWARE SETS 2-6) AS SHOWN ON SHEET SP-4. REFERENCE REVISED SECTION 08410 (BELOW) FOR THE ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOOR SPECIFICATION, AND REVISED SECTION 08110 (BELOW) FINISH HARDWARE. REFERENCE SPECIFICATION SECTION 08110 ON SP-4 FOR HARDWARE SETS 2-6 ONLY. REFERENCE ELEVATION AD-1.04 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON LINEAR RECEIVER INSTALLATION. 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS 1. ALUMINUM FRAMES SHALL BE SERIES 450 CENTER GLAZED 1-3/4' X 4-1/2' PROFILE, EQUAL TO ENTRANCE FRAMING AS MANUFACTURED BY UNITED STATES ALUMINUM CORP. OR KAWNEER CORP. FINISH TO BE ANODIZED DARK BRONZE, 2. ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS TO BE EQUAL TO UNITED STATES ALUMINUM SERIES 400 MEDIUM STILE DOOR, WITH 3-3/16' TOP, 3-1/2' SIDE RAILS, AND OPTIONAL 10' BOTTOM RAIL. GLAZING TO BE 1/4' THICK TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS, ALUMINUM FINISH TO BE ANODIZED BRONZE. DOORS TO BE OFFSET HUNG SINGLE -ACTING AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. KAWNEER DOORS ARE AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE, WEARTHER STRIP WITH WOOL PILE. 3. DOOR AND FRAME HARDWARE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS SECTION IS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 08700, 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL FINISH HARDWARE AS SCHEDULED IN THIS SECTION. SUPPLY TEMPLATES TO DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS TO ENABLE PROPER AND ACCURATE CUT -CUTS FOR HARDWARE. 2. ALL LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS SHALL BE KEYED ALIKE WITH REMOVABLE CORES, IN ADDITION, THEY SHALL BE MASTERKEYED TO A SCHLAGE MASTERKEY SYSTEM. 3. SUBMIT FULL AND COMPLETE HARDWARE SCHEDULE FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 4. HARDWARE SCHEDULE, HARDWARE SET #1 1-SGL DR ENTRANCE, #101B EXTERIOR FM VEST. 101 1 - 3'-O'x71-O'x1-3/4' REFER TO PLANS FOR LOCATION AND HANDING 1 EACH PULL HANDLE TYPE 'C' ASTRAL U.S. ALUMINUM 1 EACH DEADBOLT MS1852S-55-313 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH MORTISED CYLINDER 4036 313 SCHLAGE 'C' KEYWAY ADAMS RITE 1 EACH MORTISED THUMBTURN 4066 313 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH OFFSET PIVOTS P553U SET ABC 1 EACH RIM PANIC 8802EL-36-12 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH RIM CYLINDER 8736 313 SCHLAGE 'C' KEYWAY ADAMS RITE i EACH 12V TRANSFORMER 4606-12 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH CLOSER W/ BC/DEL 650 SERIES DORMA 1 EACH CLOSER DROP PLATE DORMA 1 EACH THRESHOLD 1/2'x4' ADA COMPLIANT U.S. ALUMINUM FOLLOWING HARDWARE FURNISHED BY SONIC INDUSTRIES FOR HARDWARE SET #11 i EACH DIGITAL RECEIVER DXR-702 LINEAR 10 EACH TRANSMITTER DXT-23 LINEAR HARDWARE SET #1A (HARDWARE SET #1A FOR DOOR 101A INSTALLED ON SIDE) (WITH THE MOST STALLS - COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S) (REPRESENTATIVE) 1 SGL DR EXIT, #101A EXTERIOR FM VEST, 101 1 - 3' -O' x7' -0' x1-3/4' REFER TO PLANS FOR LOCATION AND HANDING 1 EACH DEADBOLT NS1852S-56-313 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH MORTISED THUMBTURN 4066 313 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH OFFSET PIVOTS P553U SET ABC i EACH RIM PANIC 8802-36 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH CLOSER W/ BC/DEL 650 SERIES DORMA 1 EACH CLOSER DROP PLATE DORMA 1 EACH THRESHOLD 1/2'x4' ADA COMPLIANT U,S. ALUMINUM HARDWARE SET #iB (HARDWARE SET #1B ONLY USED IN BUILDING TYPE 02) CW/HOP-THRU DOOR) 1 SGL DR #103 EXTERIOR FM DT-WINDOW 103 1 - 2'-6'x7'-O'xI-3/4' LHR CRH) REFER TO PLANS FOR LOCATION AND HANDING 1 EACH PULL HANDLE TYPE 'C' ASTRAL U.S, ALUMINUM 1 EACH DEADBOLT MS1852S-55-313 ADAMS RITE i EACH MORTISED CYLINDER 4036 313 SCHLAGE 'C' KEYWAY ADAMS RITE 1 EACH MORTISED THUMBTURN 4066 313 ADAMS RITE 1 EACH OFFSET PIVOTS P553U SET ABC 1 EACH CLOSER W/ BC/DEL 650 SERIES DORMA d 1 EACH CLOSER DROP PLATE DORMA 1 EACH THRESHOLD 1/2'x4' ADA COMPLIANT U.S, ALUMINUM Q ADDENDA ITEM "I: COUNTER 1/411 O 11-011 ADDENDA ITEM 03: OZ POS PLAN 2" PVC JUNCTION BOX 1" PVC III PVC LINE OF CEILING i I !141191ULuRkj Ego ADDENDA ITEM 04: 52 — ..J 102 GAR HOF COUNTER 101 VEST. LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND TRANSFORMER 12VDC LINEAR DXR-102 RECEIVER ADAMS RITE 8802EL-36-12 0 4 r=LEVATION 1/4 11 O 11-011 ADDENDU1l #3 1 OTE6: *1. INSTALL 12"Hx14"Wx4"D J-BOX WITH *5. PROVIDE POWER TO COMPUTER / ACCESSIBLE COVER (1) 2" CONDUIT REGISTERS - ISOLATED GROUND TYPE FED FROM MAX. 12 STALLS (le: 30 ORANGE RECEPTACLE. CIRCUIT SHALL STALLS . (3) 2" CONDUITS) FOR DATA HAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE. CABLE. SEE SHEET E-I FOR POWER «�,. PROVIDE 6X6 J-BOX IN WALL W/ 11/2" PLAN TO CANOPIES. CONDUIT UNDER SLAB TO 12x14 J-BOX. (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FED FROM SPEAKER *1. PROVIDE POWER TO MONITORS - PEDESTAL AT DRIVE THRU. SEE SHEET ISOLATED GROUND TYPE ORANGE E-1 FOR POWER PLAN TO DRIVE THRU RECEPTACLES MOUNTED IN FACE OF MENU BOARD. CEILING PANELS. CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE. STUB UP ABOVE CEILINGS (2) 2" CONDUIT AND (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FROM «8. NOT USED. J-BOX. *S. PROVIDE 6x6 J-BOX FOR DATA. STUB I" CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING. MOUNT (1) P CONDUIT FED FROM PATIO MENUS. BOX 24" A.FF. INSTALL J-BOX (2x4) AT 60" A.F.F. FOR CONTROLLER AND STUB OUT 3/4" CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING. CONTROLLER $2, i t ll fA CC '- ISOLATED GROUND TYPE ORANGE RECEPTACLES. CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE - PLACE OUTLET AT 8'6" A.F.F. *3. PROVIDE POWER FOR BASE STATIONS - ISOLATED GROUND TYPE ORANGE RECEPTACLES. CIRCUIT SHALL NAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE - PLACE OUTLET AT 8'6" AF.F. *4. PROVIDE POWER FOR CONTROLLER - ISOLATED GROUND TYPE ORANGE RECEPTACLE. CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE - PLACE OUTLET AT 8'6" A.F.F. APEX Site Ready Criteria Inside Store: *10. PROVIDE POWER TO BACK OFFICE COMPUTER - ISOLATED GROUND TYPE ORANGE RECEPTACLE. CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE. *11. PROVIDE POWER TO SCANNER, PRINTER, POLE DISPLAY VIA THE J-BOX ABOVE CEILING. E.G. TO PROVIDE S.O. CORD *12. REFER TO SHEET E-3 FOR PANEL SCHEDULE. *13. PROVIDE 2x4 J-BOX IN WALL. PROVIDE 1-1/2" CONDUIT STUBBED ABOVE CEILING. *14. PROVIDE ISOLATED GROUND TYPE ORANGE RECEPTACLES MOUNTED 24" AFF. CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE. * Ceiling grid finished * Ceiling the in grid where monitors and power is located. * Power in place in waifs and ceiling. * Power * Furniture in place and set. * Sonic authority at store to confirm placement of all equipment. * Telephone service operational. Outside Store: * Underground conduit in place and correct size. * Canopy conduit in place and correct size. * Menu housings attached with flex conduit in place. Please contact APEX Computer Services Inc. at (915) 676-9507 if any questions. W Z Z Ub en W I Z T A ® nr I § < I woR ® R O CA W 0 Z ®z � am �rnQ o�z ®Z@ o 98 Z M� lu4 GROUND LEVEL 2" PVC TO STALLS 2" PVC TO STALLS 2" PVC TO STALLS 2" PVC TO STALLS I" PVC TO DRIVE-THRU MENU 2" PVC TO PATIO MENUS '" 03 Pos j-5ox oiAGR4M � 9 NO SCALE SHEET AD1 SQNIC SONIC DWO., AD 1.DWG JUNE 14 2004 o fiJ�G FIN. FLOOR 0 0 BRONZE ANODIZED BRONZE ANODIZED ALUMINUM FRAME ALUMINUM FRAME 01 WINDOW ELEVATIONS 1/411=it-oil _ 1/411 TEMP. GLASS o 0 ALUM. STORE FRONT HOLLOW METAL WiRE GLASS 1211 x 12" WiRE WIRE GLASS WiNDOW GLASS WINDOW "AIR LOUVERS" WINDOW "AiR LOUVERS" VLF-EZ 12X12 VLF-EZ 12X12 W/F(VACY IZ x 10 W/PRIVACY COVER LOUVER AT COVER DOOR IVS ONLY 0 0 0 HOLLOW METAL HOLLOW METAL HOLLOW METAL O Z DOOR r=LEVATI ONS 1/4'1 11_011 -2 11411 10 1'-11 1/2" G M A� ® O 1 1 � t� FiNISH FL OR ELEV. 100'-0" 101A d � A-3.02 102 D 101 CAR 1400 CUTER VESTIBULE _321KX- d in A-3.02 OPP. 11_ II loll 0 im1B i all L12Eh1. 3'-3 3/4" REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FiNiSH SCHEDULE ONLY 0 611 "A-320 - 14'-loll v WiNDOtt SCHEDULE MARK SIZE TYPE GLS, THK. FRM. HEAD L. JAMB R. JAMB SILL COMMENTS A 51-01,x3'-4" I /8" DBL. AL A5.03 A5.11 A5.13 A5.14 B 51-01,x31-4" 1 /8" DBL AL A5,03 A5.09 A5.11 A5.14 C 5'-0"x3'-4" 1 5/8" DBL AL A5.03 A5.05 A509 A5.14 D 5'-0"x6'-4" 2 5/8" DBL. AL A5.03 A5.15 OH A5.15 A5.01 TEMPERED CaLAbS E 5'-01Ix3`-411 1 5/8" DBL AL A5-03 A5.09 OH A5.05 OH ADJ4 F 5'-011XV-4" i /S" DBL AL A5.03 A5.11 OH A5.09 OH A5.14 G 5'-011x31-41' i /8" DSLj AL A5,03 45.13 OH A5.11 OH A5.14 OH - OPPOSITE HAND DOOR SCHEDULE NO. SIZE TYPE TH'K FRM. HEAD L. JAMB R. JAMB THR. LOUVER W.S. H1W. SET COMMENTS 101A 3'-0"x1'-0" A i-3/411 AL A5.01 A5.11 OH A5.15 OH 4. SimW.S. I OCKOL wb 10115 3'-0"x1`-0" A 1-3/411 AL A5.01 A5,15 A5.11 Si W.S. I 00 Ct Him 108 3'-8"x1'-0" B 1-3/4111 HM A4,01 A4.09 OH A4ZS A4.01 W.S. 2 loci 3'-0"x1'-0" C 1-3/4111 HM 44.01 A4.21 A4.15 I 12 x 10 W.S. 3 110 3'-011x1'-0" C 1-3/411 HM A4.05 A4.13 A4.13 SIM -- 4 - III 3'-0"x1'-0" C 1-3/411 HM A4.05 A4.13 SIM A4.13 OH - 4 112A 3'-0"x1'-0" D 1-3/4" HM A4.03 A4.19 OH A4.20 OH A4.OS W.S. 5 1125 V-0"x1'-0" E 1-3/4" HM A4.05 A4.14 OH A4,14 -- 6 OH - OPPOSITE HAND 60-10" VENEER CONSTRUCT "Z" WALL t INFILL OPENING W/5 1/2" (20 GA) MTL STUDS FROM 11-6" TO V-1" APP. 0 all 104 KITCHEN A-3.091 105 STORAGE t4'-loll 331-III 66'-011 Fiv 6i1 I IVA 41YO 1/2" A 611 H 106 N PREPARATION a 66'-10" VENEER NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF STUD UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL (CLEAR) DIMENSIONS MUST BE MAINTAINED ALL WALL DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL A/31�3a i1'4' CLEAR UJALK- IN SOX ROOM FINISH SCHr=17o>ULr= NO. NAME FLOOR BASE 14ORTk EAST SOUTH WEST CLG. CLG. HEIGHT NOTES 101 VESTIBULE F-1 15-1 W-4 W-4 W-4 C-1 102 CARHOP COUNTER F-1 5-1 W-4 W-4 W-4 W-4 C-i 104 KITCHEN F-1 B-i W-4 W-4 W-4 -- C-i 8'-0" W-D McWIN � 53ma 105 STORAGE F-1 B-i W-4 W-4 W-4 W-4 C-1 at-Oil 106 PREPARATION F-i 5-1 W-4 W-4 --- -- C-1 1 8'-0" 101 WALK-IN BOX F-2 W-2 W-2 - W-2 C-2 108 RECEIVING F-i 5-1 W-4 W-4 W-4 W-4 C-1 8'_0" RV A-3A.16 D MOP bINK loci UTILITY F-2 5-2 W-4 W-4 W-4 W-4 C-4 8'-011 110 WOMEN F-1 5-1 W-1 W-1 W-1 W-1 C-3 81-011 III MEN F-i 5-1 W-1 W-1 W-1 W-1 C-3 8'-011 112 RESTROOM VEST F- I 5-1 W-1 W-1 W-1 W-1 C-3 8'-011 NOTES REF A-324 T►dRU A-326 FOR STANDARD BASE DETAILS IFINISH MATERIAL LIST FLOORS LU04LLS F-1 VITREOUS QUARRY TILE (ABRASIVE) W-i FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS / G.D.W. F-2 SEALED CONCRETE W-2 G.D.W. F-3 SEALED CONCRETE W/ SAWCUTS W-3 STAINLESS STEEL PANELS W-4 'FRP' / INTERIOR SHEATHING BASES W-5 REF. IIFII DWGS B-i VITREOUS QUARRY TILE (COVE) CEILINGS 5-2 VINYL (COVE) C-1 SUSPENDED A.C. TILE 5-3 REF. "F" DWGS C-2 OPEN TO STRUCTURE C-3 PAINTED G.D.W. C-4 PAINTED FIRE -CODE TYPE "X" G.D.W. 1 m 6" � P N 1 211 x 2" x 24GA 'WHITE' CLOSURE ANGLE, BOTH SIDES OF WALK- IN. ELECTRICAL PANELS (REF. E-3.02) INSTALL CLR OF LAV PLMB'G IN MEN'S RM III �q 108 ��9 108 ECEIVINC 611 1 -Ira �- ADA RESTROOM SIGNAGE ! W-O" APP. 31-411 0 n FIBERGLASS MOP SINK REF.10-1.01 AND A-4.10 C" 1 PROVIDE 6" Ox24" LONG PVC TUBE FOR PLAN STORAG - RT. iNP� •, �f- R W/TOP, OPEN END .411 AFF. PROVIDE CAP , SOT. END ONLY - G.G. TO INSERT FINAL SET OF CONST.. DOCS, W/ALL CWGS. MADE RIF INTO TUBE END OF CONST. REF. A-3.18 FOR RESTROOM ELEV. KEY HOT WATER HEATER REF. P-1.02 CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT WATER CLOSET AS REQ'D BY ADAAG 0 TAS CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT LAVATORY OR SINK REQ'D BY ICC/ANSI A111.1-i998 (606.2) (3053) CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT WATER CLOSET REQ'D BY [CC/ANSI Ai11.1-ISSO FiG 6043.1 WHEELCHAIR TURNING SPACE REQ'D BY ICC/ANSI A111.1-1998 FiG. 3043 (A) 44 z 0 0 Z n on A 8 0 Z Lu 'T b 1p ®� N i 0 v DSO _ o U V wza ® ou wN X .0 2 D 0 WOW 028 • I.-CIO w o � � o 10L 10L Q T d) O 4* -1 K Li j6 : lu C� `"W_DU Au Q =�N 0 = N W VV V 3: 44 SHEET A I 03 FLOOR PLAN -REF. SITE PLAN FOR TRUE NORTH 1/411 : 1l_ u 005080-A1 V Z 0 V Z 0 §@Hg(? 0oao9 a CONTROL JOINT a SIC0446E BY OWNER FRONT ELEVATION FLOOD LIGHT, DRIVE-THRU ONLY, SEE A- - •. I r-.1- .- - - A- -1 A / 1 .1. 1- ,.,.,EFT ELEVATION-"'�..CONTROLJOIN, 1/4" = 1' -0" ON MASONRY CAP FLASWIWs [— LINE OF ROOF STUCCO AS SPECIFIED SPLIT FACE CMU VENEER AS SPECIFIEL STUCCO VENEER A-2 POSTER DISPLAY BOARDS BY OWNER 'x&' SIGN BY OWNER LADDER TO L11 U. ROOF IS" WIDE ELECTRICAL REF A-801 SERVICE - -- REF E-3.02 STUCCO VENEER _ - - ■I n■i��l�lrl■■ -. ■ ■■■ ■1 ■1■■■■■ ■1■L_ AS 810FECIFIE0 - AS spkiciFiko i■ ■WTIMsi ■i :■ IN■II=I�■■ ��I����■� ■�■I --�-- ■■ -- -�■MIN—SPLIT ■■■M ■1■■ ■■■ ■■■■■■■■ REAR ELE 1/4" = 1' -011 SPLIT FACE CMU L-- PROVIDE C.J. + INSIDE CORNER VENEER AS SPECIFIED (TYP. BOTH SIDES VEST) • II C40NTROL JOINT. ■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■fir■1■■■■■■■►�■■■■■■■�■■■■■■ � ■■■■■■■1■■ 4 RIGHT ELEVi4TION \-6 x 6 ACCESS PLATE SPLIT FACE CMU POSTER DISPLAY 1/411 = 11-011 SDBULK LLKCE VENER AS SPECIFIED BOARD BY OMER 9 so►u�c soN�e v Z ag Z ® 8 0 Z z� 0 w- 69 V WLo{ 04 ®�O V `R CK sn's ® 0 V VJ co Q a L O Lu ®r < 1L W- 0 ®� X uu SHEET A2 DWO: 005080-A2 I qb V z 0 TA.S. VARIES MODIFIED BITUMEN 102 CAR HOP COUNTER ROOF STRUCTURE - REF. FRAMING PLAN LINE OF SUSP'D CLG. AT W-O" AF:r- 01 TRANSVERsr= sr=C:TION 1/4" = 1'-0" T. O. PARAPET TOP OF PARAPET lid, -ollRTU NO. 1 TOP OF LEDGER VARIES MINUS ROOF STRUCTURE - 61 101 REF. FRAMING PLAN A VESTIBULE LINE of SU �r: i AT imI-00_a�� erg 101A O O IO2 CAR HOP COUNTER 03 LONnITUDINAL SECTION EXHAUST FAN NO. 2 PREFERRED RTU ON STD. CURB (TYP) - REF. M1 LINE OF SUSP'D CL.G. AT W-0" AFF 105 STORAGE A F EXHAUST FAN NO. 1 RTU NO. 2 02 TPANSVEP,.sr= SECTION MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF SYSTEM LINE OF SUSP'D CLG. AT V-0" AFF 108 RECEIVING 1/4" = 1'-0" TOP OF LEDGER 10' -10 PLUS SONIC SONIC 101A O O IO2 CAR HOP COUNTER 03 LONnITUDINAL SECTION EXHAUST FAN NO. 2 PREFERRED RTU ON STD. CURB (TYP) - REF. M1 LINE OF SUSP'D CL.G. AT W-0" AFF 105 STORAGE A F EXHAUST FAN NO. 1 RTU NO. 2 02 TPANSVEP,.sr= SECTION MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF SYSTEM LINE OF SUSP'D CLG. AT V-0" AFF 108 RECEIVING 1/4" = 1'-0" TOP OF LEDGER 10' -10 PLUS SONIC SONIC 0 su z W N 0 zi 1*440< �r ze ° ® Or �a zz 0 � U o cF- g V Q VJ p CL a W� 1 � IL 0 N Z O � SHEET A2A DWG: 005080—A2A V z O "WHITE" F.R.P. -- "WHITE" F.RP. AC TILE CLG. •- "WHITE" F.RP. �12'-4" -"WHITE" F.RP. ! REF A-3.25 18" RED A-3Zro 18" REF A-3.25 Z lo oo o o Z .4 >w a �o Q q 0wH 4 101 � w cn N W w OPEN W V W d) f- TO r- t- 1018 iP�1 z au`-0 z 0 ------------ ----------- w �u II III II11QII e CORNER L VIT. Q.T. BASE V1T. Q.T. BASE GUARDS VIT. Q.T. BASE 21'-3" 5'-9° 24 GA. STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL TO O1 REF A-315 SIM. 02 REF A-3.25 "WHITE" F.R.P. VIT, Q.T. BASE --' 0 5 REF A-3.25 REF A-3.25 REF A-3.24 w Q I .4 w AC TILE � GLCs. I• 1 w "WHITE" `r tQ _z ALL 0 L- - - - - - - - - - -AL =-------- L- VIT. Q.T. BASE CORNER GUARDS REF A-5.06 (TYPICAL) REF ,4-3.25 OPEN CHASE - n I- NO TOP PLATE t Z AC TILE CLG. a "WHITE" ju fu-ct? w d 1I%AINLESS STL. 4 OC W CORNERS Z N STAINLESS STL. CAP - 1 p z 1-1/2 TURN DOWN U T 6" CUTOUT FOR COKE 0 0 LINES - COORD. co LOCATION W/VENDOR - 2" STAINLESS STL. CORNERS VIT. Q.T. BASE 27 REF A-325 28 REF A-325 "WHITE" F.R.P. SOAP DISPENSER i MIRROR 110 6„ � 1)i TANK OTaOf_L__E__,� N VIT. Q.T. BASE VIT. Q.T. in BASE 19 20 21 REF A-3.24 REF A-3.24 REF A-3.24 PAPER "WHITE" F.R.P. TOWEL 36" GRAB B, D ISPEN3ER-i 03REF A-325 0 REF A-5.06 (TYPICAL) W z A Q O Lu wu 0 LIWE OF•.FRI=EZER /. COOLER GYP, 50. BEHIND FREEZER / COOLER 1. 2" x 2" x 24 GA. "WHITE" -- CLOSURE ANGLE FROM TOP OF THE TILE TO BOTTOM OF CEILING 13 REF A-3.24 18 RESTmlll,,�OM PLAN [J�V1�►Vllll. - - 1/4" = 1'-0" p --------------------- O - - - - - - AC TILE CLG. LINE OF EXHAUST HOOD REF: K-2.05 FOR EXACT LOCATION cl m _W NLL�----------- .._-- ------- - FIELD VERIFY EXTEND FROM TOP OF TILE BASE TO 6" 04 ABOVE CEILING (BY M.G.) 11 1/2 "WHITE" A 325 9'-3" 5'-1 i/2" AC TILE CLG. REF A-3.26 REF A-3.25 -30, • p "WHITE'l CORNER -� GUARD REF A-5.06 II 'I{ - ■ I■■■■11■■■■■■■■■■■1O■■■■N■■■■■■M Q -• AC TILE CLG. z - LINE OF EXHAUST Q HOOD REF: K-2.05 FOR N U EXACT LOCATION w U' u- CORNIER GUARDS 0 61 REF A-5.06 ------------------- T '-5 11' 5'-3" '1'-1 1/2" FIELD VERIFY 24 GA. STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL TO 08EXTEND FROM TOP OF TILE BASE TO 6"0 9 ABOVE CEILING (BY M.G.) REF A-3.25 100 REF A-3.24 REF A-3.25 "WHITE" F.R.P. TELEPHONE -1 V ALL (3) SIDES INTERFACE BOX "WHITE" F.R.P. ol F.R.P. looI nor Iyc --' I 108 A-4.10 - u,lLL c� 4 14, NOTE: ALL FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SUBJECT TO GOVERNING CODE "WHITE" F.RP. 42" GRAB BAR m IL � AU-0 wQ 0 � N - C - �� 3'-0" TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER 22 REF A-3.24 "WHITE" F.R.P. 42" GRAB BAR w fl w u -- -- -CN ZTOILET TISSUE DISPENSER NAFKIN DISPOSAL UNIT 23 REF ,4-3.24 PAINT DOOR WHITE REF SPECS. VIT. Q.T. BASE (3) ELECTRICALA LIGHTING PANEL BOXES CONTROL BOX 15 REF A-3.25 1/2" OR 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD TO 12" ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING - REF. ROOM FIN. SCHED. AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS "WHITE" F.R.P. TO 6" ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING - REF. ROOM FIN. SCHED AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS LINE OF CEILING * 8'-0" A.FF. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE STUD WALL FRM'G 46 SPECIFIED NTERIOR SHEATHING TO BE /2" OR 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. 12" HIGH WATERPROOF -IBERGLASS REINF'D CONCRETE BOARD AT UALLS TO RECEIVE "WHITE" =.RP. - 6" NIGH CONCRETE BOARD AT ALL EXPOSED 3YP. BOARD PAINTED UALLS _AP F.R.P. 1" DOWN BEHIND TILE BASE F APPLIED 51LICONE SEALANT VITREOUS CLAY TILE =LOOK AND COVE BASE :lR VINYL TILE FLOOR AND VINYL COVE BASE 24 WALL FINISH CORNER -i GUARDS REF A-5.06 UA 1/2" OR 5/5" WD. SHTWs. TO 12" ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING - REF. ROOM FIN. SCHED. AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS "WHITE" F.R.P. WALL FINISH TO 6" ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING - REF. ROOM FIN. SCHED. A INTERIOR ELEV'S LINE OF CEILING STUD WALL FRM'G AS SPECIFIED INTERIOR SHEATHING TO BE 1/2" OR 5/8" COX PLYWOOD, WAFFER BOARD, OR O.S.B. AS SELECTED BY THE OWNER'S, REP. AND 4LLOWED BY CODE P. NTERIOR ELEV'S. "WHITE" F.R.P. WALL =1NISH UATERPROOF =IBERGLASS REINF'D :ONCRETE BOARD tO 12" AJ=.F. - TYP. _AP F.R.P. 1" DOWN BEHIND TILE BASE 31LICONE SEALANT VITREOUS CLAY TILE =LOOR AND COVE BASE NOTE: AT ALL LOC'NS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 25 WALL FINISH VIT. Q.T. BASE AC TILE CLG. "WHITE" F.R.P. s� z e -LT. BASE 10 REF A-3.25 FIRE SUPPRESSION CONTROL BOX Z ITE" F.1 GUARDS REF a-5.t �- viT. Q.T. 16 REF A-3.25 17 REF A-3.25 T__._ LINE OF CEILING +� 8'-0" A.F.F. --T STUD WALL FRM'G AS SPECIFIED 5/8" TYPE "X" FIRE - CODE GYP. BD. TO 12" ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING - - -�E- LINE OF BOTTOM OF HOOD AT 2'8-1/2" 24 GA. STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL FROM TOP OF TILE BASE TO ro" ABOVE �E ILING UATERPROOF =IBERGLASS REINF'D CONCRETE BOARD tO 12" APP. - TYP. _AP S.S. 1" DOWN BEHIND TILE BASE 31LICONE SEALANT VITREOUS CLAY TILE --LOOR AND COVE BASE NOTE AT WALL MOUNTED HOODS 26 BALL FINISH cnnr►n� V_ v j z ® pr� woz � a F2 E ®V ®a?U, 0 z U uin con HMV) 00z ttt���lll v � � g ®w w a-119 Q v, 0L Q �- rw ~ W l w �� ��� O .� Lu w . d=Lu 4 0- z SHEET A 3 DWO: 005080-A3 C r c Mti t �vwut� �vuuu� STUCCO AS SPEC. 2 X 6 WD. STUDS 6" KRAFT FACED 6" KRAFT FACED GATT 2 X 6 WD. STUDS BATT INSULATION R-19 2 X 6 WD. STUDS INSULATION R-19 STUCCO AS SPEC. F.R.P.F.R.P. 1/2" SHEATHING F.R.P. P.R.P. ; 1/2" SHEATHING METAL LATH METAL LATH INTERIOR SHEATHING MOISTURE/VAPOR BARRIER GYP. BD. INTERIOR SHEATHING GYP. BD. MOISTURE/VAPOR BARRIER TYPICAL- REF. SPECS. AE /1\ A HEADER ASSEMBLY - REF. S-1.02 TYPICAL- REF. SPCES. HEADER ASSEMBLY - REF. 5-1.02 HEADER ASSEMBLY - REF. S-2-02 CASING BEAD CASING BEAD SEALANT AT JOINT (TYP) _ C IIN- IIN 11 IN, A P 11 .'Al L 26 GA. FLASHING TO F — MFR. STD. J-MOLD SILICONE 26 GA. FLASHING TO ''� STD. O SILICONE MATCH FINISH COLOR u. SEALANT AT JOINT (tYP) MATCH FINISH COLOR u; � u, SEALANT AtT JOINT (TYP) SEA DRIP CAP - DRIP CAP -� �-- SEALANT AT JOINT C _ - 115/16" 19/16" ap - 19/ib 115/16 (TYPICAL) - r 2 1/4" r'_ 2 1/4" r-F0'21 " NOTE: PAINTED H.M. DOOR AND NOTE: PAINTED H111. DOOR AND NOTE: DOOR INSTALLER TO FOAM SEAL OR FRAME DOOR INSTALLER TO FOAM SEAL OR No, FRAME DOOR INSTALLER TO FOAM SEAL OR PAINTED N.M. DOOR AND Z CAULK JOINTS AFTER SETTING DOOR CAULK JOINTS AFTER SETTING DOOR CAULK JOINTS AFTER SETTING; DOOR FRAME 01 03 05 3112 1'-y�/'1 311 1'-o" 311 = 1'-o" F MASONRY ull PA 4" MAS. VENEER EMAS 4" MAS. VENEER 'is" WAINSCOT BELOW F.R.P. ON INT. SHTHG. ON WOOD STUDS #A BEYOND SHEATH'Gs CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT STUCCO VENEER AS SPECIFIED a — F.R.P. OR PAINTED At JOINT 5 3/4" GYP. BD. - REF. 5 3/4" STAINLESS STL. FLASHING CASING BEAD FINISH SCHED. 1" UP UNDER F.R.P. _ < PAINTED H.M. PAINTED HM. 6X6 WD. COL. REF. StRUGt 1/2" WATERPROOF CEMENT BACKER ROD SEALANT "`� tu ' DOOR 4 FRAME DOOR 4 FRAME BOARD t0 24" A.F.P. MFR'S STD. CORNER F.R.P. ON GYP. BD. 2x6 WD. BASE PLATE TOP/MAS. 0 MOLD ALUMINUM THRESHOLD 2 X 6 WD. FIBERGLASS MOP SINK 4" MAS, GAP AS ALUMINUM THRESHOLD REF HARDWARE STUDS VITREOUS CLAY TILE Q SPEC. REF HARDWARE SCHED. SCHED. (ABRASIVE) A 0 ADJ. DOOR BOTTOM, DOOR " STUCCO AS BASE AS SCHED. — — — — — — N -' — 4" MAS. VENEER TILE FLOOR 112 REF. SPECS. F.R.P. SPECIFIED AS SPEC. j LA AS SPEC. TILE FLOOR LL CASING BEAD SHEATHING 71 AI AS SPEC. MFR'S STD. 0 WALL STUDS J-MOLD WITH C ADJUSTABLE DOOR BOTTOM. DOOR 0108. SILICONE CAULK JOINT SLOPE SLOPE REFS. SPECS. THRESHOLD - REF. A-4.01 61 III SILICONE CAULK I AT JOINT I -F 07 08 0 9 NOTE: 10 11 12 REF A-4.01 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES 311 = 1'-011 311 � 1'-011 //�� 311 � 1'-011 1-1/2" = '�1 1'" 311 m 1'-/7511 ASONRY F.R.P. ON INTERIOR WAINSCOT SILICONE CAULK SHEATHING 1/2" SHTHCs BELOW F.R.P. ON GYP. BD. 3'-4" R.O. AT JOINT SILICONE CAULK F.R.P' to } • AT JOINT INT. SHTHG. 6X6 WD. COL. ® r Q REF. STRUCT dg STUD ANCHOR MIN. OF (3) I ( �' 'a 1 8 I I ® AT I 2 X 6 WD. W ® O� '°' DOS STUDS u °� e� w STUCCO AS SPECIFIED ® }� a �' � a F.R.P. ON GYP. BD. 2 X 6 WD. STUDS 1 2 X 4 WD. STUDS O. INT. SHTHG. F.R.P.� CASING BEAD ®�o aw a X F.RP. ON GYP. BD. Ej F- pia SILICONE CAULK +� JOINT SILICONE CAULK +� JOINT — — — — —�_SILICONE CAULK AT JOINT OK � NOTE: REF. A-4.05 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES. NOTE: REF A-4.05 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES _ THRESHOLD 1413 NOTE, 15 NOTE: 16 17 18 u REF A-4.01 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES N 2 X 4WD.AULK STUDS F.R.P.FON GYP. BD. 3'-4" R.O. F.R P. ON GYP. BD. SILICONE AT — — — — — JOINT -' SILICONE CAULK At - JOINT ,-�,- Q Q Lu INT.SHTH T. G. V-4" R.O. SILICONE CAULK _Q SILICONE CAULK JNT. AT JOINT F.R.P. ON INT. SHTHG. CASING BEAD c ~ .� 1L QL o «. o � Lu SILICONE 2 X 6 WD. TUDS AND CAULK R-IS INSUL TION STUCCO AS SPEC. o --t 2 X 6 WD PAINTED H.M. STUDS DOOR t FRAM L JOINT STUCCO A SPEC. xx CORNER LATH N STUCCO AS SPEC. SILICONE CAULK TO MATCH REF A-4.08 THRESHOLD 1/2" SHEATHING FINISH COLOR � MASONRY CASING BEAD WAINSCOT BELOW NOTE: A-4.03 FOR OF NOTES. CASING BEAD MASONRYT WAINSCOT BELOW MASONRY WAINSCOT BELOW STUCCO AS SPEC. SHEET A 4 REF. BALANCE NOTE: REF. A-4.03 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES. NOTE: REF. A-401 FOR BALANCE • 19 20 21 OF NOTES 22 23 24 D1AIG: 311 G 1'-0" 311 C 1'-011 311 1'-oil 005080—A4 -Qznr�n o rknnrIA gvwuc5 �CUGJ�G _A 3- 0 2 X 6 WD. STUDS 2 X 6 WD. STUDS VT T WIN E O LY W STUCCO AS SPEC. 6" KRAFT FACED STUCCO AS SPEC. � BATT INSULATION 1/2 SHEATHING 1/2" SHEATHING b" KRAFT FACED F.R.P. METAL LATH BATT INSULATION METAL LATH 74 "FRP" PANEL MOISTURE/VAPOR BARRIER INTERIOR SHEATHING MOISTURE/VAPOR BARRIER F.R.P. INT. TYPICAL- REF. SPCES. TYPICAL- REF. SPCES. INT. SHEATHING OR SHEATHING 26 GA. FLASHING TO HEADER ASSEMBLY 26 GA. FLASHING TO STRUCT. SHEATHING CORNER LATH — MATCH STUCCO REF 5-102 MATCH STUCCO E-- CORNER GUARDS 2X6 WD. STUDS CASING BEAD CASING BEAD HEADER ASSEMBLY REF 5-1.02 MASONRY WAINSCOT SILICONE CAULK BELOW, TYP. EDGES (TYP) "KEMLITE" STANDARD OUTSIDE CORNER TRIM 'i'-2 1/4" AFF. "KEMLITE" STANDARD OUTSIDE CORNER TRIM '%" SHEAtH'G BRONZE ANODIZED CRIPPLE E-- CORNER GUARDS NOTE: F.RP. FASTENER, MIN. OF w p� LLI. F.R.P.X6 STUDS At DOOR INSTALLER TO FOAM INTERIOR SHEATHING (3) PER STOP �' INT. SHEATHING JAMBS-TYP. NOTE: SEAL OR CAULK JOINTS AFTER SETTING DOOR - '� "KEMLITE" STANDARD J-MOLD WITH NOTE: WINDOW INSTALLER t0 FOAM SEAL OR CAULK JOINTS _ tt "KEMLITE" STANDARD J-MOLD WITH NOTE: REF A-5.01 FOR _� REF. K-1 FOR LOCN S aas Z cv SILICONE SEALANT AFTER SETTING WINDOW SILICONE SEALANT BALANCE OF NOTES 0 01 r- '05 1/2" TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS03 - Z 5/8" DOUBLE PANEL INSULATING GLASS `� 06 am BRONZE ANODIZED ^t w BRONZE ANODIZED ALUMINUM WINDOW UNIT 3„ a �,-0i, ALUMINUM DOOR UNIT 3�� = 1'_�" ' REF WINDOW SCHEDULE 3' = 1 -(�" E—F.RP. SILL AT 3" = 1 -�" z REF DOOR SCHEDULE M AFF. F.R.P. SILL * 3'-10" AFF. su NOTE- REP. A O "KEMLITE" 2 X 6 WD. STUDS F.R.P. SILL AT V-10" AFF. ta 5.03 R STANDARD OUTSIDE -REF A-5.13 F.R.P. SILL BALANCE OF in CORNER TRIM W/ SILICONE SEALANT ySEA!-ANT �— 1 1!2" X 1 I/2" VINYL NOTES INTERIOR SHEATHING STUCCO AS SPEC. VTR At WINDOWS A 4 B ONLY � BULLNOSE F.R.P. (TYP) —SILICONE CAULK JOINT "KEMLITE" STANDARD i CLEAR -(TYP) 6Xro WD. COL. J-MOLD W/ SILICONE SEALANT w REF. STRUCT, Q 1/2" CEMENT BOARD MFR'S STD. INSIDE CORNER 11 4 g< TRIM W/ SILICONE SEALANT VITREOUS CLAY TILE '/2" SHEATH'G INTERIOR SHEATHING �- COVE BASE 4" MAS. SILL < < 2 X 6 WD. STUDS MASONRY 4" MAS. VENEER W/ 6" BATT WAINSCOT SILL FLASHING INSULATION BELOW, TYP. 2X6 CRIPPLE WEEP HOLE — VITREOUS CLAY TILE STUDS CASING BEAD At t� --SILICONE CAULK FLOOR AS SPEC. 2X6 WD. STUDS JAMBS-TYP. WOW JAMB (TYP) JOINT TO MATCH MASONRY WAINSCOT STUCCO (TYP) CORNER LATH BELOW, TYP. 2 X b WOOD SILL "<XXXXXXXXXX 9 PLATE XXXXX NOTE: 5'-0 1/4" R.O. „ 5'-0 1/4" R.O. 0 REF A-5.14 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES 09 SILICONE CAULK JOINT TO MATCH STUCCO - (TYP) NOTE: 07 REF A-5.03 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES 3" 1'-0" 311 1'-oil i'-3" 5'-0 i/4° R.O. 311 _ i'-Q�" INTERIOR SHEATHING F.R.P. F.R.P. SILL F.R.P. SILL At SILICONE CAULK cis 1] 2 X 6 WD. STUDS 3'-10" AFF. REF A-5.13 JNt. CLEAR (TYP) % - "KEMLITE" STANDARD ALUMINUM DOOR 4 SILICONE CAULK - F.R.P. SILL J-MOLD W/ SILICONE SEALANT FRAMING AS SPEC. JOINT TO MATCH 61 � F.R.P. ON INTERIOR SHEATHING (TYP) � } 0 F.R.P. (TYP) ,t m 1 1/2" X i i/2" VINYL SEALANT BULLNOSE I-FR S STD. INSIDE CORNER ® � TRIM W/ SILICONE SEALANT pm 09 --SILICONE CAULK "KEMLITE" I DE CORNER TRIM W/DSILLIICONE SEALANT ifi 04 `% JNT. CLEAR (TYP) L�p ,y o 2 X b WD. STUDS Q cwa 4" MAS. VENEER �— V ® w `` <�w V � AS SPEC. Nv o M 6" BATT -----• #A 1g �Nz �—'—'— INSULATION SILICONE CAULK JOINT 2 X b WD. STUDS 2' -10" OR TO MATCH STUCCO (TYP) 3' -3 3/4" R.O. REM. ® WOW � W � 5' -0 1/4" RO. ASONRY WAINSCOT MASONZO F. WINDOW SCHED. BELOW, TYP. NOTE: WAINSCOT ALUMINUM DOOR t NOTE: BELOW, TYP. SILICONE CAULK MASONRY WAINSCOT T o-- REF A-5.03 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES REF A-5.03 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES FRAMING AS SPEC. JOINT TO MATCH IRWELOW, TYP. 3' -3 3/4" R.D. STUCCO 13 14 15 8 �l NOTE: 1718 NOTE: REF A-5.01 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES O � REF A-5.01 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES //�� 3" I i'-Oil //�� 3" = 1'-011 31' 2 1'-011 //�� 311 Q 4 ■ n Ili LU I LA FL- t� Lo (L v/ 0 0 40 U U 7 d OL Q st N SHEET SA5 .19 20 21 23 24 DWG-. 005080-A5 cRnnrmtp gnMn2 crwuvu`a c., \-rLy ww 11r1--" n nn-_,I V llG�WU� 1^ i A-6.22 j A-6 22 METAL COPING ON V 2 X BLOCKING METAL COPING ON 115'-0" 2 X BLOCKING RUN WALL INSULATION TO TOP LAYER OF PERLITE ROOFING RUN WALL INSULATION TO TOP INSULATION (TYPICAL) LAYER OF PERLITE ROOFING INSULATION (TYPICAL) MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM ON 2 LAYERS OF MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF SYSTEM ON 2 LAYERS OF ut Z SHEATHING RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF SHEATHING 3IV-10 VARIES REF. FRAMING PLAN TOP Or- LEDGER � JOISTS - REF. STRUCT. aye ut BRIDGING - REF. STRUCT. WD. JOISTS - REF. STRUCT. JOIST TO STUD CONNECTION - REF. STRUCT. wu N 1 108'-0" ® g SUSP. CEILING SUSP. CEILINGS CONT. WD. LEDGER - REF. STRUCT. FIRE BLOCKING FIRE BLOCKING SHEATHING AS SPECIFIED 2 X 6 STUDS STUCCO VENEER AS SPECIFIED STUCCO VENEER AS SPECIFIED 2 X 6 STUDS BATT INSULATION. A-411 BATT INSULATION t1:2 CONT, BACKER ROD t SEALANT CONT. BACKER ROD E SEALANT WALL FINISH AS SCHEDULED T.O. MASONRY WAINSCO T.O. MASONRY WAI COT9 10 103'-10" 103'-10" MOISTURE/VAPOR BARRIER MOISTURE/VAPOR BARRIER TYPICAL -REF. SPECS. TYPICAL -REF. SPECS. 1/2" SHEATHING AS SPECIFIED MAS. VENEER WAINSCOT AS SPECIFI MAS. VENEER WAINSCOT AS SPECIFIED WALL FINISH AS SCHEDULED MASONRY WALL TIES MASONRY WALL TIES FLOOR TILE a BASE AS FLOOR TILE t BASE AS SCHEDULED A-6.23 It SCHEDULED z - A 6.23 ® WCONC. 0 CONC. SLAB t FOOTING - REF. FOUND. PLAN SLAB t FOOTING -REF. STRUCT. ® a x z jh 100-0 Fr-. IL aIEl 100-0' FF oc o } U_� °d a 44 z i ?Q� LAj 8 a I" RIGID INSUL. 'e- Jill e ° — °Q W a' 1" RIGID INSUL. Q v d pU Ficz � o$ 13 15 16 17 3/4" 2 1'-0" 3/4" = V-0" Q ' MAS. VENEER 6 6" KRAFT FACED Q. Q lu BATT INSUL., R-19 METAL COPING ON 2X MOISTURE/VAPOR NIA BLOCKING BARRIER, TYPICAL EXTERIOR WALL T �- u, SHEATHING � SILL SEALANT - TWO J CONT. BDS MIN. PLATE BELOW O > f , U ix4 WEEP HOLES .. FLASHING dL STUCCO W/1x4 QO N REVEAL 1/4 PL.YWOO SILL SEALANT - CONT. BD ALONG < a� TREATED JOINT AFTER SILL < SOLE PLATE SHEETIx2 INSTALLATION INSTALLATION BLOCKING SOLE PLATE ANCHORAGE - REF. STRUCT.A6 a '9 202122311-11-011 23CONC. SLAB 24 DWa; 005080—A6 cRmmnr� S�nwo =/%/U vu%,= v Z O SONIC SONIC SOFFIT SUSPENDE TILE 2x4 4 REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY REF SPECIFICATIONS FOR CEILING TILE INFORMATION CEILING TILE PATTERN CENTERED THROUGH STORE IN BOTH DIRECTIONS. 01 REFLECTED cr=lLlN* PLAN 1/4" = 1'-011 PROVIDE 5/8" C-D PLYWD BETWEEN JOISTS AND GYP. BD. WALL EXTENDS FULL HGT. TO BOTTOM OF DECK !RE -CODE TYPE "X" G.D.W. CLG. ��.wwu ROMaG 0 r i v 2 m OA N z "<N* zap a Qr } V Q ® �?8 in u w � too ju W N < O�Z 'pj g ®2�0 WOW O Q- O W �jU t� n !1- OL o c u`t �ocq ,��U 0 Cl IL FLU Lu v lU SHEET A7 ®WO: 005080-A7 ---9@09- 20 GA. G.I. CAP, HEM - EDGES AND SILICONE SEAL PAINT TO MATCH SIDING 3/8" BENT PLATES ' WELDED TO STRINGER �5" x 1/2" LAG BOLT TO @o STUD Qi74 a_rsarr 3/8" BENT PLATES WELDED TO STRINGER 5" x 1/2" LAG BOLT '1" TO STUD m 6'-0" O.C. ATTACH BENT PLATES UNDER SIDING. TRIM OPNG' AND SEAL JOINTS. PROVIDE HINGES, 4 PAD LOCK HASP TO BE WELDED TO FRAME 4 DOOR, AS SELECTED BY OWNER 01 1/2" 1'-0" 18 GA. STAIN STEEL CAP SECURE WITS NEOPRENE L SEAL ROOFI TO G.I. BASE LAP ROOFIN UP UNDER C A MIN. OF 4" ROOFING A8 5/8" PLYWOC SHEATHING 2 X 12 LEDGE 07 SLOPE —3 PENETRATION CONDUIT REF A-8.11 SOUND DISH "MUSAK" REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY �tl REF. SITE PLAN FOR TRUE NORTH 1§@%flG TYPICAL ,,-- 9 " RAD IUS ATTACH EQUIP. TO CURB WITH TKE. UPLIFT BRACKET (4) PER UNIT'7 WRAP ROOFING UP AROUND NAILING BLOCK 3/8" x 3" FLAT STEEL BAR FACTORY CURB A STRINGER, 18" FOR ODIR APART IED BITUMEN d ROOFING AS SPEC. RIGID INSUL. AS SPEC. 3/4" DIAMETER 5/8" PLYWOOD STEEL RUNG, TYP. SHEATHING ba SHIM UNDEftBCfl`OM- '-- FLANGE OF EQUIPMENT CURB TO LEVEL AS REQ'D. ATTACH CURB TO ROOF WITH PROVIDE 18"Xl'-0" 3,&"# A36 ALL THREADS DOWN SECURITY DOOR OF THRU ROOF t0 UNISTRUT — 0 1/4" STL. PLATE OR BELOW JOISTS END EXPANDED MTL FASTENERS LESS THAN i'-0" d (MESH) ON STL. ANGLE PROM CORNERS AND FRAME - AS CENTE ST R EQ. DISC. SELECTED BY OWNER FROMARS ININSTENERS EA. SI FACE) (TOTAL ERS) HINGED CURB (HINGE SIDE Tt FRONT OF BLC SUPPLY FAN ON FACTORY CURB SLOPE --� A-8.04 T1 1 �1 J A-8.0k PENETRATION BOX REF A-8.10 9'-9" RTU " 1 ON FACTORY CURB HINGED CURB (HINGE SIDE Tc, FRONT OF BLDG.) SLOPE --� ICE MACHINE CONDENSERS EXHAUST FAN NO.1 -----a AND NO2 BY OWNERI /� AS GASKET SPECIFIED SEALER FASTEN TO HINGED CURB EXHAU5T Ff-11�t GURE3 SUPPLY O R N0.1 MO SCREWS (2) PER SIDE AATTACH EQUIP TO CURB W/ WELD DUCT FLANGE +q0 TO CURB FLANGE SCREW l2l PER SIDE - VENTED CURB CURB BASE BASE BY OWNER ROOFING AS SPEC. _ �'� CURB ROOFING AS SPEC. TSHIM O MAINRTAIN LEVEL TUCK NE UNDER TUCK UP UNDER RETAINER RETAINER F-- DUCTWORK AV AS SPEC. <-- DUCT WORK tTACH CURB TO ROOF JOIST REF. 5-1.02 ITH 4b"a A36 ALL THREE HRU ROOF DOWN T (STRUT AT BTM. OF MIN REF ARCH. OISTS. FOR OPENING 4) PER UNIT DIMENSION 03 1-1/2" = 1'-0" 20 GA. G.I. CAP, HEM EDGES AND SILICONE SEAL, PAINT TO MATCH VENEER 4" ROOF DRAIN - (WADE OR JOSAM) STRAINER -\ J ARCH. FOR ATTACH CURB TO ROOF `.NING DIMENSION WITH 464 A36 ALL THREAD DOWN THRU ROOF TO I NISTRUT AT BOTTOM OF JOISTS (4) PER UNIT 1 HR.. RATED ASSEMBLY DOWN TO HOOD OR EQUIVALENT DUCT FIRE$OARD OR WRAP 04 1-1/2" = 1'-0" ROOFING AS SPEC. TUCK UNDER DRAIN RING SLOPE CRICKET TO DRAIN 0 1/4" PER FT. PROVIDE GROMMETS AT ALL OPENINGS - CUT OPENINGS TO SIZE FOR REFRIGERANT LINES, CONDUIT OR PIPING AND CAULK TIGHT 20 GA. G.I. BASE����� PLATE TO RECEIVE ROOFING STUD WALL 5/0" PLYWOOD SHEATHING STUCCO RUN TO 4" PVC INSIDE LINE OF LADDER REF A F OF UTILITY ROOM, DOWN 4�` THROUGH SLAB AND RUN LATERALLY TO FACE OF BLOCKING AT TOP OF CURB AT DRIVE-THRU LANE 2 X 12 LEDGER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED REF A-8.13 FOR SLOPE TO DRAIN (2) 5/8" DIA X 4" LONG LAG SCREWS AT EACH STUD 09 COOLER / FREEZER CONDENSERS EXHAUST FAN " 2 ON FACTORY CURBi -i -- SLOPE A-8.06 PENETRATION BOX REF A-8.10 XHAUST FAN +' 1 %4 FACTORY CURB A-8.03 SLOPE --� RTU 2 ON FACTORY (_. SLOPE---� REST ROOM FAN VENT !V C 45' N GASKET OR SEALANT W �� �ia�aa W_ ts�waa�li� raa r • U 1" CLEAR—/ `-1" CLEAR AIR INTAKE/ EXHAUST DUCT REF A-8.02 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES REF M-1.03 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 05 20 GA. G.I. BOTTOMLESS METAL COPING - SLOPE BOX W/ROOF FLASHING FLANGE AND COVER, t0 ROOF I/8" PER Ft. SOLDER JOINTS, ATTACH FASTEN 2 PLY HERE COVER W/SHEET METAL FASTENERS 2 x BLOCKING MODIFIED BITUMEN � EXTEND UP AND OVER BLOCKING 30 SHEATHING EXTEND MOD. BIT, FLASHING UP PARAPET A MIN. OF 8" FIBER CANT. _ sit_ c� 3/4" THICK PERLITE INSUL. ,41 4\F "-- LAP SPECIFIED 2 1/2" THICK POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING UP 'i UNDER COVER REF. A-8.010 11 10 4 ROOF DRAIN -- REF A-8.09 / ROOF ACCESS OPENING OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE 49WATER HR. 'VENT 4 OVERFLOW SCUPPER REF A-8.18 ROOF LADDER REF A-8.01 12" DIA. LONG SWE PVC ELBOW FITTIP SEALANT AT FLA; JOINT ROOF FLASHING F ROOFING TYPE P DIA. PvC PIPE 17 13 ROOF PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" 2@09 CONDENSRR EQUIP. EQUIPMENT AS SPEC. - - - - " - !' _ - FASTEN UNIT TO RACK AS PER MFR. GUIDELINES to U RACK ATTACHED TO AVCOA HURRICANE RESIS. >_ ROOF WITH 2 - aka"O LAG STEEL GONpENSOR RACK BOLTS TI'-IR1.1 ROOF t0 BLOCKING AT EACH LEG. �---- 2x8 BLOCKING REF A-8.02 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES REF A-8.13 FOR LOCATION AND SIZES 6 0 LISTED VENT CAP ROOFING AS SPEC. TUCK UP UNDER RETAINER V CLEAR -/ 6" DIAMATER EXHAUST DUCT REF A-8.02 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES 12 SCUPPER SIZE 5-1/2"HIGH x 21" WIDE ROOFING SEALANT PRIME SHEET METAL SCUPPER 4 EXTEND MOD. BITUMEN S CLAMP FLASHING AS SHOWN SHEET METAL SCUPPER ROOFING SEALANT CANT STRIP MOD. BITUMEN FLASHING 1ILANT rWEEN PIPE FLASHING SLOPE OVERFLOW 1/4"/ FT, 2x6 TREATED BLOCK AS REQ'D 18 .050 PREFINISHED ALUMINUM COPING CAP (NO FASTENERS ON HORIZONTAL SURFACE) PAINT TOP 4 SIDES PER SPEC` SECT. OSS00 CUT 4 OVERLAP VERT. EDGES FOLD MTL. BACK— APPROX. P EA. SIDE TO FORM DAM WALL STUD NOTE: DAM JOINTS 10-0" ac. `Z! INTEGRAL FLASHING COLLAR P CLEAR SONIC z Q ( V W F ® 0.� 04 cr � > aka v } d z': dM E, u w U W w V ® god uau a ut 4c E$T m og z5o + %w F_ mID si�6 r�z �g I— 0� ` I� F_o$ Z H 13 M u_ l44 J w Lo 0 +a J A 61a z A � QC SHEET A8 DWO: 005080—A8 1 _- 1 17'.._ ll[.111L''.11 1' I _ 1' I 1 1! 1 1_.1 ------- L 1 1 1. REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY NOTE ALL FLOOR TILE TRANSITIONS TO FALL ON JOINT, CUT TILE ADJACENT TO WALLS ONLY. FLOOR TILE PATTERN CENTERED THROUGH STORE IN BOTH DIRECTIONS. 01 FLOOR FINISH PLAN SONIC '-6 FACE OF WALL. PROVIDE V8" PER FT SLOPE IN SETTING BED AT ALL PERIMETER WALLS TO 2'-&" OUT FROM FACE OF WALL. (SLOPE EXAGGERATED FOR CLARITY) CERAMIC FLOOR TILE SLOPE NOTE; THIS CONDITION AT DRIVE-THRU (01O3), KITCHEN (01O4), STORAGE (0105), AND PREPARATION C01O(o) ONLY. WALL CUT TI ALON INTRE; OF SL WALL CUT Ti ALONG INTIRM OF SL WALL CUT Ti Tyr- INTRE NO TILE BENEATH OF 8L FIBERGLASS MOP SINK SMOOTH TROWEL SEALED CONCRETE 1-1/2" = V-0" INSIDE CORNER PLAN OUTSIDE CORNER PLAN END WALL FLAN 18 114"=V-0" �vuvu r �. �� I I� V OV V ur 0 Z tge z lu z ®woz ®cl � ag ff aje 0— Qpz � MIN � Z dL v 7 0 no 0 la SHEET A 9 DWG: ri^Ti�L1��d 1/2" = 1' -m" ZIP—'--_v--`_ 13 PROVIDE MTL. REGLET FLASH'G UP UNDER WALL FIN, OR INTO BRICK JT. t DOWN OVER EXTENDER PLASH'G WHITE .025 ALUMINUM BASE 2" BLACK VINYL LETTERS " HELVETICA MEDIUM " 2' - 41l_.-� — CLEARANCEm9'm0 J NOTES: 1. ATTACH TO METAL FASCIA PANEL WITH GALV. SCREWS, TOUCH UP SCREW HEADS WHITE TO MATCH. 2. SUPPLIED BY OWNER 4 INSTALLED BY G.G. - REF. CS-1.01 FOR LOCATIONS 3. SIGN CONVEYS ONLY MIN. HEIGHTS FOR PURPOSES OF INFORMING CUSTOMERS AND IS NOT INTENDED TO REPRESENT MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION HEIGHTS. 14 15 REP. CANOPY STRUCTURAL DUGS G. COL. REF. STRUCT. REP. STRUCT. TS 6x4 PURLIN, SHOP 3-1/4" DIA TEKS SCREWS -� PRIMED -REP. STRUCT W/ RUBBER WASHERS EA TS 6x4 BM., SHOP RIB TO TS 6x4 PURI-IN PRIMED -REP. STRUCT 1/8" SLOPE REF. STRUCT.-----� H LEXTENDER A HF 'G INSTALLED AFTER += L S � CANOPY INSTALLATION UP UNDER REGLET FLASH'G 0 WALL WALL/DECK PAN CHANNEL. RUN BEAD OF SEALANT AND/OR FOAM INSERT IN CHANNEL BEFORE ATTACHING DECK PANS W/POP RIVETS 0 12 "04. EXTERIOR BUILDING FINISH Q WHERE OCCURS. 41 9 �Oa�G FASCIA - REP. CA-1.05 24 GA METAL DECKING AS SPEC.—J PRE -FINISHED WHITE COLUMN COLLAR POP RIVET TO DECK AND SCREW TO COLUMN W/012 x 1-1/4" TEK SCREWS, (2) EA. FACE/COL. SEAL ABOVE AND BELOW DECK TS 6x4 COLUMN. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF DECK PANS, PRIME AND PAINT COL. BLACK AS PER PAINT SPECS, SHEET SP1 SECTION OSS00, PRIME ALL WELDS. ALL CANOPY COMPONENTS FURNISED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. 21 NOTE REF. SPI SECTION 05600 FOR ALL MTL. CANOPY COMPONENTS. REP. E-1.01 t 8102 SECTION 16520 FOR ALL NEON COMPONENTS. 08-18 TEK SCREWS AT EA. BRACE. (2) PER BRACE. 09-18 TEK SCREWS AT EA. BRACE. (3) PER BRACE. 00-18 TEK SCREWS AT EA PAN. (3) PER BRACE. 22 GA. GALV. STEEL BRACE * 48" O.C. DECK PANS SONIC .040" EMBOSSED ALUM. - YELLOW NEON CHANNEL I YELLOW NEON 1 .090 3" 311 _ _--- RED NEON - -- .040" EMBOSSED ALUM. ONE PIECE RED NEON CHANNEL E GRAY FASCIA / GUTTER r 00-18 TEK SCREW (3) EACH DECK PANEL SCREWS AT EA. FLANGE05 - f tYP. (NO POP RIVETS) COTE REP. CA-1.05 FOR BALANCE OF NOTES 22 GA. GALV. STEEL BRACE 0 48" O.C. L2x2x16 GAxi'-6" W/ 2-OS-18 TEK SCREWS AT EA. RIB TO DECK DECK PANS "a-18 TEK SCREW (3) EACH DECK PANEL 3" C 1'-011 '�--- ALIGN BRACE WITH EDGE OF I ,�-- 411 PANS c� .I N '�`- 2 2 I/a" 10 0) I I I I I �_ 4 I 1-3/4" DIA. HOLE IN FACE 1_40I °� ( --------_---------_-- FOR POWER ACCESS.— '7 I I I I I I (4)3/8" x P LONG BOLT WELDED TO'C' SUPPLY NUT t WASHERON BOLT FOR MENU iA INSTALLATION I I ,ten ( MENU BOARD SUPPLIED AND I I AND INSTALLED BY OWNER I I ( SPEAKER HOOK UP BY OWNER (° ( I POWER NOOK UP BY E.C. I I II iI -----� L - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3/4" 3/4" D I A. HOLE IN FACE I I — �! � _ �_- � — �- -� - - - - - - - - FOR SPEAKER WIRE I I I / / \ — — — — — — - ACCESS. II------------- i I I MENU BRACKET SUPPLIED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY G.C. REP. CA-1.22 I I i 14 GA COLD ROLE STEEL CHANNEL PRIME AND PAINT TO MATCH CANOPY I I `� ( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TRAY SHELF SUPPLIED AND COLUMNS ( I r i INSTALLED BY OWNER — _ — — — — _ I I m I f a1 N U SUPPLIED BY OWNER I I I W_ n (ORDERMATIC) INSTALLED BY G.C. I I ( w REP. CA-1.23 I o VI 22 11 23 3" 21 1-In" = MAINTAIN 2" CLEARANCE k1/8" C MIN. 12 60. IN. HOLE IN GUTTER WITHIN 4x6 SCUPPER OUTLINE, PRE -FINISHED SCUPPER INSTALLED OVER HOLES. - REP. CS-1.01 FOR LOCATIONS. "`----- .040" EMBOSSED ALUM. YELLOW NEON CHANNEL .040" EMBOSSED ALUM. ONE PIECE RED NEON CHANNEL 4 GRAY FASCIA / GUTTER '�— ALIGN BRACE WITH EDGE OF PANS MAINTAIN 2" CLEARANCE k1/8" \I III III I III �i 7 1" DIAMETER HOLE IN COLUMN FOR POWER CONDUIT. REF.CS-2,21 OR CS-2.22. BY G.G. S;i Rf 12 im :4 W �Z€ m oo ® WW • s Mel � EEO§ V P DIAMETER HOLE IN COLUMN FOR SPEAKER CONDUIT. RERCS-2.21 OR CS-2.22. BY G.C. IQ I I I/2" FLEX CONDUIT INSIDE COLUMN © (L Q W FROM U:G. CONDUIT. BY E.G. } H � J TSbx4 COLUMN � 3:: u; � O O w � dL Z N O H SONIC SHEET CAI DwG: 005080—CA i �OU V a�J V OIJ V ��J e 9 9 TYP. T-O" 1'-0"XoII'-0" CS-2.23 OPP 2'-0" 01 CA-1.05 T.O.S. ELEV. = 110 4/4" BI T.O.S. g (11 COLUMN e ELEV. = 110'-3Y4" v T.O.S. ELEV. = 110'-4V4" A T.O.S. ELEV.: 110-4'' IL- - �r � T.O.S. COLUMN r ELEV.: 110'-4Ya" I `r T.O.S. ELEV. = 110-4" CS-2.23 T.O.S. ELEV. 0 T.O.S. 41 Q, COLUMN e ELEV. = 110'-3" �* TA.S. ELEV. = 110-2! " o Q U SIM. T.O.S. ELEV. = 110'-2 2" - - T.O.S. a t COLUMN )L ELEV. = 110-3" Y T.O.S. ELEV. = 110-3y? - I Q U 9'-3" 9 I6 -0" CA-1.1 EIM. T514x3/I(oo I O T56x4x3/1(o =/ 10 X X X X - - — - —T — x — — x — x 11.2 x ,�•� X T%x43/16 O T5rox4x311rb O 56x4x3/I(o O T56x4x3/I(o CS-2.06 - - + - - x - It 0- - 12'-0" 12'-0" 01 56x4x3/16 O T56x4x3/16 ~ FG OF TYP. TS(ox4x3/I(o CANOPY RIDGE rn oQ 2'-9" 42' -0" T.O.S. o it COLUMN ELEV. = 1104y" T.O.S. ELEV. = 110'-3Y4" FINISH FLOOR ELEV. = 100'-0" I -- CS-2.04 BLDG 5'-3" 9.0 T56x4x3/I(o XX m � TSbx4x3/1(o SIM.XJ 2'-0" 1'-0" TYP. CA-1.19 HIGH SIM. CS-2.07 HIGH CA-1.05 CS-2.19 LOW to g N O T5(ox4x3/16 O T5(ox4x3/16 O T56x4x3/16 O T5bx4x3/16 Ct X X X X X X X 2 x 11 X 3 X 4 - - �- - 1 ~ TYP. TYP, TYP. 110 TSbx4x3/I6 TS(ox x3/I(o 5 TS(ox4x3/I(o 5 �TS(ox4x3/I6 O O CS-2.07 H113H 8 8 6 CS-2.19 L W CA-1.19 TYP. —11-0 " HIGH TYP. 110' -0" 141' -0" 143' -0" TYP. TS6x4x3/I6 O TS(ox43/16 O TSbx4x3/16 O TS6x4x3/16 O X X X CA X X X X X X �t - - - - - - -i - - - - - -- - 1 2 3-, Nx x fnxa TYP. TYP. ~ rc i T56x4x3/I6 O I T5(ox4x3/1(o O TSbx4x3/I(o O TS(ox4x3/16 \ 0 CA-1.0`. TYP, 01 CANOPY PLAN 1/Q11 = 11-011 T5(ox4x3/16 TS(ox43/I6 TOP OF PARKING PAVEMENT A55UME ELEV. v N U O TSbx4x3/16 0 K1 c� cl M X X X X - - - X - - - O T5bx4x3/I(o O e KEYNOTE SCHEDULE O1 24 GA METAL DECK PANS REF. SP-1 SECTION 05600 OTS6x4xY4 STEEL COLUMNS REF. SP-1 SECTION 05120 AND SECTION CS-2.07 O3 TS6x4 BEAMS REF. SP-1 SECTION 05120 AND SHEET CS-2 ® TS6x4 PURLINS REF. SP-1 SECTION 05120 AND SHEET CS-2 5O PURLIN SPLICE REF. CS-2.02 O6 SCUPPER REF. CA-1.05 POSITION BETWEEN STALLS AT 30- ANGLE FROM COLUMN. TYPICAL AT EACH BAY O7 PYLON TUBE REF, CS-2.23, & CA-1.07 ® CLEARANCE SIGN REF. CA-1.14 OFREESTANDING MENU COL., 5'-6" MIN. COL. HT. ABOVE PAVING, 2'-6" DEEP DRILLED PIER. REF. CS-2.19 SIM. FOR COL. BASE DTL. REF. CA-1.23 SIM. FOR MENU WIRING DTL. 10 2"- OVERFLOW SCUPPER REF. CA-1.05 POSITION EVERY FIFTH STALL AT 30- ANGLE FROM COLUMN ON HIGH SIDE ENGINEERING DATA CANOPY DESIGN DATA FLOOR LIVE LOADS: 50 PSF ROOF LIVE LOAD: 20 PSF ROOF DEAD LOAD: 5 PSF GROUND SNOW LOAD: 0 PSF WIND DESIGN DATA: BASIC WIND SPEED (3 SECOND GUST): 110 MPH WIND IMPORTACE FACTOR = 1.0 WIND EXPOSURE CATEGORY: C BUILDING CATEGORY: II OPEN BUILDING INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS: 0 ALL NEW COMPONENTS AND CLADDING NOT DESIGNED BY THE ENGINEER SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR 25 PSF UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. EARTHQUAKE DESIGN DATA: SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I: 1.0 MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATIONS: SS=0.098 S1 =0.04 SITE CLASS: D SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY: A BASIC SEISMIC -FORCE -RESISTING SYSTEM: CANTILEVERED COLUMN DESIGN BASE SHEAR: 0.30 kips SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT: Cs=0.01 RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR: R=2.5 ANALYSIS PROCEDURE USED: EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE METHOD FLOOD HAZARD INFORMATION: THIS BUILDING IS NOT DESIGNED FOR FLOOD LOADS. Pmjeax W4213 • o fT1 � v V, 0 • V1 in W w o `I� N•V CD WIL a 0 ¢� z U 1!1 oho ® Z cv Iwo' zo !� � Ln �>_aJ ® > C� azVw Z 4 � =OuNi <20> ® J wWQ /�jj muj oz Iy p Q UJ O �z> n ® OZw0 10 wow wi- U) @� Z}mz o CoiP 3 P � Z Q w~� wwz Ln C, �' o o 0 r� NOTES: DIMENSIONS TO BUILDING ARE TO THE BUILDING FRAME WITHOUT n 0 n� REGARD TO VENEER. o Q Q DIMENSIONS TO CANOPY TUBE STEEL FRAME AND TUBE STEEL COLUMNS ARE TO CENTERLINE OF MEMBER (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). Q Z - — CANOPY DECK DIMENSIONS AROUND BUILDING TO BE ADJUSTED AS U-- REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE VENEER. CANOPY FRAME SHALL NOT BE � (� � ADJUSTED. 0 — !L CANOPIES ARE TO REMAIN LEVEL WITH BUILDING. Q I: u n „ MAINTAIN A 2 EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN BUILDING AND CANOPY. DO NOT SLOPE CANOPIES WITH GRADE. O J O N USE COLUMNS CLOSEST TO BUILDING ELEVATION AS BASE POINTS FOR '� Z COLUMN HEIGHT. COLUMNS CAN INCREASE UP TO 2'-6" IN HEIGHT TO ADJUST FOR GRADE VARIATIONS. TOP OF COLUMN PIERS WILL ADJUST WITH TOP OF PAVING. IF THE GRADING PLAN REFLECTS A GRADE FROM ONE END OF A CANOPY TO THE OTHER GREATER THAN 2'-6" THE CONTRACTOR WILL NOTIFY THE SONIC A&E DEPT. CS1 Dywro: 005080-CS1 SONIC SONIC 1" -0 HOLE It COLUMN 4 - it 21/2" a HOLE Own NO 17 III II I —_— (2) 1" 4 (1) 2112" 4 PRE -DRILLED HOLES FOR ELEC. CONDUIT THROUGH STL PLATE 4 BM. 4NINIi4" STL PLATE WELDED TO TOP/GROSS BM N\LT56x4 CROSS BM TS6x4 COL JL I I 2 1/4' 2 I/4" 6"01 01 1 1/211 = 1'-011 REF. PLAN-SHT C51- T56x4 PURLIN SHOP PRIMED T.O.S. 0 CO[-- C5-2.04 TS(o x4 BM SHOP PRIMED Jz 0Q 0- r� XU Y M� O 0 Z T56x4 COL O 3/4 11x12 "x1' -0" BASE fE z 4-3/4"044" A30-1 ANCHOR 0 > BOLTS W/DBL NUTS. PROVIDE 1-3"x5" HOLE a CENTER OF BASE fE FOR CONDUIT LOOPS 02 1 1/211 = 1'-011 COL REF. PLAN-5HT CSI 10 lie" SLOPE REF. .d 5-1001 1 1 k C5-2.01 C5-2.04 OPP TS(ox4 COL 4L WELD INC) SMOOTH T.O.S. PURL I N 4" x 4" ACCESS HOLE WITH AN ACCESSIBLE COVER PLATE. ONLY WHERE NEEDED. REF. E-1.01 PLATE TO BE SAME MATERIAL AS COLUMN OR 16 GA GALVANIZED. PAINT TO MATCH. SECURE COVER PLATE WITH 1/4" x I" BOLT THREADED THROUGH PLATE AND 3/4" x 5" STRIP USED AS A TOGGLE. 11/2 " I FINISH FLOOR BLDG I I TYP CONCRETE PAVING OR WALK - REF. ELEv = 100 -0" TYP. i/4 I I SITE DEVELOPMENT/CIVIL DWGS TOP/PARKING PAVEMENT I � x ° ° I I. I 4 d ° 8" a PAWING PAVEMENT I ° ° 1'-2" O PATIO SLAB d III -ICI ° d° ° P. rA' fl� I� II PACKIGROUTKDRY UNDER BASE PLATE 1 71 A SAND OR GRAVEL BA5E AFTER LEVELING, ° . I °� I o (REF. SOILS REPORT) 0 BEFORE PAVING 15 d N PLACED u- j �a 4 ° d ° + �° < 24" DIA. CONCRETE PIER W/ p ° 6-06 VERT 4 03 TIES 0 U ° I a d° I 12 "O.C. m 4M ° a • SONIC �21_011�' TS6x4 CANTILEVER I/ 1/4 TS6x4 ----- ----- TS6x4xCONT. CRO55 MEMBER reT,' 1 1/211 = 1'-oil TS6 x4 COL. Ya" EXP. JOINT MAT'L REF ARCH 2" NON -SHRINK GROUT 2'-0 x 2'-0 x I' -II" SPOT FOOTING W/ 12 03 VERT 4 5-03 HORIZ TOP 4 BOT. 4 tI�Ll3=1 �4 I- RE INF'G 09 FOR CONT. FTG T5 COL- 3/4" BASE fE W/ (4)-3/4110 x18" A301 ANCHOR BOLTS W/DBL NUTS FACE OF WALL FRAMING LINE OF FOOTI BELOW PAVIN C �1 N ^1 1/2" 1 1/2 2 1/2' NG 21 _ 011 G 1" = 1'-0 36x4 CANOPY OLUMN - P DIA. HOLE ;UT IN COLUMN. 2ER CA-1.23 .3RACKET- REF. CA-1.22 FACE OF WALL FRAMING 5EE 51TE PLANS FOR DIRECTION, LOCATIONS AND ANGLES OF STALL 21 MENU5. 3" = 11-0 11 911 1 1/2" 04 1 1/211 = 11_011 1� c4xCONT. c4 FACE OF WALL FRAMING WALL FRAMING 4" GONG 5LA5 ON GRADE REF 5-1.01 REF 5-1.01 FOR ADD'L NOTES CONT. FOOTING, REF 5-2.01. REINFORCING CONTINOUS THRU SPOT FOOTING. REF 5-2.01 FOR SIZE 4 SPACING FACE OF CONT. FOOTING PATIO CANOPY T56x4 COLUMN —2 - 1" DIA. HOLES CUT IN COLUMN. REF CA-1.23 22 3" = 1' -011 012 n tr 1/8 V112 BRACKET -REF CA-122 SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION AND NUMBER OF PATIO MENUS. 3/16" TS(o x-, 05 23 1 1/211 = 11-011 3/411 = 1'-0" 9'-O" DECK DIMENSION - RIpCsE GAP, A��l/� BELOW CANOPY DE, PAN OPTIONAL JOINT IN CANOPY DECK PAN CANOPY DECK PAN 1 1/211 = 1' —011 CANOPY FRAMING REF. C5-2.0l O N I <n U Project SO4213 00 00 inAn a 3131 1,4 o1 A W W g � 10 � �o l e � 3 A a� wj_ I � wOZ U 0 ® Z N irwv Ill a3� Ca I_ 00 � ZZw r Z 4 �wwW Q Q o o w Q 11 u v)zr RjmwV)a U �Emoz Oaw Q rz> n ®Owl wow Qwr= - Qa 0~o 3mZ a p irZO �,�g555 rr w_� a w~of o 0 W.T Z roo � Q z � o Q UNDERSLUNG CANOPY DECK PANS -REF. CANOPY ARCH DWGsS F- Q , Q o w AND SPECS. CANOPY FRAMING 15 THE SAME J [L/ (� cf) 0- O REGARDLESS OF no0O � -1 WHETHER DECK 15 ABOVE OR BELOW. n/ o o0 a �=vim pOp� v N l�- � VJ QA SONIC CS2 DWG: 005080-CS2 Im _1L1.._ 1 1 11 ! _ I L. FOUNDATION PLAN NOTES: 1. FLOOR DRAIN GRATES SHALL BE FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR ALL FLO, TO BE 1 /2" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR. 2. SLOPE FLOOR 1 /16" PER FOOT MIN. AT ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND FL001 SHOWN. 3. ALL SIMPSON HOLD DOWNS TO BE STAINLESS STEEL OR Z-MAX G185 GALVANIZED COATING. 4. ALL SILL PLATE ANCHOR BOLTS TO BE STAINLESS STEEL OR G185 HOT GALVANIZED. 5. ALL STEEL IN CONTACT WITH TREATED WOOD TO BE STAINLESS STEEL C HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED. SOIL PREPARATION NOTES: 1. PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE FOR ALL TRENCHES DURING CONSTRUCTOOI` ALLOW ANY PONDING OF WATER DURING CONSTRUCTION. 2. THE SOIL BENEATH THE BUILDING AND 5 FEET AROUND THE PERIMETEF TREATED AS FOLLOWS: A. STRIP THE AREA OF ALL VEGETATION B. PROOF ROLL THE SITE WITH A TANDEM AXLE LOADED DUMP TRUCK DIRECTIONS. ANY AREAS WHICH ARE NOTED TO RUT OR PUMP EXCE`. SHALL BE UNDERCUT AND BACKFILLED WITH COMPACTED ON SITE S01'. SELECT FILL ACCORDING TO THE COMPACTED REQUIREMENTS NOTED E C. THE NEXT 8 INCHES SHALL BE THOROUGHLY SCARIFIED, WITH WATE RAISE THE MOISTURE CONTENT TO WITHIN 2 PERCENTAGE POINTS OF AND RE -COMPACTED TO A DENSITY IN THE RANGE OF 95% TO 100% STANDARD PROCTOR. THE FIRST LIFT SHALL BE PLACED ON THE COM SUBGRADE WITHIN EIGHT HOURS OF COMPLETING THE COMPACTION. D. THE FILL REQUIRED TO RAISE THE BUILDING TO BENEATH THE FLOC SHALL BE EITHER ON SITE FILL OR SELECT FILL. THE SELECT FILL St A PLASTICITY INDEX BETWEEN 5 AND 15 AND A LIQUID LIMIT LESS Th PLACE THE FILL IN 8 INCH LIFTS AND COMPACT TO AT LEAST 95% 0 STANDARD PROCTOR. ANY AREAS OF LOOSE FILL OR DELETERIOUS MA SHALL BE REMOVED AND FILLED AS NOTED. 3. THE FOUNDATION DESIGN DOES NOT APPLY TO SITES ON EXPANSIVE S( LOCATIONS WITH A WATER TABLE WITHIN 5 FEET OF THE SURFACE OR AR SOIL WHERE THE STRENGTH IS QUESTIONABLE SUCH AS FILL (AS REQ'D I SECTION 1802.2) EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO VERIFY THAT THE SUPPORT ARE ADEQUATE. IF CONDITIONS SUCH AS THOSE MENTIONED ABOVE EXIST, THE ENGINEER. REF 8-13.13 OPP 3 - 13 DOWELS EVERY DOOR OPENING REF. -2.05 r_- a I� VTR 00 x. ULs. CONDUIT STUB UPS FROM MENUS FOR L� CONTINUATION TO 7 BOX REF. E-4.01 - CANOPY CAL. FTG. REF.5-223 M I V) all LA PROVIDE SIMP50N HTT22 NOLDOWNS * EACH END OF SHEARWALLS. (4 TOTAL REO'D THIS END OF BLDG.) REF. 5-3.13 REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY .WIM - - - - - - - - - - - - I I REF 5-3.13 SIM T D - - L v REF S-3.13 60'-10" 2'-(boll01 S-2.01 e TYP. - - --�� ------------ - F5 �r FLOOR 51NK (F5) - SLOPE TO DRAIN - TOP OF GRATE SHALL BE FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR COVERING - TYPICAL T 2'-9" T 2' 9'-011 FINISH FLOOR ELEV. 100' -0" tti r SINK DRAIN I SIM - 2 (- '3 x 4'-0" N51DE CORNER I I I S1L�K---- DRAIN� CLEAN -OUT FLOOR DRAIN (FD) - SLOPE 9 TO DRAIN - TOP OF GRATE SHALL BE FLUSH WITH - - - - - - - - FINISHED FLOOR COVERING - TYPICAL W � I'-61/2" e T C J , OF "_ i FD 6'-511 2'-6" 2'-6" 4'-10" 3'-3" 3'-0" 8'-9" / I'-1"62'-9" 3'-411 3'-4" 5'-S" l 60'-10" I'-2I/2" 4" CONCRETE, SLAB ON GRADE W103 is I6" O.G. EA. WAY, OVER 6 MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDER OVER 4" SAND CUSHION, COORDINATE FOUNDATION REQUIREMENTS WITH SOILS REPORT 2 3/4" TYP. I I MOP SINK I STUB UP 2' -6 I/ " G.W STUB UP I I I �1 CONCRETE NOTES: ALL CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A 28 DAY DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH PSI, A MINIMUM OF 5 SACKS OF PORTLAND CEMENT PER CUBIC YARD, M WATER REDUCING AGENT AND A 6-7" SLUMP. PROVIDE SIMPSON WTT22 HOLDOWNS g 2. THE MID RANGE WATER REDUCING AGENT ADMIXTURES SHALL BE CHO EACH END OF SHEAR WALL. (4 TOTAL ONE OF THE FOLLOWING; REQ'D THI5 END OF BLDG.) REF. 5-3.06 EUCON X-30 BY EUCLID SILKMENT MP BY SIKA PLASTTIMIX MR BY PROMIX TECHNOLOGIES SARACEM 65 BY W.R. GRACE AND CO. POLYHEED 997 BY MASTER BUILDERS 3. ALL CONCRETE WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE STANDARDS "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL C PROVIDE 1/2" DIA X 811 (ACI 318-02) AND "SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BU ANCHOR BOLT AT 24" OC (ACI 301-99) AT REAR WALL 4. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW DOMESTIC DEFORMED BILLET STEEL CONFORMING TO A.S.T.M. A-615 GRADE 60. 5. REINFORCING BAR, BAR SUPPORTS, AND SPACERS SHALL BE DETAILED PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE A.C.I. DETAILING MANUAL. CHAIRS SH PLACED FURTHER THAN 4 FEET APART. BAR SUPPORTS SHALL BE THE FC DAYTON/RICHMOND PRODUCTS OR EQUAL: 6. EPDXY ANCHORS, REBAR, OR THREADED RODS, SHALL BE EITHER HILTI REF 6-3.12 ANCHORS OR SIMPSON EPDXY - TIE ANCHORS. INSTALL ACCORDING TO T MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. THIS INCLUDES CLEANING THE HOLE FLOOR LIVE LOADS: 50 PSF ROOF LIVE LOAD: 20 PSF REF 5-3.12 SIM ROOF DEAD LOAD: 18 PSF GROUND SNOW LOAD: 0 PSF WIND DESIGN DATA: BASIC WIND SPEED (3 SECOND GUST): 110 MPH WIND IMPORTACE FACTOR = 1.0 REF 5-3.12 WIND EXPOSURE CATEGORY: C BUILDING CATEGORY: II ROOF DRAIN THRU SLAB ENCLOSED BUILDING INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS: +/- 0.18 ALL NEW COMPONENTS AND CLADDING NOT DESIGNED BY THE ENGINEER DESIGNED AS FOLLOWS: ZONE 1: 36.8 psf ZONE 2: 57 psf ZONE 3: 67 psf EARTHQUAKE DESIGN DATA: SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I: 1.0 ?NERS MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATIONS: SS=0.098 S1=0.04 SITE CLASS: D SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY: A BASIC SEISMIC -FORCE -RESISTING SYSTEM: LIGHT -FRAMED WALLS WITH W STRUCTURAL PANELS DESIGN BASE SHEAR: 1.01 kips SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT: Cs=0.01 RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR: R=6.0 ANALYSIS PROCEDURE USED: EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE METHOD FLOOD HAZARD INFORMATION: THIS BUILDING IS NOT DESIGNED FOR FLOOD LOADS. 0 1 FOUND AT ION FLAN 4 1/4" = 1'-0" rJuuvu c'>OUV�I`� )R DRAINS ? SINKS AS -10T DIPPED DIPPED ,R G185 0 DO NOT SHALL BE IN TWO SIVELY OR ELOW. Z ADDED TO OPTIMUM o OF Q 'ACTED 0 Z R SLAB � Z o ALL HAVE AN 30. - THE fERIALS 0 o ILA a N _AS WITH Q °� 4 IBC o NG SOILS 0 aaQ CONTACT Project 904213 OF 3,000 • o rr D RANGE 00 k I a �v 3EN FROM c w W w o ~ !ONCRETE o ONCRETE" �j LDINGS" o all tn 4ND A 4LL NOT BE , LLOWING } 0 HIT ® 61 0 1E WITH AIR. a �Z U " 0 0 ® z N �zo +� ca = Lei r ZZuj w w z p w now a u o I, w LS NZ� Q e -j wQ N !� moz O rZ> W Q`-'0 � Zwo wow Qwr Z o a 3 P �QO SHALL BE p �vof nn��,, ww 25 Z �00 a Q DOD Z � Q O -A Q o 00 = Oo D_ �O IL � o SHEE4 S1 DWG. 005080-S1 SONIC SONIC V_ Z m TOP OF 14" RIM BOARD LEDGER @ 112'-1 1 /2" 3-2xb HEADER 3-2x(o HEADER REF. 5-3.18 TYP. 3-2x& HEADER TOP OF 2x8 LEDGER @ 112'-3" 3-2x6 HEADER 3-2x6 HEADER M Q J > U=�J w TOP OF 14" RIM BOARD LEDGER @ 112'-1 1 /2" REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY 2'x4' 5/8" SHEATHING FOR HANGING POS MONITORS. ALIGN WITH 2' SPACING OF ROOF J015T. ATTACH TO UNDERSIDE OF JOIST WITH �10 X 1 3/4" WOOD SCREWS s 6" OC AT EACH JOIST LOCATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS WITH P05 VENDOR FOR MONITORS. TYP. OF (6) LOCATIONS. REF. 8-321 3 - 2X6 FULL HT STUDS REF. 5 - 323 SIM TYP AT ALL OPENINGS GREATER THAN 4'-0" 5/8" ROOF SHEATHING. ALIGN PANEL ENDS AS SHOWN. REF. TO NOTE NO. T FOR ATTACHMENT PROVIDE DBL. J015TS O ROOF TOP UNIT LOCATIONS - TYP. SHEARWALL - REF TO NOTE NO. I O1 ROOF FRAMINCs PLAN G.>V,n,6 va i m 43CN�1` 13 PI?nvImP MRI InIATS A �nF 3-2x12 HEADER SHEARWALL - REF. TO NOTE NO. I TOP OF RIM BOARD LEDGER @ 110'-10 1 /2" 2 X 6 WOOD FRAMING (TYP.) 3-2x6 HEADER 3-2x6 HEADER ROOF FRAMING NOTES: 1. EXTERIOR WALLS TO HAVE 15/32" EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD SHEATHING FULL HEIGHT. PROVIDE 8D NAILS AT 6" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND AT 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE STUDS, EXCEPT AT DESIGNATED SHEARWALLS. 2. ROOF DECK TO BE 5/8" EXTERIOR GRADE SHEATHING. 3. DESIGNATED SHEARWALLS: 15/32" PLYWOOD STRUCTURAL SHEATHING ON THE EXTERIOR SIDE OF STUDS. PROVIDE 10d NAILS AT 4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND AT 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE STUDS. 4. ALL WALL STUDS AT 16" OC (UNO), OR AS REQUIRED. 5. EXHAUST HOODS: SHALL BE SUSPENDED FROM ROOF JOISTS W/4-1/2" DIA THREADED RODS. ALL HARDWARE AND BLOCKING PROVIDED FOR ROD SUPPORTS SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE WEBS OF THE JOISTS. PROVIDE WEB STIFFENERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE JOIST MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AT EACH ROD SUPPORT LOCATION. DO NOT ATTACH RODS OR ROD SUPPORTS TO JOIST FLANGES. 6. ATTACH RIM JOIST LEDGERS TO EACH STUD WITH SIMPSON SIDS 1/4x 3 WOOD SCREWS AND TO SOLID BLOCKING WITH 16d NAILS AT 6 INCHES ON CENTER. 7. WOOD ROOF CONNECTION SCHEDULE: PROVIDE 10d NAILS AT 4" OC, AROUND ROOF OPENINGS, ROOF PERIMETER, AND AT ALL PANEL EDGES. USE 2x4 FLAT BLOCKING. REF S-3.14. PROVIDE 10d NAILS AT 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE PANEL 0 SUPPORTS. 9 m � z � o Q � Q4 � Iu z O U �jj O w w N 5HEARWALL- REF. TO NOTE NO. 3 v NUJ o a � i Q °a 0 Proj•d SO4213 • o fTl � v • �, kn a �� � a � o� � H W w V1 •� � co Aa Z �' a w cai d a30- [)1 in a o 0 ® > U 0 Q?� Z ® ww NJ 4 ��w N pOL-► Qnow �[ vz' ® w a � m wo '� 0aw O rz> � e7 oc'� ® Zw� Q wow � Qwr N � �~O 8 '� z�z o CA 3 c �ZO a I� o � � w of Wwz z rs DWG: Ln O a 0 UD 005080-S1A SONIC MA5. VENEER SILL FLASHING o WEEP HOLES Z1/2 EXPAN51ON JOINT MATERIAL -REF. - Q!@ SPECS _ <-- SLOPE PVMT 1/4" / FOOT STANDARD 3" SAND BED OVER SUBGRADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH $OILS REPORT UNDER WALKS 4 PAVING CONT. FOUNDATION , REINF., REF. 5-2.01 , .. a a' '5x2'-O"x2'-O" CORNER BARS. • 4 SPACING TO MATCH FOUNDATION, REF. d. 44 •. • Gr it Cif 2 x 6 WOOD STUDS 1/2" 4x8" ANCHOR BOLT WITH SIMPSON BPI/2 WASHER is 48" OC UNO SOLE fE TO BE TREATED WOOD 4" CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE REINFORCING • CENTER OF SLAB - REF. 5-1.01 FOR 51ZE 4 SPACING 6 MIL POLY VAPOR RETARDER UNDER SLAB !TF4" SAND BED OVER APPROVED 5U5GRADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SOILS REPORT 04x24"44" DOWEL ® 16" O.C. 24" CL\ 03 CLOSED STIRRUPS i 24"oc. 2-05 6 12o.c. FOR FOOTINGS OVER 24" DEEP 4-%xCONT. TOP E BOTT. PERIMETER RIGID INSULATION - REF. ARCH. DW55 NOTE: FROST DEPTH 15 24" 03 04 05 06 MASONARY BEYOND WALL STUDS BEYOND TAPER UP CONCRETE TO DOOR OPENINGS w 1/8" PER FT. EXTERIOR CONC. SIDEWALK SLAB / dy d><E----J N N a a d a GONG. SLAB ON GRADE 3-03x4'-O" DOWELS EQUALLY SPACED ACRO58 ALL EXTERIOR DOOR 08 OPENINGS 311 = 1' -011 13 114 is 116 19 120 I 21 122 SONIC T5bx4 COL. �.3 ��� FADE OF WALL FRAMING m N I I WALL FRAMING N Y" EXP. JOINT MAT'L REF 4" CONC SLAB ON ARCH GRADE REF S-IDI I I v4 I I 2" NON -SHRINK I I I GROUT REF S-ICI FOR ° . _� . .. '" a - . ADD'L NOTES i ° • i ^ E G a. •LA* �� -:: v � •. d 6 2'-0 x 2'-0 x I'-11" SPOT .•..IFOOTING W/ 12 03 VERT 4 5-03 ��, `• :° aCONT. FOOTING, REF HORIZ TOP t BOT, a a 5-201. REINFORCING • ° CONTINOU5 THRU T -T • ° SPOT FOOTING. REF - -•I�• �.�� I 5-2.01 FOR SIZE a SPACING •. - a a ° p. . G• t li L la _ I •. �. �-44--l-4—I �--- REINF'G FOR CONT. FTG FACE OF CONT. 17 2,. 0,, REF BLDG FOOTING FTG T5 COL 3/4" BASE fE W/ (3)-3/44 XI8"- A301 ANCHOR BOLTS W/DBL NUTS FACE OF WALL FRAMING LINE OF FOOTING - BELOW PAvING 23 • 11/2" 1111 `V - 9 1/2" FACE OF WALL 2' -0" FRAMING Proj•d 804213 • O - W 9 • h h a o v� W w N I= �'r � } 0,14 0 0 a Q 0 wOZ U Jl cv aowa L.m L[1 a Q of Z 4 thwU En = o Q o�w u �Zr ®a�LL- �w�a moz Q 0cw O �z> OS2of ® zWo wow � ¢wr Z o a 3�z P �ZO a Wwz z rro � Cl z � W LC)0 In -AUp a �(s) Q O a N �3 Oo WD SHER S2 DwG: 005080-S2 9OO 09 1 1 1 1 1 9@ 109 rannnnra ,�)vuvuG �vuvu� CONTRACTORS NOTE: STUDS, 13LKG 4 OTHER FRAMING MEMBERS TO 2x(oxFULL BE GLUED TOGETHER 4 HEIGHT 1/2" STRUCT. ATTACHED W/10d NAILS WALL STUD SHEATHING - 115'-0" 6 O.C. ALONG WINDOW 2x6 FRAMING- C JAMB 41'-0" ABOVE = HEADER 4 I'-0" BELOW STRUCT.5ILL. WALL INTERIOR SHEATHING cq SHEATHING SHALLNOT cn - REF. ARCH. BE SPLICED W/ IN THE 0 GLUE ZONE. -' 5TRUCT. SHEATHING TO STRUCT. SHEATHING BE ATTCHED W/ 10d O NAILS e 3" O.C. VERT Q SIMPSON HOLD DOWN REF, EA STUD/BLKG/ 5-1.01 4 5-3.11 SIM, INSTALL PER TYPICAL EA SIDE OF MANUF. RECOMMEDATIONS BLOCKING TOP 4 BOtT. OF CONT. WINDOW JAMB. APPLY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0kfA Ac LEDGER SHEATHING AT EACH 2 3/4" EDGE NAIL, REF. FRAMING PLAN SIDE OF WALL Lu 5/8" ROOF SHEATHING ►- SHEATHING5TRUCT. TEMPORARY NAILS - (2) Ibd NAILS SIMP60N CS16-R I'-0 EA SIDE uj TOP 4 BOTTOM STRAP 4 - SIMPSON SDS 1/4x3 1/2 j d) WOOD SCREWS 2x6 HEADER 2x6 CRIPPLE STUD VARIES R.O. FOR WINDOW N �' REF. FRAMING SIMPSON CSI6-R q 0 PLAN 03 04 STRAP, WRAP STRAP AROUND STUDS 4 LAP OVER 1AAI;D z 0 0 ro HEADER/51LL. USE 0 0 0 0 0 0 z 0 ^' 12-6d NAILS EA SIRE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3�� _ 1,_0„ o • STAGGERED WOOD JOISTS - REF. FRAMING a o PLAN DBL 2x6 SILL o WEB STIFFENER 2x6 BLKG EXTEND 1'-3" ABOVE o SIMPSON HU3514 (MAX) JOIST HANGER 45ELOW OPENING INTERIOR SHEATING 14"xl 1/4" TJI RIM BOARD REF CONTRACTOR'S NOTE -REF. ARCH LEDGER WITH 16d AT 6" OC TO ABOVE 1/1" STRUCT. SHEATHING a N SOLID BLOCKING- REF. FRAMING PLAN 2x6 FRAMING 6 16" O.G. AS REO'D 2 3/4" SIMPSON HOLD DOWN a s a a a ANCHOR REF. 5-1.01 4 5-3.11 Z 2x6 CRIPPLE STUD SIM. INSTALL PER MANUF, RECOMMENDATIONS Project s04213 SIMPSON HOLD DOWN o ANCHOR W/ 5/8" 0 SIMF'SON o STRUCT. SHEATHING EPDXY TIE ANCHOR BOLTS ��m 2x6 FRAMING STUD WITH 8" MIN EMBEDMENT 4 32 16d SINKER NAILS AS ►n ^^ • 4 A 2 X 6 WE). FRAMING - 2x6 CRIPPLE F� REQ.D BY MANUFACITIR7 REC. 43 SOLE fE o h--� 1/2" DIA X 8" ANCH BOLT WITH SIMPSO BPI/2 WHASHER AT 07 09 10 11 12• u^� (0 1" = 1'-0" 1" = 1' -0 1-1/2" = 1'-0 1 1/2"=1'-�" 1/2" 5TRUCT. SHEATHING I.�■�.�/ 2x6 CRIPPLE STUD 2x6 FRAMING STUD 1/2" SHEATHING u1 �r 10 SIMPSON HOLD DOWN SIMPSON C I6 ANCHOR REF. 5-101 : STUD EACH STUD B e 5-3.11. INSTALL PER MANUF. ROOF SHEATHING WRAP AROUND HEADER INSTALL PER MANUF. r � RECOMMENDATIONS REF S-IA.0I RECOMMENDATIONS 1/2 PLYWOOD Q z w o Z o L o 2x6 FRAMING STUDS C) Z N I-, W 3- INTERIOR SHEATHING w Mg &L,3S m CR ~ th � 0, 2 3/4" - REF. ARCH. U 61 = Z Z W 0 > oQ 2x6 CRIPPLE Z 4 �; w 0 1/2" STRUCT. 2 ��12d NAILS AT ow 0 U w Z= -_ SHEATHING 12 OC EA SIDE ® 4 W N Q CwT 0� �moZ 2x4 FLAT BLOCKING-TYP. m ¢ _ a DECKING EDGES > N o z Fr ®Zw wow � ¢wr APA RATED I -JOISTS 2x HEADER SEE PLAN Z�jZ A P 3 I'-3" '/a" FOR SIZES p o=- RO. r� o V)x� wz �T_0 � TRIPLE HEADER a 13 14 16 17 1 1/2"=1' —011 3/�4" =1' -m" Ur-1•-0' ROOF SHEATHING OPENING REFER 5-IA.01 REF 5-IA.01 OPENING REFER 5-1A.01 Ll p O o p-- Q 2'-0"x4'-0" POS MONITOR SUPPORT SIMPSON CS16 STRAP SEACH 5HEATHING W/ 2x4x2'-0" FRAMING ROOF SHEATHING +- �- MEMBER ® ANCHOR ROD W/ 8d REF 5-IA.01 u NAILS 9 6"o.c. SHEATHING TO o 11- FRAMING MEMBER SIMPSON CSI6 STRAP AT EA STUD In p- � i- Q WRAP AROUND HEADER O ( 1 v _ INSTALL PER MANUF. REGOMM NDATIONS 8 n�n,, 1� �mq 2x6 EDGE SUPPORT a 51MP50N L526 HANGER DBL JOIST HDR FABRICATE TYP. EA. ENE) OF 2x6 COMPOSITE 2X PER TJI RECOMMENDATIONS `✓ HEADER O APA RATED I -JOIST POS SUPPORT 5/6" SHEATHING - REF. 5102 FOR DEPTHS DOUBLE JOIST ROOF SHEATHING DBL JOIST HANGER REF S-IA.01 BY OTHERS _ '� 2x6 CRIPPLE STUD RTU'5. EA. END OF DBL I -JOIST ABOVE 4 BELOW HEADER SHEET � 5IMP50N DBL JOIST HANGER TYP. EA. END OF HID v 2-2x6xFULL HEIGHT NS 3 WALL FRAMING, TYP. 19 DOUBLE OPENING SINGLE OPENING 21 22 23 4 DWG: 3/4 11 1 1- 0 005080-S3 RnUn(P �nMll� 4z.fvuvuv SONIC SONIC A28 ---iSLLJ 01) 16 IWO 11 A32' (SW "2) TYP. n n ON 00 m n MOUNT TRANSFORMERS SIDE BY SIDE. EXTEND 25'-0' OF BOTH COLORS OF TUBING FROM EACH TRANSFORMER ON CANOPY, OR 50'-0' OF RED TUBING FROM EACH TRANSFORMER ON PARAPET, IN OPPOSITE DIRECTIONS AS INDICATED. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR EXACT NEON TUBE LOCATION AND MOUNTING. (2) N 10 CU THWN , (U M 10 CU GROUND 4 (U 3/4' CONDUIT. SEE 01/E1 FOR CONTINUATION ONE RUN OF 15MM NEON, RED. SEE SPECIFICATION ON SHEET SP-2 (TYPICAL) TWO RUNS OF 15MM NEON, RED AND YELLOW. SEE SPECIFICATION ON SHEET SP-2 (TYPICAL) i TOP OF-----' CANOPY 1 \ ) A32' =7`l (SW 02) TOP OF PARAPET I WALL n B51 B53 ` (SW MI)f WP 21 I I I I I 553 (SW 01) I I / I� WP 23 21 1 A33,35,3'1 lSW "1) 01 CANOPY /MENU WIRING PLAN 1/8' = 11-ON NO 1 ri 23 A11,19 A21,23,252-1,29 (SW 02) (SW 11) JA31 (sw 01) i _ J 23 I I 0� (ol NEON TRANSFORMER. BEE SPECIFICATION ON SHEET 5P-2. 12OV ,IP/20 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT MOUNTED ON BACK OF — PARAPET AT BUILDING AND BEHIND NEON CHANNEL AT CANOPY. PROVIDE SEPARATE DISCONNECT FOR EACH TRANSFORMER SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR EXACT PARAPET WALL OR CANOPY CONFIGURATION. (TYPICAL) OZ NEON TRANSFORMER DETAIL Z � A32 % (SW 02) NO SCALE A30 (SW 01) 15 A30 (SW #9 15 NOTES 81' SYMBOL O NEON TRANSFORMERS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY NEON CONTRACTOR E.G. TO FURNISH 4 INSTALL CONDUIT AND WIRE ONLY. E.G. TO VERIFY WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE EXTENT OF NEON 4 EXACT NUMBER 4 LOCATION OF TRANSFORMERS. - REF. DETAIL E-1-02 O2 NOT USED 03 CEILING FAN BY E.G. 'DAYTON' 56 04C111. G.G. TO INSURE STRONG MOUNTING, G.C. TO PROVIDE STRUCTURAL SUPPORT USING UNISTRUT OR OTHER ACCEPTED STANDARD MEMBER FOR CONSTRUCTION, IF NECESSARY. DO NOT SUPPOURT FANS FROM DECK ONLY. BEAL ANY HOLES MADE IN CANOPY DECK O PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES W/WP COVER ABOVE CANOPY, MTD. TO ROOF FOR CONNECTION / EXTENTION OF CONDUIT 4 WIRING FROM CANOPY LIGHTS, MENU LIGHTS, 4 NEON LIGHTING TRANSFORMERS. EXTEND CONDUIT FROM JUNCTION BOX TO ADJ. SUPPORT COLUMN 4 DOWN COLUMN TO BELOW GRADE. EXTEND CONDUIT 4 CONDUCTORS TO PANEL 'A'. O 2' PVC CONDUIT FOR MENU SPEAKER WIRE ONLY. WIRE BY OTHERS. O6 3/4' CONDUIT FOR MUSIC SPEAKER WIRE ONLY. EXTEND CONDUIT UP STRUCTURAL COLUMN TO ABOVE CANOPY DECK PROVIDE PULL STRING. WIRE BY OTHERS. O MOUNT TYPE 'G' FIXTURES TO CANOPY DECK, ALIGN WITH (t OF CANOPY COLUMNS. OS 3/4' CONDUIT LOOPED OVERHEAD FOR CANOPY LIGHTING. O9 3/4' CONDUIT LOOPED OVERHEAD FOR MENU SPEAKER WIRING. 10 3/4' CONDUIT LOOPED OVERHEAD FOR MENU LIGHTING. 11 NIGHT LIGHT THRJ PHOTO CELL (PART. CKT. A20) 12 CONDUIT U.G. TO JUNCTION BOX FOR SPEAKER WIRE. - REF E-4.02 13 PHOTO CELL ON ROOF FOR LIGHTING CONTROL. 14 CONDUIT Ua. UP TO 6' x 6' JUNCTION BOX WITH A I' CONDUIT STUBBED ABOVE CEILING FOR MUSIC WIRING. 15)WATER PROOF J-BOX AT ENTRY / EXIT SIGN. SEE SITE PLAN. lro PROVIDE 120V, 1P/20 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT AT MAIN SIGN. CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY LOCATION ON SITE PLAN. EXTEND 1' CONDUIT W/ (2) *10 CU THWN AND (1) M2 CU GROUND SIGN LOCATION TO PANEL 'A'. 1� TO PATIO CEILING FAN SWITCH. REF E-2. 18 I' PVC CONDUIT TO PATIO MENUS 19 ROUTE CONDUITS 4 CONDUCTORS FROM DISCONNECTS AT NEON TRANSFORMERS TO THIS NEMA 3R JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ON BACKSIDE OF PARAPET WALL. DROP DOWN (2) CIRCUITS W92) 010 CU THWN, (I) 010 CU GROUND EACH IN (1)1' CONDUIT. 2® POLE MOUNTED SITE LIGHTING. CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY LOCATION ON SITE PLAN. EXTEND 1' CONDUIT W92) 08 CU THWN 4 (1) 010 CU GROUND FROM EACH POLE LOCATION TO PANEL 'A'. MAX. OF 3 HEADS PER CIRCUIT. 21 U.G. DETECTOR LOOP, SPEAKER PEDESTAL, 4 MENU BOARD. REF. SD-2.01, SD-221, 4 SITE PLAN. 22 3/4' PVC CONDUIT TO DRIVE-THRU MENU. 23 CONDUIT FILL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC ARTICAL 300.11. WHERE MORE THAN 3 CURRENT CARRING CONDUCTORS ARE INSTALLED IN A RACEWAY, CONDUCTOR CAPACITY MUST BE DERATED PER NEC TABLE 310-15(5X2Xa). ANY 3 CURRENT CAKING CONDUCTORS THAT ARE CIRCUITED ACROSS PHASES 'A', 'B' AND 'C' , IAY BE SERVED BY A COMMON NEUTRAL . 0 w En En cr Wo Lu _W Z H c3N , Z W) Wom co ZQX ZJ=ui a:) 2 s: y= W ZZoQ 000) CvC-)� ® oL,Zo aoo } o � ® w U ®s O>% oow V cn 0 � wN< �m0Z c� ® ZOO ® wow co <wF- ;~o 3m0 a gZo L'i @s ~�WIZ 0 o V A z d A- >o o QC 1L ~ u- Ln c� 0 4w 0 CLUB 0 L d (L a0 N LU emu_ 0 Z ul U SHEET El DWG: 005080—El Lin II II 1 2@ yfl( 5@09 TO WINDOW NEON RECEPTACLES. REF. E3 TO PATIO CEILING FANS. REF. E-I REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY FOR CANOPY 4 REMAINDER OF EXTERIOR LIGHTING, REF_ 6HEET "=-1"_ 1 LIGHTING PLAN max, j " . F. ELECTRICAL S`rM50LS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE, RECESSED MOUNTED. $K $p KEY OPERATED SWITCH, PILOT LIGHT SWITCH, MTD. 48' UP. FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE, SURFACE OR SUSPENDED. 2-$ NUMBER DENOTES SINGLE POLE SWITCHES GANG MOUNTED. O ❑ O+ INCANDESCENT AND HID LIGHTING FIXTURES, CLG. t WALL MTD. v TELEPHONE OUTLET MTD. 24' UP. D FLOOD LIGHTING UNIT. DATA OUTLET FOR PAS. SYSTEM. EMPTY 44 BOX W/ 1-1/2' PVC CONDUIT TO ABOVE CEILIWsWIRING BY OTHERS. SUPPLY S.S. COVER PLATE W/2' DIA GROMIT HOLE ® EXIT SIGN, DIRECTIONAL ARROWS INDICATED. STRIP FLUORESCENT LIGHTING UNIT, SURFACE OR SUSPENDED. JUNCTION OR PULL BOX. Ts PE TIME SWITCH, PHOTO —ELECTRIC SWITCH. SINGLE PLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNTED 24' UP UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. $y MANUAL MOTOR STARTER —DISCONNECT SWITCH. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNTED 24' UP UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. MOTOR DISCONNECT OR FUSED SAFETY SWITCH. QUAD RECEPTACLE. TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES GANG MOUNTED. ® MOTOR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ON EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM. = ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS, SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTED. GF14& GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTNG RECEPTACLE. 120 OR 211V CIRCUIT HOME RUN TO PANEL. LINE, NEUT., GND. wpO WEATHER PROOF GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING RECEPTACLE. �j,o 480, 240, 208V CIRCUIT HOME RUN TO PANEL, WIRE SIZE NOTED. POLARIZED THREE OR FOUR WIRE RECEPTACLE, RATING NOTED. SINGLE RECEPTACLE IN HANDY BOX MOUNTED ON CONDUIT STUB. CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALLS OR ABOVE CEILING. CONDUIT CONCEALED IN OR UNDER FLOOR k� DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN HANDY BOX MOUNTED ON CONDUIT STUB. wP DENOTES 'WEATHER PROOF'. 0. POLARIZED THREE OR FOUR WIRE RECEPTACLE, RATING NOTED. EM DENOTES LIGHTING FIXTURE ON EMERGENCY POWER CIRCUIT. CEILING MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE *1. PLAN NOTE. REFER TO NOTATION ON PLANS. CEILING MOUNTED QUAD RECEPTACLE. TWO DUPLEX GANG MOUNTED If I FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATION. $ SINGLE POLE SWITCH MOUNTED 48' UP UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ® SMOKE DETECTOR $2 $, $q TWO POLE, THREE WAY, FOUR WAY SWITCHES MTD. 48' UP. ALL SYMBOLS MAY NOT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS. 545 541 NOTES 5Y SYMBOL to JUNCTION BOX FOR COOLER AND FREEZER LIGHT CONNECTION. CONTRACTOR MUST FIELD VERIFY CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS. TYPE 'C' FIXTURE IS PROVIDED WITH COOLER/FREEZER AND WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SEE ALSO DRAWING SHEET E3 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 20 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN. CIRCUIT AND SWITCH WITH LOCAL LIGHT FIXTURE. SEE EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE ON DRAWING SHEET MI. FAN TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR FINAL CONNECTION BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR O LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE 'AEM' AND EXIT LIGHT TYPE 'E' TO BE CIRCUITED ON UNSWITCHED LEG OF LOCAL LIGHT CIRCUIT. 'AEM' FIXTURE TO BE CONTINIOUS OPERATION AS NIGHT LIGHT. CIRCUIT EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK IN BALLAST HOUSING ON THE SAME UNSWITCHED CIRCUIT. PROVIDE LOCK ON BREAKER O MOUNT PHOTOCELL CONTROL ON ROOF ON BACK SIDE OF PARAPET WALL FACING NORTH. SEE OUSIDE LIGHTING AND SIGNAGE CONTROL DIAGRAM ON DRAWING SHEET E5. O PROVIDE (2) 120V )0 AMP WALL SWITCHES DESIGNATED '1' AND '2' FOR CONTACTOR CONTROL OF EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNAGE CIRCUITS. SEE DRAWING SHEET E1 AND ELECTRICAL SERVICE RISER AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM ON DRAWING SHEET E5. PERMANENTLY LABLE EACH SWITCH WITH ITS RESPECTIVE NUMBER DESIGNATION. O MOUNT TYPE 'L' FIXTURE ON PARAPET WALL AT 12'-0' ABOVE FINISHED GRADE . LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION MOUNTING LAMPS 'A' 2X4 TROFFER WITH ACRYLIC LENS RECESSED 2-F32T8 METALUX "264R8232A120 W/B2321120RHH BALLAST OR EQ. (ALTERNATE: LIGHTOLIER'XT2GVA24012080 W/82321120RHH BALLAST OR EQ.) 'B' 1 X 4 WRAPAROUND SURFACE 2-F32T8 METALUX US-232A-12OV.-E581 (ALTERNATE: LITHONIA "S5-232A-120-GE5) "51" 1 X 4 WRAPAROUND SURFACE 2-F32T8 LITHONIA "VSE-2-32-120-ES 'G' VAPOR PROOF LIGHT BY OWNER SURFACE 1-100W PROVIDED W/ WALK-IN BOX 'D' DELETED 'E' SINGLE FACE EXIT SIGN WITH BATTERY UNIVERSAL LED W/ UNIT LITHONIA *LES-WIR-ELN (ALTERNATE: SURE-LITES "CAX-11-10-00-RW) 'F" DELETED 2 LAMP STRIP FIXTURE (2-4 FT. TANDEM FIXTURES) SURFACE 2-F32T8 METALUX "8TS823212OE5-81 EACH (ALTERNATE: LIGHTOLIER *SW8T232HPF120H4GLR) REF L.F.S. FIXTURES COME STANDARD W/50 DEGREE BALLASTS. NOTE 04 0 DEGREE BALLAST AND LAMPS TO BE PROVIDED BY E.G. AS REQ'D TO MEET LOCAL WEATHER CONDITIONS - REF L.F.S. NOTE 04. 'H' WIDE SPREAD FLOOD LIGHT SURFACE 1-115W M.H. LUMARK "MHWR-65T-1"15-120V MOGUL (ALTERNATE: HI-TEK "TFL-1-15M-TA2-120) all PORCELAIN KEYLESS LAMPHOLDER SURFACE 1-FL815/ 1. G.E. S-140-1 Bill POLE MOUNTED FLOOD LIGHT t POLE POLE 1-400W. M.N. LUMARK " MHWR-658-400-120V / 6S84A25SFM2XG MOGUL (ALT:HI-TEKOTFL-40OM-RA2-120-I5/585254GT20DD5) (IF USED, SEE SITE PLAN) 'K' DELETED 'L' WALL MOUNTED FLOOD LIGHT WALL 1-1-15W M.H. LUMARK 0 MHWL-1-15-120V MOGUL (ALTERNATE: HI-TEK rUJH-Ii5M-120) 'M' NOT USED L.F.S. NOTES: I. 'EM' DENOTES FIXTURE FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED EMEF;raENCY LIGHTING BATTERY PACK. 2. REFER TO ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REGARDING LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS. 3. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE OR AN APPROVED EQUAL. SUBSTITUTIONS MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW BY OWNER. 4. E.G. TO PROVIDE EITHER A "B432PUNVHP-A UNIVERSAL OR OICN-4P32-SC-120V ADVANCE '0' DEGREE BALLAST. USE 32 WATT 4 FT. T8 LAMPS IN THE '0' DEGREE RATED FIXTURES. DO NOT USE 30 WATT 4 FT. T8 LAMPS WITH MODEL NUMBERS ENDING IN 'WM' (BY G.E), 'SS' (BY OSRAM SYLVANIA), OR 'ALTA' (BY PHILIPS). USING 30 WATT LAMPS TURNS THE '0' DEGREE RATED FIXTURE INTO A 50 DEGREE RATED FIXTURE. ul z O us 9 Lu Z In 1A 1A 0 w V) V) OC — WT_ Lu ZW C.D' N Z N Wm^ o`') Z�3� WJXZ G.D=> � W ZZoQ O O 01oc 1 u ms -It A 0 ® p YcnQ r A N � m_ U V Z 4 ., ® 04 W.g� rla M m 29 Z oEo j0— 0: !R aoo > o iz_ ® w U � o�N 0 am uj m0Z �ow i ® Zwc ® wow �o <wiE � ;~o 40 3Z P �ZO �7_25 gw 0: ww Z � o V 0 z 0��-� 0— Lu Lo W l�L 0 Aft -1 -4 ..V^^ v! V ff o < � (L 9 :3 00 X u .4. LL 44 SHEET E2 NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION lfo ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS REF. SITE PLAN FOR TRUE NORTH 1/4I = 1 I-0u (SHEET SP2) FOR ADDITIONAL INFOMATION. n1ITITC31 005080—E2 mm 2oao(9 §oaoc9 561 - (SW h) REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY O Z ROOF POWER PLAN TO WINDOW NEON SWITG41. REF. E-2 1/13" = 11-0' PANEL 'MDP' NOTES 5Y SYM80L 0 PROVIDE DISCONNECT ON ROOF FOR EXHAUST FAN. CIRCUIT EXHAUST FAN 'THROUGH' STARTER IN EXHAUST SYSTEM WIRING INTERLOCK BOX FURNISHED BY EXHAUST HOODS SUPPLIER SEE ELECTRICAL SERVICE RISER FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 02 PROVIDE DISCONNECT ON ROOF FOR SUPPLY AIR FAN. CIRCUIT SUPPLY FAN "THROUGH' STARTER IN EXHAUST SYSTEM WIRING INTERLOCK BOX FURNISHED BY EXHAUST HOODS SUPPLIER SEE ELECTRICAL SERVICE RISER FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. O 120V ,1P/20 AMP GFI RECEPT. MTD. a I'-4' OR ABOVE WINDOW FOR NEON WINDOW SIGN. O4 120V ,IP/20 AMP GFI RECEPT. FOR FRYER CONTROLS. O PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX AT 12'-6" FOR WALL SIGN CONNECTION. PROVIDE 120V,IP/20 AMP SWITCH IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION FOR SIGN DISCONNECTING MEANS. O PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX ABOVE COOLER/FREEZER FOR COOLER/FREEZER LIGHTS AND DOOR HEATER CONNECTION. CONTRACTOR MUST FILED VERIFY POINT OF CONNECTION ON FREEZER/COOLER UNIT IN FIELD. O POWER TO REMOTE CONDENSING UNITS IS FEED FROM ICE MACHINE BELOW. CONTRACTOR MUST COORDINATE THIS IN FIELD . PROVIDE 120V ,1P/30 AMP NEMA 3R DISCONNECT AT EACH CONDENSING UNIT. OS 120V,IP/20 AMP GFI RECEPT. FOR FRYER FILTER. O CONNECT J-BOX TO EXHAUST SYSTEM INTERLOCK BOX. SEE MANUFACTURERS' CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM. J-BOX 4 FANS SWITCH FURNISHED WITH HOOD. 10 PROVIDE 120V ,1P/30 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT IN COOLER FOR EVAPORATOR FAN CONNECTION. 11 SMOKE DETECTORS FOR AUTOMATIC FAN SHUTDOWN MOUNTED IN RETURN AIR DUCT ( AND SUPPLY AIR DUCT WHERE REQUIRED) TO BE FURNISHED 4 INSTALLED BY M.G_ WIRING 4 CONNECTIONS BY E.G. 12 PROVIDE 208V ,1P/30 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT IN FREEZER FOR EVAPORATOR FAN CONNECTION. 13 120V., IP/20 AMP GFI RECEPTACLE FOR CONDENSATE HEAT TAPE. PROVIDE IN WP ENCLOSURE. 14 E.G. SHALL PROVIDE 4x4 J-BOX WITH DOUBLE GANG PLASTER RING AND WIRING. CORD, PLUG, 4 RECEPTACLE FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY E.G. 15 EXHAUST SYSTEM WIRE INTERLOCK BOX. MOUNT ON WALL ABOVE CEILING. REF. MANUFACTURERS CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM. 16 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONTROL BOX. @ TELEPHONE INTERFACE BOX. MOUNT ON WALL BELOW CEILING ABOVE PANELS. 18 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT. SEE ELECTRCIAL SERVICE RISER FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 19 ELECTRICAL METERING EQUIPMENT. SEE ELECTRCIAL SERVICE RISER FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ® CIRCUIT 519 FOR HEAT LAMP TO HAVE A 'NUBBLE' 05352 120V ,20 AMP RECEPTACLE 21 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTROLLER. MOUNTED AT 60' A.FF- INSTALL 1-1/2' CONDUIT U.G_ TO NEAREST LANDSCAPE AREA_ WIRING BY OTHERS. REF: LANDSCAPE PLAN IF AVAILABLE. 22 OUTDOOR LIGHTING CONTROLS. SEE ELEC. RISER AND WIRING DIAGRAM ON SHEET E5. 23 FOAM SEALANT AT ALL ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS INTO FREEZER 4 COOLER BOX. 24 PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE WIRING TO ALL EXT. DOORS 4 WINDOWS FOR FURTURE SECURITY SYSTEM - TERMINATE IN J-BOX BY TELEPHONE BOX a 50' AFF W/1' CONDUIT STUBBED ABOVE CLG. - LEAVE 24' LOOP ON EA. WIRE. 25 120V, IP/20 AMP DUPLEX OUTLET FOR FUTURE SECURITY SYSTEM ADJ. TO J-BOX 26 DISCONNECT ON ROOF FOR RTU CONNNCTION. SEE ELECTRICAL SERVICE RISER ON DRAWING SHEET E5 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2� PROVIDE 120V,IP/20 AMP GFI RECEPTACLE IN WEATHER PROOF ENCLOSURE FOR EQUIPMENT MAINTAINANCE. SEE DETAIL 03 ON DRAWING SHEET E5. 28 PROVIDE STANDARD 2'x3" RECESSED J-BOX AND ASSOCIATED 208V,1P/20 AMP CIRCUIT FOR CONNECTION OF BASEBOARD HEATER - INSTALL BOX HORIZ. WITH BOT. EDGE 6 3' AFF. HEATER TO BE CONTROLLED BY FIELD INSTALLED, UNIT MOUNTED LINE VOLTAGE T'STAT. BASEBOARD HEATERS 4 T'STATS TO BE PROVIDED 4 INSTALLED BY THE E.C. HEATER TO BE EQUAL TO QMARK *3UG82-36', -150W O 208v/1PPASE. T'STAT SHALL BE QMARK 03UG91. 29 PROVIDE 208V ,1P/30 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DI5CONNECT ON ROOF FOR FREEZER CONDENSING UNIT CONNECTION. ® PROVIDE 208V ,1P/30 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT ON ROOF FOR COOLER CONDENSING UNIT CONNECTION. 31 120V, 1P/20 AMP GFI RECEPT. FOR AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTROLLER AND HEAT TAPE FOR COLD WATER LINES IN MECH. ROOM. SEE P-1.02 32 PROVIDE 3/4' C. STUBBED OUTSIDE WALL m 54' AFF 4 INSIDE WALL TO 6" ABOVE CLG FOR POWER WASH LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CONTROLLER 33 PROVIDE DUPLEX m 8' BELOW CLG 4 20" FROM BACK CORNER FOR POWER WASH SYSTEM NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION Iro ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (SHEET SP2) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. r/uuvu� o wime - 01 POWER PLAN NOTE51 -ALL RECEPTACLES MOUNTED AT 24' AFF. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ,ALL 125v, 15 4 20 AMP RECEPTACLES LOCATED IN KITCHEN, REGARDLESS OF INTENDED USE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH GFI PROTECTION. ,SEE SHEET 'K-1' 4 'K-4' FOR EQUIPMENT PLAN 4 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. -REF. SHEETS 'E-1' AND 'CA-1' FOR CANOPY WIRING. 'ROUGH -INS AND FINAL CONNECTIONS FOR ALL OWNER FURNISHED EQUIP. BY E.G. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. *ALL EMPTY CONDUIT TO HAVE PULL WIRE 0 w V) V) OCr W0 r ZW 03 r Z M U) Wom m � C.7� Z>-x Z—ate W W��z acA=uLI ZZOQ O00) a U C-2 7 ® (v Ln gg uULn N uj N U U U ®A > � A 29 Z Z oho j wwL, > a0ow 0 wV �LLZFxy now V =) z [Lu w N < Pw? ® Zwo wow C0 aF- w I cn 3mz P �zo U� o=5 r y z �~ � o V \ Z o<z� �`r) J oul ��up �- IULL � � Nu�p �u 4a SHEET E3 DWG: 005080—E3 MY99 9@09 PANEL MDi=' 120/208V, 3 PHASE, 42 SPACE, WITH 400 AMP MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER PROVIDE LOCKABLE NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE P A N E L A 120/208V, 3 PHASE, 42 SPACE, WITH 225 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY A N E L 5 120/208V, 3 PHASE , 2 SECTION, 12 SPACE WITH 225 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY NOTES: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION TRIP AMPS TOTAL WATTS ABC TOTAL WATTS TRIP AMPS '" DESCRIPTION ITEM NO. NOTES: RTU 01 3 60 4833 1 3 5 i 9 it 13 15 li 19 21 23 25 21 29 31 33 35 39 41 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 40 42 2291 35 3 RTU 02 ' 4833 22SI ' ' 4833 22SI ' 1 3 ICE CREAM MACHINE 3 30 2190 2190 30 ICE CREAM MACHINE 3 1 ' 21c30 21SO ' ' 2190 2190 ' PANEL A 3 200 5436 221-19 200 PANEL B ' 9-1`56 260612' ' 5838 28363 ' SPACE I I SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE NOTES. 3C3119 1= LOCK ON BREAKER TOTAL 'A' TOTAL 'B' 4-1329 TOTAL 'C" 45105 TOTAL LOAD = 132153 SEE LOAD ANALYSIS FOR PANEL DEMAND LOAD DISCONNECT SWITCH BY ELECTRICAL CONTR. MOUNTED ON SIDE OF UNIT, NEMA-3R ENCL. FUSED, FUSES PER UNIT MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION. NIPPLE THROUGH SIDE OF UNIT. CONTROLS COMPARTMENT IN UNIT CONDUITS TO BE RUN UP - INSIDE UNIT BETWEEN DUCTS AND CURB. 2-012, I-012G, 1/2-C THERMOSTAT WIRING PER UNIT MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION INSTALLED IN 1/2' CONDUIT BY E.G.. WEATHERPROOF GPI RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN CAST BOX ON SIDE OF UNIT. TYPICAL ROOF TOP NVAG UNIT. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS. ROOF INSTALL MIN. 12' SECTION OF FLEX CONDUIT FOR VIBRATION ISOLATION POWER FEEDER TO PANELBOARD RUN IN JOIST SPACE. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR SIZE. CONNECT TO RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL CEILING THERMOSTAT FURNISHED BY M.G., INSTALLED 48' AFF AND CONNECTED BY E.G. SEE MECH. DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS 03 HVAC UNIT ELEC. GONN. DETAIL NO SCALE 208V 3 PHASE , 60 AMP NEMA — 3R FUSED DISCONNECT ON ROOF AT RTU-1. FUSE AT 60 AMPS. (3) " 4 CU THWN (1) M 4 CU GROUND (1)1' CONDUIT (3) • 8 CU THWN (1) " 10 CU GROUND (1) 1' CONDUIT 120/208V ,3 PHASE , 22 KAIC ,42 SPACE DISTRIBUTION PANEL `MDP' WITH 400 AMP MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER METER O C.T. CABINET BY UTILITY CO 120/208V , 3P/400 AMP ELECTRICAL SERVICE FROM POWER COMPANY TRANSFORMER (2) SETS OF (4) 4/0 CU THWN (2) • 2 CU GROUND (2) 2-1/2' CONDUITS SONIC PANEL 'MDP' 208V 3 PHASE, 60 AMP NEMA 3R FUSED DISCONNECT ON ROOF AT RTU-2. FUSE AT 35 AMPS. 120/208V ,3 PHASE, 22 - KAIC ,12 SPACE , 2 SECTION DISTRIBUTION PANEL 'B' WITH 225 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY 120/208V ,3 PHASE , 22 - KAIC ,42 SPACE DISTRIBUTION PANEL 'A' WITH 225 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE EQUIPMENT CAPABLE OF A SERIES FAULT CURRENT RATING OF NOT LESS THAN 65 KAIC. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS SUBMITTAL DATA SHOWING COMBINED RATING OF MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER AT MDP AND DOWN STREAM BREAKERS AT PANELS "A" AND "B". (4) " 3 U THWN (1) " 4 GU G UNC (1) V CONDUIT EXTEND (1)1/0 CU GROUND TO DRIVEN ELECTRODE, BUILDING STEEL ME WATER PIPING 1 y NOTES: ______ DESCRIPTION w TRIP AMPS TOTAL WATTS ABC TOTAL WATTS TRIP AMPS L" DESCRIPTION NOTES: CANOPY LIGHTS REMOTE LEFT 1 20 0 1 3 5 9 11 13 15 li 19 21 23 25 2-1 29 31 33 35 3-1 39 41 2 4 ro 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 608 20 1 MENU LIGHTS BLDG (R) SPACE 1 20 1680 20 1 CANOPY NEON BLDG (L) CANOPY NEON REMOTE LEFT 1 20 i40 504 20 1 CANOPY NEON BLDG (L) SPACE 1 20 20 1 SPACE SPACE 1 20 420 20 1 CANOPY LIGHTS BLDG (L) SPACE 1 20 1 20 1 1 SPACE SPACE 1 20 1 20 1 SPACE MENU LIGHTS REMOTE LEFT 1 20 456 -100 20 1 PATIO LIGHTS CANOPY LIGHTS REMOTE RIGHT 1 20 1260 -150 20 1 PATIO FANS CANOPY LIGHTS REMOTE RIGHT 1 20 560 280 20 1 1 NIGHT LIGHTS CANOPY NEON REMOTE RIGHT 1 1 20 1680 456 20 1 MENU LIGHTS BLDG (L) 4 PATIO CANOPY NEON REMOTE RIGHT 1 20 1680 20 1 SPACE CANOPY NEON REMOTE RIGHT 1 20 1680 20 1 SPACE CANOPY NEON REMOTE RIGHT 1 20 504 1200 20 1 1 MAIN SIGN ----25 SPACE 1 20 400 20 1 ENTRY/EXIT SIGNS MENU LIGHTS REMOTE RIGHT 1 20 988 1320 20 11 POLE LIGHTING CANOPY NEON BLDG (R) 1 20 1680 20 1 SPACE CANOPY NEON BLDG (R) 1 20 504 20 1 SPACE SPACE 1 120 1 20 1 SPACE CANOPY LIGHTS BLDG (R) 1 20 950 20 1 SPACE SPACE 1 20 20 1 SPACE TOTAL 'A' 5436 TOTAL 'B" 9_756 TOTAL 'C" 5838 TOTAL LOAD = 21030 WATTS C 59 AMPS ) PANEL DEMAND AMPS = 55 AMPS x 125 = -14 AMPS PANEL 'A" 120/208V. 3PH., 4W. 225A. M.L.O. ELECTRICAL LOAD ANALYSIS D E SCR I FT I ON CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR DEMAND LOAD LIGHTING AND SIGNS 2i.1 KUJ 125 ro 33.8 KW KITCHEN EQUIPMENT 43.0 KUJ 65 io 25.0 KUJ MISC. POWER 4 RECEFTS. 42.1 KUJ 100 ro 42.1 KUJ HVAC 21.4 KUJ 100 ., 21.4 KUJ TOTAL LOADS 133.6 KUJ 125.3 KW .3413 AMPS PANEL 'B' 120/208V. 3PH., 4W. 225A. M.L.O. SECTION 1 SECTION 2 120V ,1 PHASE , 30 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT ON ROOF AT EF-1. 120V ,1 PHASE, 30 AMP NEMA 3R NON FUSED DISCONNECT ON ROOF AT EF-2. 120V ,1 PHASE, 30 AMP NEMA 31R NON FUSED DISCONNECT ON ROOF AT SF -I. (2) " 10 CU THWN (1) s 12 CU GROUND (1) 3/4' CONDUIT 20A, 10 POLE LIGHTING - CONTACTOR (TYP. OF 3) EQUAL TO SQUARE D 08503-1-01000-12OV. MOUNTED IN NEMA-1 CABINET ABOVE CEILING. PANEL 'P' 120/208V. 3PH., 4W. 100A. M.L.O. 01 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM NO SCALE LTG. LTG. CONT. CONT. *lA *2 LTG. GONT. TO OUTDOOR LTG., SIGN, ETC. - REF. SHEET E-I TO 5W.01 TO SW."2 -120/208V ,1 PHASE, 10 KAIC 24 SPACE DISTRIBUTION PANEL 'P' WITH 100 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY (2) 6 CU THWN (1) 8 CU GROUND (1)1-1/4' CONDUIT NOTES: ITEM NO DESCRIPTION La TRIP AMPS TOTAL WATTS ABC TOTAL WATTS TRIP` AMPS DESCRIPTION ITEM NO NOTES: GFI RECEPTS. 1 20 1440 1 3 5 1 9 11 13 15 1-7 19 21 23 25 2i 29 31 33 35 31 39 41 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 1440 20 1 RECEPTS. WALK-IN UNIT LIGHTS 1 20 200 684 20 1 REACH -IN REFRIG. 26 1 WALK-IN HTR 4 HEAT TAPE 1 20 1600 "700 20 1 O-RING MACHINE 51 2 1 COOLER COIL/FAN UNIT 1 20 550 500 20 1 WARMER DRAWER 21 FRYERS' FILTER 1 20 1080 948 20 1 MEAT FREEZER 62 1 SHUNT I SHUNT 1560 20 1 DRINK SYRUP RACK 46 FRYERS/GRIDDLE CTLS. 1 20 250 '150 20 1 SANDWICH UNIT 29 SHUNT SHUNT 1650 20 1 COOKER / WARMER 21 CONTACTOR CONTROL 1 20 180 750 20 2 FOOD STEAMER 19 45 HEAT LAMP 1 30 1930 750 1' 01 SAUCE WARMER 1 20 1200 624 20 1 15LAST MIXER 05 08 COFFEE MACHINE 1 30 1800 1332 20 1 FOUNTAINETTE 10 13 FUDGE WARMER 1 20 500 800 20 1 DRINK MACHINE 12 1 15 ICE MACHINE 4 COND. 1 30 2100 120 20 1 SLUSH FILL STATION i5 1 15 ICE MACHINE 4 COND. 1 30 2-100 650 20 1 SUPPLY AIR FAN(S) FRYER EXHAUST FAN 1 20 150 150 20 1 GRIDDLE EXHAUST FAN 2 102 POWER WASHER 2 30 2-104 1400 20 2 BUN TOASTER 31 2 2-104 1400 ' 2 9O GREASE COLLECTION 1 1 20 500 150 20 2 FOOD STEAMER 19 (o8 SLUSH PRECHILLER 1 20 750 '150 ' 89 15UN TOASTER STAND 1 20 313 1500 20 1 HOT DOG GRILL 91 23 SALT / BAG TABLE 1 30 2200 43 45 4� 49 51 53 55 51 59 61 63 65 6l 69 _11 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 0 62 64 66 68 10 12 500 20 1 "MUSAK' TUNER/RECEIVER INTERIOR LIGHTING 1 20 605 1850 30 2 SLUSH MACHINE 16 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1 20 605 1850 ' 0 1 36 REACH -IN FREEZER 1 20 1920 1150 20 2 FREEZER COIL / FAN UNIT 1 DETECTION LOOP 1 20 250 1150 ' D-T ORDER / PREVIEW BOARD(S) 1 20 360 24-14 20 3 FREEZER COND. UNIT 1 2 SECURITY SYSTEM 1 20 250 24'14 ' RESTROOM LIGHTS/EXHAUST 1 20 340 24-14 ' NEON WINDOW SIGNS 1 20 1160 825 20 2 COOLER COND. UNIT 1 PARAPET SIGN 1 20 1200 825 ' 3 DINING AREA LIGHTS 1 20 840 2520 40 2 PANEL 'P' 2 SIGNAGE 1 20 1200 2-100 ' 2 FUTURE WINDOW SIGNS 1 20 1200 SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE NOTES: 221-l9 1 ■ LOCK ON BREAKER TOTAL 'A' 2 = IF USED, SEE POWER PLAN TOTAL 'B' 26069 3 = IF USED, SEE LIGHTING PLAN TOTAL 'C" 28363 TOTAL LOAD = lro,611 WATTS KITCHEN EQUIPMENT(29,113) 6596= 19,314 WATTS MISC. POWER 4 RECEPTS. (371,355) A 10096= 31,355 WATTS LIGHTS/SIGNAGE (5,990) 0 125%= 1,488 WATTS TOTAL PANEL DEMAND LOAD ■ 64,151 W ( 1-19 AMPS ) P A N E L P 120/208V, 1 PHASE , 24 SPACE WITH 100 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY NOTES: ITEMLU NO DESCRIPTION TRIP AMPS TOTAL WATTS A B TOTAL WATTS TRIP AMPS DESCRIPTION ITEM NO NOTES: ROUTERS 1 20 360 1 3 5 -1 9 11 13 15 li 19 21 123r----j-1241 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 16 18 20 22 540 20 1 BASE STATIONS -79 CONTROLLER 1 20 150 720 20 1 COMPUTER/REGISTERS 1_1 �"1 SCANNERS 1 20 180 180 20 1 CPU RACK UNIT 100 HUB SYSTEM 1 20 1130 360 20 1 RECEPTACLES 'l6 PRINTERS 1 20 180 360 20 1 SCANNERS ii bl MONITORS 11 20 11260 20 1 SPARE 99 WIRELESS UNITS 1 20 120 20 1 SPARE SPACE 20 1 SPARE SPACE 20 1 SPARE SPACE 20 1 SPARE SPACE 20 1 SPARE SPACE 1 20 1 1 SPARE TOTAL 'A' 2520 TOTAL 'B' 2100 TOTAL LOAD = 5220 WATTS ( 26 AMPS ) PANEL DEMAND AMPS- 26 AMPS x 1.00=26 AMPS CONTACTOR COIL (TYPICAL) w w 0 �r WO LU ZW ff—R H v�r Z Wow w^ Z�3Ld � WJ=z a==> W ZZoQ 004mCC aVv)o z > 0 0 prA 29 L) O ® ul � m U U ® 0 Q on 0 V Z Z oho y aoo aww soy orxa V) ocw V �Z� au wv°ra oHZ ��> ®Wm ® wow cm aw� 40 0~o ® g r" 41",3: p P 9Z- => w Li � w~� as ~_ 0 >. o V l0 z to 0- 0 11! I] 1u 0- 0 '+r eOf-v� d [L Z 0 a LU U -4 0- ® LU 44 1 N 1 I SHEET OUTDOOR LIGHTING CONTROLE 5 02 w I Rr= D I AGRAM NO SCALE DWG' NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 005080-E5 (SHEET SP2) FOR ADDITIONAL INFOMATION. ,§@%9 I _V Z 0 20 SUPPL' w/ 1/2' 1 AIR FLO FITTING ROUND OR SQUARE NECK AS REQUIRED DIFFUSER, LAY IN TYPE FOR SUSPENDED CEILING TOP OF DIFFUSER AND BOOT TO BE INSULATED RMNAI VENT CAP RIGID GALV. ST. W/EXTERIOR INSULATION TO WITHIN 8'-0' (MAX) OF DIFFUSER 5'� RINNAI FLUE INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT ASSEMBLY THRU ROOF 5'-0' MIN. a 14'-0' MAX. 01 NOT USED O Z DI�USER DTL.CEILING NO SCALE No SCALE REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY NYAC/ EXHAUST/ MUA NOTES GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH OWNER AS TO WHO WILL BALANCE THE ENTIRE WVAC, EXHAUST, AND MUA SYSTEMS. BALANCE OF THIS COMBINED SYSTEM IS EXTREMELY CRITICAL TO PROPER FUNCTIONING OF ALL REFERENCED UNITS, AN UNBALANCED SYSTEM WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED OR ALLOWED. BALANCING SERVICE CONTRACTOR MUST HAVE ADEQUATE AND APPROPRIATE CREDENTIALS, REFERENCES, EQUIPMENT, AND PROVIDE A REPORT WITH ALL WORKSHEETS TO THE OWNER SONIC RECOMMENDS AABC OR NE55 CERTIFIED AIR BALANCE SPECIALTY CONTRACTORS. WHEN PROPERLY BALANCED, NOTIFY STORE OWNER AND MANAGER THAT THEY WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO SET MANUAL HVAC FAN SWITCH ON T-STAT TO 'ON' POSITION WHEN HOOD EXHAUST FANS ARE TURNED ON. 14' x 6' TAP SUPPLY - 645 GF1'1 -12' x 12' UP TO EF-2 EXHAUST 1650 CFM 06 HVAC PLAN CLG 12'x10' COMBUST. AIR LOUVER w/ INTERIOR BIRD SCREEN. WALL HUNG, INSTANTANEOUS ,GAS FIRED WATER HEATER - REF. P1 a P2 FINISHED FLOOR COMBUSTION O3 AIR DETAIL NO SCALE 0 4 NOT USED NO SCALE O S No sC�E ROOF R/A DUCT BY M.G. TRANSITION TO 2x4 FILTER GRILL CEILING TURN AIR DROFRE FAN iZOOFtOi� Ui�l I t SC,4-�E 1� l�l.. E CODLING HEATING AIR CAPACITY POWER ACCESSORIES • NOTES RTU UNIT No. BRAND • 1 MODEL No. REMARKS =1. PREFERRED RTU MANUFACTURER IS LENNOX, AND PORK IS AN APPROVED ALTERNATE. CONTACT LENNOX CORP. HEADQUARTERS GAP. EER TYPE MBH MBH CFM ESP. D. V. PH. T CURB. OA.+7 •2 =3 IN OUT •4 +5 •6 CFM (SONIC ACCT. ADMINISTRATOR 800-361-6285), OR PORK INTERNATIONAL CORP. (MARK RITZ 405-419-6531) TO DETERMINE WHICH UNIT IS MOST APPROPRIATE FOR YOUR USE. MAKE SURE YOU ASK FOR SONIC'S NEGOTIATED PRICE. RTU-1 LENNOX LGA088H-120 85,000 10.1 G 120 95 3p�00 B. B 208 3 Y Y RTU-I=300 HIGH EFFICIENCY •2. 13. COOLING CAPACITY IS BASED ON ARI-210 CONDITIONS. E-ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEAT, G-GAS NEAT. RTU-2 LENNOX LGAra60H 60,00m 103 G 92 12.1 2,000 5' D F208 3 Y Y RTU-2=30ra HIGH EFFICIENCY •4. +5. EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE IS EXTERNAL TO THE UNIT AND ITS DUCT ENCLOSURE (IF APPLICABLE) WITH FILLERS IN PLACE. B-BELL DRIVE, D-DIRECT DRIVE. •6. CURB SHALL EXTEND UNDER THE ENTIRE UNIT AND DUCT ENCLOSURE. •i. PROVIDE MANUAL FRESH AIR DAMPER, w/OUTDOOR HOOD a CLEANABLE FILTER BALANCE FOR AMOUNT SHOWN. •8. PROVIDE AND INSTALL RETURN AIR DUCT MTD. SMOKE DETECTOR(S) IAW NFPA. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE WIRING AND CONNECTION FOR FAN SHUTDOWN. •9. THERMOSTAT SHALL BE HONEYWELL 13F06, SUBBASE 13FI1, WITH 39P 21 PLASTIC LOCKING COVER •10. RTU HEIGHTS VARY ACCORDING TO MODEL. CONSULT LOCAL OFFICIALS TO DETERMINE IF ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SCREENING CONSTRAINTS EXIST, AND CONTACT RTU MANUFACTURERS TO DETERMINE APPROPRIATE MODEL TO MEET YOUR NEEDS. •11. RTU'S SHOWN (REF. A-2.14) ON STANDARD 14' CURB. TO REDUCE HEICsHT OF RTU, LOWER CURB MAY BE USED WHERE ALLOWABLE BY LOCAL CODE. CONSULT YOUR RTU MANUFACTURER FOR AVAILABLE CURB HEIGHTS AND DELIVERY INFORMATION. 12'xIV COMB. AIR LOUVER w/ INTERIOR SCREEN, IN DOOR, V ABV. FIN. FLR PAINT TO MATCH DOOR 6" DUCT FROM EF-3 a EF-4 CONNECTED TO 8-fo-fo WYE. EXTEND 8' DUCT UP THROUGH ROOF REF. SHEET A-8. ,4 I R 15,4L,4NCE DATA EXHAUST SUPPLY EF-1 1444 CFM SF-1 EF-2 1650 CFM GRIDDLE HOOD 1204 CFM FRYER HOOD 1290 GFM 3094 CFM RTU -1 O.A. 300 CFM RTU-2 O.A. 300 CFM 30134 CFM SCHEDULE FAN No. DUTY MFfxR-MODEL No. TYPE CFM S.P. RPM BHP HP VOLTS 0 REMARKS EF-I GRILLE HOOP EXHAUST ILG U5CA13 CRBR 1444 10' 1600 - 3/4 120 1 +3, •5 EF-2 FRYER HOOD EXHAUST ILG UBCA13 CRBR 1650 1.0' 1625 - 3/4 120 1 +3, 15 SF-1 MAKE-UP AIR ILG 5I5-12 GRBS 1494 25 825 - 3/4 120 1 13 EF-3, 4 TOILET EXHAUST GROAN 360 HOP, CCDR �5 .10' T1200 - I/lra 120 1 •2, •4 REMARKS: •I. TYPE •2. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS, INLET GRILLE, BACKDRAFT DAMPER AND VENT STACK 13. FANS, CURBS, a CURB DUCT TRANSITIONS SUPPLIED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY M.C. REMAINDER OF DUCT BY M.G_ •4. FAN, DUCT AND INSTALLATION BY M.G. •5. THIS FAN FURNISHED WITH HINGED PRE -FAG. CURB. REFER TO DWG. A-8.13 FOR LOCATION OF HINGED SIDE. NOTE: ROUGH -INS AND FINAL CONNECTIONS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT BY G.C. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. FAN MOUNTING DRIVE HOOD C-CENTRIFUGAL P-PROPELLER R-ROOF W-WALL D-DUCT C-CEILING D-DIRECT B-BELT R-ROUND S-SQUARE A« 1�Istizl$uTiON DEVICES SCHEDULE MARK DUTY DESCRIPTION MFCsR./MODEL No. 24'x24' LOUVERED FACE, LAY -IN, KRUEGER MODEL 1400 O SUPPLY ROUND NECK SIRE AS SHOWN (ALTERNATE: TITUS TMS) ON PLANS. OB SUPPLY 12'xl2' LOUVERED FACE, SURFACE MOUNT, ROUND NECK SIRE AS SHOWN KRUEGER MODEL 1400 (ALTERNATE: TITUS TMS) ON PLANS. O ��W 24' x 48' FACE, LAY -IN, FILTER FRAME KRUEGER MODEL S580H-5FF 20'x44' FILTER SPACE (ALTERNATE: TITUS 35raRLF1) 24'x24' LOUVERED FACE, LAY -IN, 3-WAY KRUEGER MODEL SH O SUPPLY THROW, ROUND NECK SIZE AS SHOWN (ALTERNATE- TITUS TDC) ON PLANS. �'I. 3-WAY DIFFUSER IS NOT AN OPTION. IT MUST BE INSTALLED. *NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION 15000 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ON THE 1/(�_ SPEC DWl's5 l'SP') FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. (\,� M 1/(�_ CJ\/u vu \7 GOLI V �`7 NOTE: MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MUST FIELD FABRICATE TRANSITION FROM RTU SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR OPENINGS TO VERTICAL SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCT DROP BELOW ROOF. PORTIONS OF RETURN AIR OPENING IN UNIT AFFECTED BY JOIST CROSSING OPENING SHALL BE BLANKED OFF, INSULATED AND SEALED AIR TIGHT. 0 W h 1x clOLD ) 6199 r W� ZW F- (3 N r Z W Wom m r. C7" Z�3� WJ=z = W ZZoQ �� prA N 0 � cr U F � � o°u ® A 4 OA A� SHEET M 1 o � Q D o 0 O DWG: 005080—M 1 Im11-1nnn--I 1 q C rx 1 CEILING LINE CEILING LINE AIR FLOW REQUIREMENTS AIR FLOW REQUIREMENTS �— NOMINAL SETTINGS ----------- I NOMINAL SETTINGS FOR THIS SECTION I HINGED SIDE OF CURB 1� FOR THIS SECTION /� FRONT OF BLDG. ---- ---- �I� EXHAUST: 1444 CFM a 535' STATIC PRESSURE I ;' 11 EXHAUST:1650 CFM * 535" STATIC PRE55UiRE SUPPLY: 1204 Cl � .100' STATIC PRESSURE ' r SUPPLY: 1250 CFM 0 b0O STATIC PRESSURE , ' DUCT TRANSITION . °*' `----1 ® �' ' EXHAUST: ( 1) TAP(S) 12' X 10 ' IS. FURNISHED BY %' ---- ✓ EXHAUST: ( 1)TAP(S)12 ' X 12 ' I.S. SUPPLY: ( 2) TAP(S) 12' X 6O.S. OWNER INSTALLED SUPPLY: ( 2) TAP(S)14 ' X 6' O.S. BY M.C. LJI FILTERS: (0) 12 X 16 AND ( 3) 12 X 20 _41 FILTERS: ( 4) 12 X 16 AND (12 )0 X 20 LIGHTS: (0) LIGHT AND (0) GUARDS REQUIRED TRANSITION / _ LIGHTS: (0) LIGHT AND ( 0 GUARDS REQUIRED DAMPER ASSEMBLY FURNISHED BY CONTROL PANELCP-5 CONTROL PANEL: NONE LEFT HAND END OWNER INSTALLED GREASE TROUGH 5'-3" GRIDDLE HOOD BY M.G. AND CUP. z 5'-9' FRYER HOOD CEILING TILE 155-4 FRYER HOOD FRONT ELEVATION 0559-4 GRIDDLE HOOD FRONT ELEV. us 9 NO SCALE NO SCALE PROVIDE FIRE FLEX DUCT BY M.G. RESISTANT DUCT WRAP UD am AT THE TYPE I HOOD DUCTS TO PROVIDE A uv us MINIMUM 1 HOUR RATING. DUCT WRAP TO D COMPLY WITH ASTM, NFPA 4 LOCAL CODES. PROVIDE PRODUCT HOOD FURNISHED BY OWNER 10 ol 4'-1 1/2' 2'-10' jol SUPPORT MOUNTING ANGLE SUPPORT MOUNTING ANGLE 2'--1 1/2' 30 op ,N Ln SUCH AS 3M OR EQUAL. INSTALLED BY M.G. 10ol 10 TYP. Q 0 IW I- ® Wo FINISHED FLOOR 1 5/8" X 6" UNISTRUT ZP 15/8' X 6' UNISTRUT ZN N Wom m� F I RE WRAP OPT I ON 1 1/2" TYP. 1 1/2' TYP . Z Q x ZJ=ui (IF ALLOWED BY LOCAL CODES) 055-4 a .JX FRYER HOOD PLAN VIEW 55-4 rzRiDDLE HOOD PLAN VIEW zzoa 10-% NO SCALE NO SCALE OOa CC coma 3'-0" CEILING LINE — — — — ------7 SPECIFICATIONS mo 2'-0' 1. HOODS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF IS GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL WITH M 3 SUPPORT MOUNTING POLISH. ALL UNEXPOSED SURFACES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF MINIMUM fi-----""-"--; ANGLE fNSTALL TOP 18 GAUGE ALUMINIZED STEEL. II 1 4 BOTTOM AS SHOWN. 2. SUPPLY PLENUM SHALL BE LINED WITH FOIL BACKED INSULATION TO PREVENT ® r HINGED SIDE OF CURB TO FRONT OF BLDG. — — — — _ _ _ _ -� Il ' �� 11 `�� WALL CONDENSATION. 3. UL LISTED AND NSF APPROVED VAPOR PROOF INCANDESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES PRE- TOP OF HOOD IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC �0. 0 0 0 t11 2 m��o `��`� WIRED TO JUNCTION BOX AT Z 11 Fti eo ; 4. UL CLASSIFIED ALUMINUM OR STAINLESS STEEL BAFFLE -TYPE FILTERS SHALL BE ® lU Ci z o 1 3 MIN. 3 MIN. I< 3 MIN. 3 MIN. ----� < 0 �" 1 -1 `, 12' HIGH FILTERS EASILY REMOVED FOR CLEANING. FILTER HOUSING SHALL TERMINATE IN A PITCHED � a3 � UrZo DUCT TRANSITION i ti REMOVABLE GREASE TROUGH THAT DRAINS INTO A REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL W ® �" FURNISHED BY 40 DEG 4=- (SEE SPEC. NOTE 4.) GREASE CUP. tt z 4 ®� 1 =>W OWNER INSTALLED , FIXED L� 0 DEG FIXED 5. HOODS(S) SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE DAMPER FITTED TO SUPPLY DUCT COLLAR i di r °R� BY M.C. W- VANE E- VANE DIFFUSERS 6. PRE -PIPPED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE TOP OF THE O ZO U < Wes= -' V } DIFFUSERS 1 -' HOOD LOCATION MAY VARY WITH EACH INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM. A =Z~ ie SA 1. HOOD(S) SHALL BE FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA BULLETIN #Sro AND 0 moz TRANSITION / SUPPORT MOUNTING SHALL BEAR THE NSF SEAL OF APPROVAL. HOODS SHALL BE LISTED UNDER UL 110 0 RwT DAMPER ASSEMBLY ANGLE INSTALL TOP EXHAUST HOODS FOR COMMERCIAL COOKING EQUIPMENT UL FILE MH18853. FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED � 4 BOTTOM AS SHOWN. CxNi�AL NOTES ZOO ® Wnw BY M.G. -; 3/4" NPT DRAIN WITH 1. INSTALLATION OF VENTILATION SYSTEM SHALL BE BY OTHERS. EXHAUST AND _ N o `"~'` cn I 3/4" BALL VALVE SUPPLY DUCT COLLARS MAY BE FIELD GUT AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. e P gzo CC- 2. ANY AMOUNT OF AIR REQUIRED TO BALANCE THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE o=23 HI EXHAUST AND SUPPLIED AIR SHALL BE FURNISHED BY OTHERS. WwZ T 6�k 3. DUCT WORK BETWEEN HOOD AND ROOF TOP WILL BE FURNISHED BY OTHERS. ;R ~o0 CEILING TILE — —� GENERAL VENTILATION IS NOT LIABLE FOR IMPROPER FUNCTION OF THE SYSTEM 1 SHEET OF 3/4' FLEX DUCT BY M.G. 15158 4 FRYER/GRODLE FOOD SIDE ELEV. CAUSED BY CHANGES IN THE SYSTEM STATIC PRESSURE OR OVER ALL AIR FLOW VOLUME FROM THE ORIGINAL SPECIFIED DESIGN POINTS. EXHAUST DUCT AIR FLOW VELOCITY MUST BE BETWEEN 1500 AND 2200 FPM. u GYPSUM BOARD 4. EXHAUST AND SUPPLY AIR FLOWS MUST BE BALANCED UPON INSTALLATION. (BEARING THE UL 1/2" = 1'-0" TEST 4 BALANCE IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR FAN CLASSIFICATION OPERATING SPEED SHOULD BE RECHECKED AFTER 60 DAYS TO ENSURE PROPER MARKING) APPLIED PERFORMANCE. STATIC PRESSURE VALVES ARE GIVE FOR THE HOOD ONLY AND DO VERTICALLY EACH NOT INCLUDE DUCTWORK AND ROOFTOP FANS. Q SIDE OF 1-5/8' WIDE x 5. GENERAL VENTILATION RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE SPECIFICATIONS TO Z Z •� 1-1/4' DEEP 25 MSG HOOD FUFNISHED MEET CODE OR JOB REQUIREMENTS. o 0- Q }— GALV. METAL STUDS AND RUNNERS WITH BY WNER APPROVED BY: ✓l 1-1/4 TYPE S SCREWS INSTALLED BY M.C. � SPACED 8" O.G. PERIMETER, 12" D.G. CUSTOMER : J.D. HIGgNS o L FIELD, WITH SIDE JOINT SCREWS OFFSET 4'. FIELD WELD CHELI-ARC OR CARBON ARC) PER EXH. DUCT LOCATION -WORLDWIDE 2 (L JU COVER JOINTS WITH NFPA 96 FIELD WELD (HELI-ARC � J COMPOUND AND OR CARBON ARC) PER NFPA 96 PAPER OR MESH TAPE, SCREWHEADS P.O. # Q nl W- AND I I )— WITH JOINT COMPOUND. TYPICAL ALL 4 SIDES HOOD 3' COLLAR SIGNED 3 OF DUCT BETWEEEN — — — — — — — — 0 ROOF DECK AND VENT FINISHED FLOOR TITLE w V O HOOD. (UL DESIGN NO. — U496) DATE ®FE Q NOTE: GREASE DUCTS TO BE ENCL05ED #A 3: FIRCHAS OPT ION ALLOWED 5Y LOCAL CODES)MARK FOR ONE HOUR FIRE RATING WITH SHEETS OFF FIRE -CODE TYPE "X' G.D.W. W. FOR MORE INFORMATION CONTACT MCGRATH C� JD HIGGINS CO. NSF.UOL S SHEET(IF M2 Cap800-772-5452 19 21 r=XHAU-ST DUCT/HOOD SECTION r=XHAUST DUCT C0NNE CT I ON DETAIL st atorlTK t r DWG: 005080-M2 NO SCALE NO SCALE ..,ven c�nMn0 -_ _ it _ - -. _ I 101 F— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - r-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I I Summary Page Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 1 Location: The data presented in this report is an exact record of the project's system performance on the test date. Data was obtained in accordance with A.A.B.C. Standard Procedures by a certified A.A.B.C. Technician. Any variances from design quantities which exceed A.A.B.C. tolerances are noted throughout this report. The air distribution systems have been tested and balanced, and final adjustment have been made. Air flow rates were balanced, within specified tolerances, of -5 to +10% air distribution and 0 to +5% on exhaust. Warranty is limited to one (1) year from the date of the final test. Within that time frame any discrepancies, ambiguities, or omissions found within this report will be retested, adjusted, or balanced as deemed necessary. Discrepancies, ambiguities, or omissions will require written notification. Warranty certificates are available upon request. I I I Submitted by: I Test and Balance Engineer: 1 I I Signature: 1 I Date: I Registration Number: Seal: I I �I �I �I �I �I I I L-------------------------------------------- J --------------------------------------------- ROOF TOP TEST REPORT Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 1 1 1 1 System: j I I UNIT DATA Make Model # Serial # Fan Sheave Make Fan Shve Diam./Bore * of Belts/Make/Size Sheave C.L. Dist. # Filters/Type/Size MOTOR DATA Make/Frame H.P. R.P.M. Volts/Phase/Hertz F.L. Amps/S.F. Sheave Make Sheave Model # Sheave Diam./Bore Operating Diameter REMARKS: Technician Name: Test Date: TEST DATA Design Actual Total C.F.M. Outside Air C.F.M. Return Air C.F.M. Des. DB Des. WB Act. DB Des. WB Outside Air Temp Return Air Temp Entering Air Temp Leaving Air Temp Air Delta Temp TEST DATA Design Actual Volts Amps Fan R.P.M. Design Actual Total S.P. External S.P. Discharge S.P. Suction S.P. Filter S.P. Coil S.P. jSystem: I Design Actual RTU-1 Supply Outside Air RTU-2 Supply Outside Air EF-1 EF-2 SF-1 REMARKS: SF 1 + RTU 1 O/A + RTU 2 O/A - EF 1 - EF 2 = A + + - - = A The store is POS/NEG (circle) A CFM Remarks: I I �I �I u1 OI Technician Name: I Test Date: L -------------------- OUTLET TEST REPORT I I I --------------- ------------- Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 1 System: Outlet Design Air Preliminary Final Air Percent of # CFM Air CFM CFM Design Outlet Totals rI REMARKS: 31 Oki Technician Name: I I Test Date: L--------------------------------------------J L---------------------------------------------� Hood Test Report Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 Design Actual Grille Hood Supply CFM Exhaust CFM Fryer Hood Supply CFM Exhaust CFM Remarks: Technician Name: Test Date: I L------------- I I I J----------------- NOTE: The Test Report sheets shall be cut from the drawings and duplicated as needed. All data fields must be filled in. All information and data must be typed or in legible printed handwriting. The final report shall be four (4) copies, certified, and bound. Reduced size drawings must be included in the final TAB report. S� i O lu 4n 0 W V) 09 0 N ® I 0 I to 0 �r Wo ZW ON V- N Z Wm^ za~ Z J = u; Q.:3 0 3 CO =W ZZOQ OOaCc ovCq(5a pro _ ,n ca Z �Lo ® Z N irwZQ Lu N a30 11] /�.00 99 �D �WU r W L �O2 fn a� O w W = U ��Z4 O 6i Ru h W to 0 :9 moz i mow ��i ®ZWn ® W 0 W �o a=ir N 400h-O gZ09 ° �WW z ~ ~ 0 o � 13 0 < Q to LU V/ _Q ~ F- - o U 0- d —1 a 0 O a1:EV L � (L V SHEET M3 DWG: 005080-M3 V Z O I I I I I I I I I I I I FAN TEST REPORT I I VELGRID REPORT I I Sonic Drive —In TAB Procedure 1 I I I I Oki Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 1 1 Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 Fan # Location Service Manufacturer Model # Serial # Motor Make/Frame H.P./R.P.M. Volts/Phase/Hertz F.L. Amps/Service Factor Fan Sheave Make Fan Sheave Diameter/Bore Motor Sheave Make Motor Sheave Diameter/Bore Motor Sheave Model # Operating Diameter Number of Belts/Make/Size Centerline Distance TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL DESIGN ACTUAL Total C.F.M. Fan R.P.M. Total Static Pressure Discharge S.P./Suction S.P. Voltage Amperage *117VI:1:431 Technician Name: Test Date: L--------------------------------------------- J ------------------------------------------- RECTANGULAR DUCT TRAVERSE REPORT Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 System: Width: Duct Area Design Actual Height: Isq. Ft. Vel. C.F.M. Vel. C.F.M. Position 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Total F.P.M. # of Readings Average Velocity Duct Area C.F.M. Remarks: TT D w z U System: Width: Filter Area Design Actual Height: Sq. Ft Vel. C.F.M. Vel. C.F.M. Position 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Total F.P.M. # of Readings Average Velocity Duct Area C.F.M. Remarks: Technician Name: Test Date: L------------------------------------- ------------------------------------ ROUND DUCT TRAVERSE REPORT Project: ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA — 005080 System: Size Duct Area Design Actual q. Ft Vel. C.F.M. Vela C.F.M. Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 10 11 12 13 Total F.P.M. # of Readings Average Velocity Duct Area C.F.M. Remarks: The entire system must by fully operational: Outside doors closed, RTUs running, outside air hoods installed, filters installed, balance dampers fully open, all outlets installed (including the 3—way diffusers), exhaust fans running, proper EF to grease duct transistors installed, grease filters installed, and supply fans running. I 1. Roof Top Units 1 1.1 Record all units data, motor data, and design data on the Roof Top Report sheets. 1 1.2 Set the outside air volume close to design. 1.3 Place the units in cooling mode if the season allows. 1.4 Read all of the outlets using a calibrated flowhood. Record as preliminary on the Outlet Test Report sheets. 1.5 Proportion the outlets to the design flow rates. 1.6 Adjust the RTUs to deliver design air flow. 1.7 Read all of the outlets. Make adjustments as necessary. Record final readings on the Outlet Test Report sheets. 1.8 Record all actual performance data on the Roof Top Test Report sheets. 2. Exhaust Fans (Rest Rooms) 2.1 Record all fan data, motor data, and design data on the Fan Test Report sheets. 2.2 Read the exhaust grille. 2.3 Record the exhaust inlet volume on the Fan Test Report sheet. 3. Kitchen Hoods (Strata Vent) 3.01 Record all fan data, motor data, and design data on the Fan Test Report sheets. 1 3.02 Traverse the supply fan duct work. 1 3.03 Proportion the supply duct runs to design volumes by method of traverse. 1 3.04 Adjust the supply fan to design output air flow. 3.05 Reread all supply duct runs. Make adjustments if necessary. Record final total Fan output on the Fan Test Report sheet. 3.06 Record each hood final supply air flow on the Hood Test Report sheet. 3.07 Measure each hood exhaust air flow using a Shortridge Vel—Grid or a rotating vane anemometer. Multiply the average filter inlet velocity by the filter bank area. Derive the exhaust air flow. 3.08 Adjust the exhaust fans to deliver the design exhaust flow rates. Record the Final exhaust flow rates on the Fan Test Report sheets. 3.09 Record each hood exhaust flow on the Hood Test Report sheet. 3.10 Use smoke candles to verify proper smoke extraction on each hood. Smoke traveling outside the hood area is not acceptable. �I w1 =I �I 01 Oki I NOTE: The Test Report sheets shall be cut from the drawings and duplicated as needed. All data fields must be filled in. All information and data must be typed or in legible printed handwriting. The final report shall be four (4) copies, certified, and bound. Reduced size drawings must be included in the final TAB report. L-------------------- ----------------- J W1 j Tj =1 I WI I U I I I Ok �UI I oo I Technician Name: I I Technician Name: Test Date: I I I I Test Date: L— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — I I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — L — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - J �j 0 Z 6A 0 w V) t N 0 0 0 a a WV_ LU ZW _E CAN 1- w Z Woe fa^ ?Q~ Z J= LLT LU Z 0..n=> Co W ZZO 001044 cc I�VcyC7 �A 0 awe pro a LIN N0Z 'WU ® Z N 0 LIS > N � Z O 0 (B7 } 0 V Z 4 Mu eoa o N lul o o w 0 0 Q + 22 in am wvoi< 44 0 V moz M i o" ® zWo ® wow C%Q aw�s 9 40 z rtUl coo~o 0-3 0 P gzrU- �=7 LJ WUJ ~~U o V Z Z o a LU cA �1Y_Uu� ~oZ I— LL Q LO 0 O N A IL Qn H SHEET M4 DING: 005080-M4 2@09 O K0 t I I_ r_1 REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY i — � — J 6'-34 LJ a P_ C I�J II �I CJ F -in L J 1/4' WATER T COFFEE MAKER� r PROVIDE WA L `� STOP a 54' L J CW, HW DOWN IN WALL TO P-5. AND 1-1/2' VENT UP TO ABOVE CEILING F.P.H.B. AT IS' AFF. - TYP. INSTALL PER MFG. SPECS. - PLUMBING WILL PENETRATE TO INTERIOR OF BLDG. (2) 1/4' FILTERED WATER TO STEAMER PROVIDE WALL STOP i 12' AFF. 1/2 SYRUP LINES ABOVE CEILING, BY OWNER 4 COCA -COLA 5' SQUARE PVC CHASES TO MACHINE BY PLUMBER REF. K-I Fri i 3/4' u PROVIDE 2' SCH. 40, PVC CHASE, FOR POWER WASH — SYSTEM IN WALL. EXTEND 4' OUTSIDE FACE/BLDG. WALL (g IS'AFF) 4 14' MIN. INSIDE TO 90' 'LONG SWEEP' ELBOW, AND 2' PVC UP TO 6' ABOVE CLG. (COORD. W/ MANUF) PREP SINK r 1/2-CW, 1/2-HW DK 1 TO PREP SINK , , HW 1/2 III II��� 3/4 Ir I— 1/2' HW 4 CW DN. -1/2' 1. J LI, P-1 I/2'CW ON. TO P1 BELOW 01 DOMESTIC WATEi2 PiPiNG PLAN 3/4' CW, HW 1/2' CW, HW FOR POWER WASH • 6' BELOW CLG W/BOILER VALVES, CENTERED I/2"HW 4 C D . ABOVE MOP SINK 4 6' APART TO P2 BELOW P-2 REFER TO CIVIL DWGS. 1-1/4' 1/2---4-3 FOR CONTINUATION. 1' 1-1/4' CW ENTRANCE 1/2 HW VALVE IN RISER 1/2'CW DN.TO PI BELOW P-1 BACKFLOW PREVENTER WATTS SERIES 009 INSULATED WITH ARMAFLEX P-6 1' GAS FROM ROOF CW LINES IN MECH ROOM TO BE INSULATED AND WRAPPED WITH SELF REGULATING HEAT TAPE. P-4 I' CW, IN HW TO WTR HTR Y.T.R. POWER WASH CHASE -SEE NOTE OP?. SIDE OF PLAN WATER HEATER NOTE: COLD WATER SUPPLY, HOT WATER RETURN AND GAS SUPPLY CONNECTIONS ARE ALL ON BOTTOM FRONT OF P-4 WATER HEATER NOTES BY SYMBOL 0 1/2' Fill, w/VALVE STUBBED OUT FOR CONTINUATION TO SLUSH BAG IN BOX BY SYRUP VENDER 02 1/2' CW, w/VALVE STUBBED OUT FOR CONTINUATION BY SYRUP VENDOR 30 WATER FILTER 0 WATER LINES FROM FILTER TO ICE MACHINE NOT EXPOSED. PROVIDE S.S. ESCUTCHEON At PENETRATIONS 05 GAS CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT AT 6" AFF. 0 1-1/2' GAS FROM ROOF, w/ SOL. VALVE CONNECTED TO HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM. CONTROL CKT. BY FIRE SUPPR. VENDOR 1/4' _ 1'-011 -NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION 15000 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ON THE 'H/r� SPEC DWGS ('BP') FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. �vu vu�y M 0 w 0 fN v) Ocr We ZW c3m " ZNN Wom (an ac') Z�3� WJ=uJ aM=> W ZZoQ a CC CL ®ore � m>�N gg E N �o°u to 0 4 fi%� I 5 r� O�O j w cap ftM a } oo 0 W� W o� [Lu Lu < oLUL ® zWo ®W0W C44a aWF 40 0 ®Z�Z � 3 p P �ZF � OFF Z � o 0 V _n J �H 11oL O rr 0 0 VED Zu (L �n V to SHEET PlA DING: 005080— P 1 A 2' VENT w 3'-3' tir FD.IA) O w1' REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY r_1 I r'. WATER 10110E SIZING TA5LE UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE, DOMESTIC WATER LINES SHALL RUN CONCEALED OVERHEAD AS DESIGNATED IN PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE t BE SIZED ACCORDING TO TABLE BELOW. PLANS t RISERS DO NOT NECESSARILY SHOW ALL PIPING RUNS. INSTALL A FACTORY SHOCK ABSORBER IN ACCORDANCE WITH PDI-WH2O1 AT TOP OF EACH FIXTURE GROUP, OR 10' CAPPED AIR CHAMBER AT EACH WATER SUPPLY. NUMBER OF FIXTURES— PIPE SIZE (IPS) 2 OR LESS 1/2' 3 TO 5 3/4' (0 TO 10 IN 11 TO 15 1-1/4, 16 TO 23 1-1/2, 24 TO 42 2' --- FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSET 15 EQUIVALENT TO 6 FIXTURES t FLUSH VALVE URINAL IS EQUIVALENT TO 3 FIXTURES 0 3' F.DIA)� 77 3' im Lr iL 3� F5 ;-t No 3' F.DIA) 3' 12'-10' 7 — — — — — — — 2' VENT — — — - - L -Li 3' FD.(A) A 0' FE I —El MECHANICAL SYM50LS SYMBOL. DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION - —SS- — SANITARY WASTE BELOW GRADE GLOBE VALVE (STRAIGHT 4 ANGLE) --- V --- PLUMBNG VENT -ICI---C AUTO. CONTROL VALVE (STRAIGHT i 3-WAY) —CW— DOMESTIC COLD WATER --1��1-- UNIONS (SCREWED ! FLANGED) —HW— DOMESTIC HOT WATER (140d ) REDUCERS (CONCENTRIC a ECCENTRIC) — G — NATURAL GAS =o -Q2A CLEANOUTS —CD— COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN ROOF DRAIN, FLOOR DRAIN, AREA DRAIN -0<*— GATE VALVE HD4 WALL HYDRANT, YARD HYDRANT, HOSE BIBB —�� CHECK VALVE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (WALL t RECESSED) —} — COCK OR PLUG VALVE t m THERMOSTAT (ZONE OR UNIT BY SUBSCRIPT) — W — WATER LINE FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION O SHEET NOTE: DESIGNATION VTR PLUMBING VENT THROUGH ROOF Q EQUIP. DESIG.- SEE EQUIP. PLAN FOR REG. OA. , RA OUTSIDE AIR, RETURN AIR M.C. , ErC. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, ELECTRICAL GONTRAC. GC., P.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR, PLUMBNG CONTRACTOR S R E TT F G C R L D H SUPPLY FLOOR RETURN GRILLE CEILING EXHAUST REGfSTER LOW TDB R DIFFUSER HIGH B.D. j 13ALANCING DAMPER APF. ABOVE FNISHED FLOOR NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS APPEAR ON DRAWINGS. 24'-2'— PREP SINK PROVIDE VAPOR SEALS a ALL FRZR/COOLER PENETRATIONS +II 3' FD.I AI 3'-3' 13'-0' CO N N 4'VTR- .s P-2 IP-1 r V HOLD CONDENSATE LINE TIGHT AGAINST BACK OF FRZR/COOLER BOX FREEZER 19'-10' 3' FD.IA) 3' 4' 4'- 01 DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING PLAN P-2 31 �—I 3' FD.(A) PLUMBING FIXTUPM SCHEDULE MARK DESCRIPTION MFG./MODEL No. SS V CW NW REMARKS P-1 WATER CLOSET - HOOP. IS' AMERICAN STANDARD 4' 2' 1/2' - w /BOLT CAPS, WHITE, OPEN -FRONT BENEKE FLR_ MNTD., TANK TYPE CADET 11 2216.143 SEAT, WITH COVER- ALTS: KOHLER K-3421 CRANE 3-854/3-153E P-2 LAVATORY - WALL HUNG AMERICAN STANDARD 1-1/4' 1-1/4' 1/2' 1/2' w /1490.112H FAUCET WITH WRIST BL. HNDLS. AND COMRADE 0124.024 GRID DRAIN PROVIDE 'TRUEBRO' 0102 INSUL. ALTS: KOHLER K-112S KIT AT SUPPLY 4 DRAIN. CRANE 1-165-V OR 5 P-3 MOP BASIN FAUCET T45 BRASS - - 1/2' 1/2' MNT. AT 30' AFF. INCLUDES VACUUM BREAKER MODEL 5-0666-RGH ALT& ZUW Z-841K1 CHICAGO FAUCETS MI-DJ18-El P-4 INSTANTANEOUS, GAS FIRED RINNAI 2532 FFU 'C' - - 3/4' 3/4' 180,000 BTUH NAT GAS INP., 85 GPM 0100 WATER HEATER WITH RIK-F FLUSH KIT t INSTRUCTIONS, DEGREE RISE. DIRECT VENT TO EXTERIOR (5') RINNAI FLUE ASSEMBLY, AND CONTROLLER P-5 HAND SINK FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY 1-1/2' 1-1/2' 1/2' 1/2' FAUCET BY OWNER PLBG. CONTR P-6 UTILITY ROOM FAUCET T46 BRASS MODEL 8-0614-RGH - - 1/2' 1/2' MNT. AT 36' A.F.F. INCLUDES VACUUM BREAKER H.B. HOSE BIBB WOC)DFORD MODEL 24 - - 3/4' 3/4' w/ VAC. BRKR ALTS: MANSFIELD 4416 NIBCO V00890T RD. ROOF DRAIN WADE W-3004 4' - - - w/ C.I. DOME i DECK CLAMP, ALTS: JOSAM 21500 ZUW Z-121 FD.(A) FLOOR DRAIN WADE W-1103-5TD 5 3' - - - w/ SATIN BRONZE TOP. ALTS: JOSAM 30000-E ZURN Z-310 FD.(B) FLOOR DRAIN WADE W-1103-STD 5-21 3' - - - w/ SATIN BRONZE TOP, ; SED. BUCKET. ALTS: JOSAM 30OW-E ZURN Z-310 F.S. FLOOR SINK WADE W-9113-15-21 3' - - - B'x8'xb' G.I. FL. SINK w/ BED. BUCKET. AND HALF ALTS: JOSAM 49OW GRATE. ZURN Z-1910 G.O. GLEANOUT WADE 6004 NH, 1 4' - - - W/ SATIN BRONZE TOP ALTS: JOSAM 56040 ZUW Z-1400 M.S. FIBERGLASS MOP SINK MUSTEE 'DURASTONE' 65M 3' 1-1/2' - - RPAB. FREEZE PROOF HOSE BIBB JAY R. SMITH 5509-P5 - - 3/4' - w/ VAC. BRKR. ALTS: JOSAM 11050 ZURN Z-1310-4 REFER TO CIVIL DWGS. 4' VENT FOR GREASE TRAP LOCATION. REFER TO CIVIL DWriS. T FOR CONTINUATION. I r-- IN. OF 41 0 GREASE TRAP co .INN— L 11000 GAL. TYP.) / - 4' / 3' STUB FOR M.S. 1-1/2' VENT D— P-6 "q l'\i �r1�1 c_ �puc \ �T n NOTES 5Y SYM50L Ol 4"RD., DOWN IN MECH. RM. THRU SLAB, AND OUT TO DISCHARGE THW FACE OF CURB AT DRIVE-THRU UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFER TO CIVIL DWS5. FOR CONTINUATION. O2 PLUMBER TO ANCHOR DRAIN PIPE FOR 3 COMPARTMENT SINK TO WALL WITH ALL THREAD. O3 NOT USED. O NOT USED. 1/41 _ 1'-0" -NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION 15000 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ON THE !H/(�_ SPEC DWGS ('SP') FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. �JV/u vu CCr WV_ ZLu �F 0:31- Z M W) W#0^ c) ZQH ZJ=W a-0=> W ZZoa OOa)= e% 41) 0 tt ® pCAa r 01 LL ® L) oo U.l�' WWo m > }o Z Q ® wo cIi too � N O w oW = L)V in ® 9 U W$< 0 mom o LUW 0 > ®ZOO ® Wow �0 <W� en ~o 9 P 3�0 qQm- a`_25 En Z � o U . V z 0-°O� o � Lu �'- u c� J CL Ln 0 A 0 0z �- z ED (L Lu � o- H 0— SHEET p 1 DWG: 005080-P 1 ;n In, BWA to YLLaWT�R L Wq�R D FiL� P.c. NST,�� � � T . 3,4, In, R , � aTl°N FILTER s� I� �P �sTR�To IRS SI TI F M kL oNs, iNs�l�°'u 11 1.Ml. ln1 4. 13 V � I > 4' I flip � 3, \I 5pv IG 3.�7 �R P S' �"►`1 I I �I•In, 121 ko 1 F.I 3/4, �TRIPLE S 'Ns RTU 8 Mk 3 k•IN,ATg LI NZ GENERAL NOTES: N � � I S• 1. ALL VENTS THRU ROOF SHALL BE Jl A MIN. OF 10'-O' FROM FRESH AIR I 3i'r P•2 >I INTAKES. OFFSET AS REM). 2. ALL HORIZONTAL VENTS TO I ` \ ,� A' BE 6' ABOVE FLOOD ,� `•� '/� LEVEL RIM OF FIXTURE CONNECTED. '`rl Cl �• >� 3 ' 3'F0(4> N G�" P ) >I3�D( 4)I I •' 1 P•I 1�� 01 WASTE < VENT ISOMETRIC NO SCALE 'a.. .. ,.- i•-....- 1•_-..: i�7 i.,. ;:. .:: :. .�ryY! �_' Tl-;.--�„'-•4'�i .�L-••- .�. .- i NAMEPLATE INDICAT • 'PVC DOUBLE ry•• MF& PARK EQUIP. ' � TEE MANIFOLD • ��!r 000-256-E041 I MODEL: GT-1000 Ijrjr {{II y� �4 i•_ INLET AND OUTLET 'h CAST IRON FRAME AND 'f PIPINCs PROVIDED + --ti] C.OVER. (TYPICAL OF 2) BY OTHERS. PLAN VIEW CONCRETE EXTENSION �RMCsB As REQUIRED 4' 8LEEVE - cv OUTLET ill c�1 • % c+l N L! ;.. 2'-5' 4' TAPERED WALL 4' SLEEVE iv ~` INLET LIQUID SUWACE N �4 L• - MONOLITHIC BAFFLE (SLIDE IN BAFFLE IS ; NOT ACCEPTABLE) 4' PVC DOUBLE TEE MANIFOLD CsAI VANIZED RISER ? •• + SUPPORT (TYPICAL) -i: N N ILL 4' Specifications Engineering Data CONCRETE : Class 1 concrete with design strength of Interceptor is structurally and hydraulically 4500 PSI at 28 days. Unit is of monolithic engineered conforming to Uniform Plumbing construction at floor, wall and baffle (no Joints Code. Nominal liquid capacity is 1000 below water level)Csross empty weight of approx. gallons with grease 4 solids retention 10,000 Ibs. capacity of approximately 1,1-10 4 3,130 lbs. REINFORCEMENT: Grade 60 reinforced with steel rebar Conformsng GPM Recommended for average flow to ASTM A615 on required centers or aqua. rate of 5 GPt intermittent flow rate up to Design for AASHTO H-20 traffic loading. 13 GPi"i. Field excavation and re aration shall be �01 0 �04) U �gX � pt� 'R P - ���ay>; 1� �pp / FILTER O�E� 60 �RivG� PO , GAS SERVICE REQUIREMENTS: GRIDDLE: 100000 BTUH INPUT m 5'W.C. FRYERS (4) 320000 BTUIH INPUT 1V 5' W.C. WATER HEATER 180000 BTUH INPUT 6 5' W.G. RTU-1 120000 $TUH INPUT a 5' W.G. RTU-2 18000 $TUH INPUT a 5' W.G. To 5��y °P i � v�3/8 IvE 10 >� T. voll yTO� GENERAL NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 10' CAPPED AIR CHAMBER AND SHUT-OFF VALVE AT EACH FIXTURE SUPPLY. TYPICAL. 2. ALL HOT WATER LINES TO BE INSULATED 3. C.W. LINE TO iCE MACHINE TO INSULATED IF INSTALLED ULs. OR OVER HEAD. (NO EXCEPTIONS) 4. ALL WATER LINE iN MECH. ROOM TO BE INSULATED AND WRAPPED WITH SELF REGULATING HEAT TAPE (CW)HW). INSULATE BACKFLOW PREVENTOR W/ AR'1AFLEX. 5. ALL COLD WATER AND HOT WATER LINES TO BE INSULATED 6. P.G. TO PROVIDE 5.5 EXCUTCHIONS AT ALL EXPOSED WALL PENETRATIONS. 21 �yIPA 03 DOMESTIC: WATER FIFING ISOMETRIC: NO SCALE 1-1/2' GAS DOWN TO KITCHEN EQUIP. REF. P-1-02 FOR CONT. EXHAUST FAN " 2 4 FRYERS (320 CFHXW EA) I' CD DWI- TNRU PITCH PAN, TO ON FACTORY CURB 5 GRILL (100 CFH) FLOOR SINK BELOW. REF. P-1-01 SUPPLY FAN ON COOLER / CONDENSERS FREEZER FACTORY CURB G CD RTU " 1 ON O O.A.D. FACTORY CURB O SOUND D ISH �3/4' 'MUSAK' EXH. FAN " 1 ON RTU 02 ON 2 3'VTR FACTORY CURB. FACTORY CURB IROVIDE P-TRAP AT Cr)GD COND. LINE AT EA. RTU 2' I COPPER OR PVC COND. G DRAIN LINE ON ROOF. 4 VT� O ICE MACHINE CONDENSERS VENT FROM RESTROOM — EXHAUST FANS REF. M-1.06 05 ROOF FIFING PLAN 1/8 1 = 1' — 011 CONCRETE SURFACE OR FLOOR COVERING AS REQUIRED. CLEANOUT COVER CSK SCREW /1FTf GLEANOUT PLUG FINISHED FLOOR D D D D D D DDDDD �DDDDDDDDD FERRULE aLD�• kl:k � Y �►T•OPP VAL NTFR 4'x4'Xb' REDWOOD PIPE SUPPORTS, V-0' O.G., PiPE LOOSELY SECURED TO BLOCK PLACE DBL. LAYER ROOFING UNDER BLOCKS. ROOF DRAIN ROOF LADDER GAS METER AND REGULATOR BY GAS SERVICE CO. - REF. P-2.04 FOR CONNECTED LOAD_ I' GAS SERVICE DOWN TO WATER HEATER 1180 CFH) 5' TYPE 'B' GAS VENT THROUGH ROOF (REF. M-123 4 A-8.05) TOP OF GRATE SHALL BE FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR COVERING. FINISHED FLOOR SLOPE —� _LL J•. TOP OF GRATE SHALL BE FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR COVERING. FINISHED FLOOR -L SLOPE G.I. CASTINGS: Manhole frames, covers or grates are manufactured completed prior to delivery of interceptor. TOTAL �98000 $TUHCGFH) INPUT (� t of grey cast iron conforming to ASTM A48-�6 Use dimensional data as shown. R0. � FLOOR SINK AREA FLRL DRAIN Class 30_ Manhole shall have 24 inch inside PROVIDE MINIMUM GAS PRESSURE OF 5' W.G. (3 CZ) H5A NO SCALE NO SCALE o diameter and be traffic duty. we ) Cool.. � ANO`�T �L..— MINIMUM EQUAL TO: PARK EQUIP. CO. (1-Slam-2S6-8m41)04 lIS� oGREASE TRAP MODEL No. GT-1000 rzAS PIPING ISOMETRIC:"' N. 06 FINISHED FLR. 07 FLR. DRAIN DTL5. REF. CIVIL DIJJG5. FOR EXACT CREASE TRAP SIZE. NO SCALE NO SCALE NO SCALE C- ASS � � D I A i {NOTE: REFER TO DIVISION 15OW MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ON THE 02SPEC DWGS ('SP') FOR ADDITIONAL iNFORMATION. NO SCALE 2@R99( v z d SONIC SONIC r REFERENCE NORTH FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ONLY 7 6" X 6" ACCESS HOLE THRU-WALL FOR BULK CO2 REFILL, 4?� W �t J 42 r 4 TIER W 4 TIER c 43 I to In I8/36 to w m '99 �N 49 N N L (� 95 58 95 44 w � SER W � .��. 48 3�0 4 FREER ul u '� �' 48 .d cv Q N 98 53 tt cr 43 18/36 4-TIER 18/36 4-TIER w ,W N y 4--TIETIS DUNNAGE o 0R RACK o MOP SINK WATER HEATER NOTE; THE PLANS ASSUME THAT EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN THE STORE WILL BE CONSISTENT WITH THAT SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND 01 QUIPMENT FLEA 1�THAT, IF SUBSTItUtIONS ARE MADE, APPROPRIATE COORDINATION MUST TAKE PLACE EITHER IN THE FIELD OR BY 4 1/4�� a V _0„ THE ARCHITECT (WHO MUST FIRST BE MADE AWARE OF THE CHANGES) PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL FOR PERMI(T�S, nn �7 (p z 0 z e z ®o ul >V cr1 ' IL 89 I o o Q ®?8 z 0 u 7 0 9 lJ V a 0 OA O 161 SHEET K I Dwe: 005080-K1 ram n nnir 1 o �IDC 01 EXHAUST HOODS SUSPENDED FROM 1/2„ = 1, -0„ SLOG. STRUCTURE WITH 4- 1/2" ALL THREADS SUPPLIED 5Y OWNER W/ HOOD. 05 1/2" = 1'-0u m 8'-All ALL CEILING HUNG EQUIPMENT SHALL 5E SUSPENDED FROM BLDG. STRUCTURE. (NOT GRID) C 0 2 1&1 = 1' -0" 03 1/2" = 1'-0" ALL CEILING HUNG EQUIPMENT T SHALL 5E SUSPENDED FROM BLDG. STRUCTURE. (NOT GRID) 36 5'-0" 99 co M M 04 1/2 " = 1'-011 0 Z z ee� 2 ® o�c —v Q r a � , w°dP N RIg ® u 4 w � o�a Z -, U Bzx ® pd ww< �z ®ZEC ®w �i z=w p C= C= @9 u C= 7 0 w L0 O U V g I SHEET K 2 Dwo: s c soNic 005080—K2 r rannnnza o an/p `J- ALL CEILING HUNG EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SUSPENDED FROM SLOG. STRUCTURE. (NOT GRID) _ v WALL SHOWN DASHED FOR CLARITY t-t I ill 0 1 02 1/211 + 11-011 1/211 --11-011 ' 35 0 1•� N ALL CEILING HUNG EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SUSPENDED FROM BLDG. STRUCTURE. (NOT GRID) 55 92 85 0 8 '11 61 � � � � ooaeoa L � 13 i8 5'-6" I I I I I 1 --------- J • t¢�s i i i i i i �� ❑ 1rA I I I I I I in ` \ 35 03- `\ i 7v PER 03 1/211 O 11_011 1' z>1 ® � nYY gg N ® N w how ® Q pLu l e l a ®ZOO ®%WFE ow W o-- o jg EO y, o � Q i- C== L0 0 �► J C }- lu O ul ON SHEET K 3 O C DwC: 005080—K3 v .11 I 2@09 9@09 a U I 1***l N T C ID U L� O. DESCRIPTION TY �w- MAKE / MODEL NO. 40 tu w ELECTRICAL PLUMBING REMARKS � Y GAS I SAUCE WARMER 1 A APW / W-4 PACKAGE DECAL (SMALLWARES) 01 1120 1 1 33 1 2 TABLE 30"x48" W/2 UNDERSHELVES 3 A WASSERSTROM / 0053-01-15 • 1 1 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-01J10 • i 3 ICE CREAM MACHINE (TWO HEAD) 1 A ELECTRO FREEZE / 30-CMT 01 208 3 (2)2.0 120B 1 B TAYLOR / 8156 01 208 3 (2A.5 251.01 C STOELTiNG / U431 • 208 3 (2)2.0 it i 4 WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM i A LiFESTREAM / FOLC3 • 1/2 1 5 MIXER i A HAMiLTON BEACH / 94950 • 120 1 1/2 5.2 1 B ELECTRO FREEZE / WOM15 • 115 1 3/4 8.0 1 6 TABLE 30"x48" W/2 UNDERSHELVES 4 SACK STATION 1 AlWASSERSTROM / 0053-02-18 • 1 A CONCEPT sERVICEs / • i 1 EXHAUST SYSTEM WIRE INTERLOCK BOX 1 A J.D. HIGGiNS INTERLOCK PANEL • 2 8 COFFEE MACHINE 1 A NEWCO / NKT-3-NS4 • 1 B BUNN / TWF20280,0001 • 1 C BLOOMFIELD / 8181A • 1 9 TEA DISPENSER 1 1,41 BLOOMFIELD / 8199 (SMALLWARES) • 1 10 21" FOUNTAINETTE W/REFRIGERATOR 1 A WASSERSTROM / 0120110600N • 115 1 115 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-01004 • 120 1 114 5-15R 15.0 1 ii DROP SAFE i A CORPORATE sAFE / CS3023E • 1 12 8-HEAD DRINK MACHINE / ICE BIN W/STAND 2 A COCA -COLA / 23308, 84-0030 • 115 1 3 13 NOT USED 14 ICE BiN 900 POUND 1 A sCOTTSMAN / 5149005C • 1 15 iCE MACHINES t REMOTE CONDENSERS 2 A SCOTTSMAN / NME650RE32A 1 115 I 3/4 225 1 3/8 3/4 1 B SCOTTSMAN / NME954RS-32A • 208 1 1 13/8 3/4 1 i6 SLUSH DRINK MACHINE 1 A ELECTRO FREEZE / 010 • 208 I 1 2.0 11B 1 B STOELTiNG / 50318 • 208 1 .5 6-20P 120 1 C TAYLOR / 342 • 208 1 (2).25 i 1 11 COMPUTERS / REGISTERS 3 A P.O.S. VENDOR 1 4 18 CONEY BAG RACK 14"x36"CHROME WIRE(WALL) 1 A METRO / (1)1436BR, (2)1WD14C, (1)0014G • I 19 FOOD STEAMERS 2 A ROUNDUP / MS-255 208 1 1586 i14 1 B EMBER''-GLO / AR30 120 1 125 1 C EMBER-GLO / AR60 • 120 .00 12.5 1 1 20 CONEY SHELF 14" x 4' CHROME WIRE(WALL) 1 A METRO / 1914485R, (2AW014C 21 COOKERS (PART OF TABLE 22) 2 AlAPW / HFW-12D UL 20 1 \ 0,8 6.1 1 22 CONEY STATION TABLE 35" x 10" 1 A WASSERSTROM / 0120-01-10 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / • i 23 SALT / BAG TABLE W/ LIGHT 30" X 44" 1 A WASSERSTROM / P120-03-40 • 120 1 21.65 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-24003 0I b& i 5-20P 19 24 4 BANK GAS FRYER SYSTEM W/FILTER 1 AlFRYMASTER / FPH450CSO �'0 • 120 90 i 80 i 25 EXHAUST HOOD (5'-99 i 1,41 STRATO VENT / BSRA r CA 10 2 26 REACH- IN REFRIGERATOR 1 A DELFIELD / VRRiSH i Is 1 vs 5.9 1 B BEVERAGE-AiR / ER24 W/ CASTERS LkVi 115 1 1/4 5.1 1 C McCALL / 4-4020 115 1 1/3 "15-15F 8.0 1 21 WARMER DRAWER i A WINSTON / H58501 i 120 1 5-15us 1.8 16.0 1 B ROUNDUP / WO-21A • i 28 SANDWICH BAG RACK, (WALL MOUNT) 1 A JERO / 52065 • 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-28018 • 1 29 REFRIGERATED SANDWICH UNiT (609 1 A DELFIELD / 446ON-12 i 115 1 1/2 12.0 1 B BEVERAGE -AIR / SP60-12 i 115 1 1/4 65 1 G McCALL / RST-59-3N i IS 1 1/2 12.0 1 30 GRILL STAND (GRILL STAND ONLY) 1 A JERO / 11591 0001 • i A CONCEPT SERVICES • i 31 BUN TOASTER 1 A APW / M-2000 10 200 1 6-20P 2.13 113.8 1 B ROUNDUP / VCT -2000 • 1 32 5' GAS GRIDDLE i A RANKIN / R010060C i 115 1 1 100 1 33 EXHAUST HOOD t5'-3") 1 JA STRATO VENT / "RA • 2 34 BUN SHELF (WALL MOUNT) 1 A JERO / 52241 • 1 AlCONCEPT SERVICES / KS-28016 • 1 35 HAND SINK 2 A EAGLE / HSA1OF WITH*306495 FAUCET4*301120 HANDLES • 1/2 1/2 1-1/2 1 A METAL MASTERS / 45A-10-FW 10 1/2 1/2 1-1/2 1 36 REACH -IN FREEZER 1 A DELFIELD / VFRiSH 10 115 1 1/3 5-15P &A 1 B BEVERAGE -AIR / EF24 W/ CASTERS i 115 1 1/2 100 1 1 C McCALL / 4-40201F i Is 1 1/2 12A 1 31 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONTROL BOX 1 JA ANSUL / R-102 • 9 38 PREP TABLE 30 x60 W/2 UNDERSHELVES 1 A WASSERSTROM / 0053- 01- 16 • A CONCEPT SERVICES / K2-01J05 i i 39 NOT USED 40 TOMATO SLICER i A LINCOLN / 0643N (SMALLWARES) • 1 41 BAG -IN -BOX SLUSH SYRUP RACK 1 A LANCER 151-1408 • 3 42 14" x 36" EPDXY COATED WIRE WALL SHELVES 4 AlMETRO / (4)1436NK2, (8)IWD14NK3 • i 43 18"x48" EPDXY COATED WIRE WALL SHELVES 2 A METRO / (2)1848NK2, (4)1WD18NK3 • 1 44 3-COMPARTMENT SiNK W/24"DRAINBOARDS 1 A WASSERSTROM / 0053-02-98 • 3 1 A METAL MASTERS / 414-IIB-3-24 i 3 1 HEAT LAMP 36" (PART OF TABLE *06) i A HATCD / GRAH-36 DUAL INFINITE CNTRL w/CORD t PLUG i 120 1 13 13.4 1 E46DUAL BAG -IN -BOX DRINK SYRUP RACK i JAI COCA -COLA / 43142 120 1/2 I/2 3 NOT=S: 1 EQUIPMENT VENDOR TO BE AS SELECTED BY OWNER U.N.O. 2 EQUIPMENT VENDOR IS J.D. HIGGINS CO. 3 EQUIPMENT VENDOR IS COCA -COLA 4 P.O.S. VENDOR TO BE AS SELECTED BY OWNER 5 EQUIPMENT VENDOR IS CO2 CONTRACTOR 6 EQUIPMENT VENDOR IS ORDERMATIC 1 EQUIPMENT VENDOR Is LOCAL BREAD VENDOR 8 EQUIPMENT VENDOR IS DARLING - CONTACT BILL BORRELLI (800) 486-0101 OR FRONTLINE INT'L - CONTACT JOHN PALAZZO (330) 665-4239 O. DESCRIPTION T 1 MAKE / MODEL NO. u ial w Wn z ELECTRICAL PLUMBING REMARKS 00 c2 Y w W GAS u 411 CHROME WIRE SHELVING (DRY STORAGE) 0 JA METRO / 24605R (4 TiER) • 1 48 WALK-IN COOLER / FREEZER 1 A ICS / t1'-9"X11'-4"XS'-6") i i B THERMOKOOL / 00865C-52 11'-9"X11'-4"X8'-69 • 1 49 COOLER COiL/FAN UNiT t REMOTE CONDENER i AlICs • 1 151 THERMOKOOL / MOH008012 3/4HP 14D 208 1 3/4 3/4 1 50 FREEZER COIL/FAN UNIT t REMOTE CONDENER 1 A ICs i 1 B THERMOKOOL / MOH0241_62 2-1/2HP • 208 1 2-1/2 3/4 1 51 DRINK CAR50NATOR TANK w/ 6" S.S. LEGS 1 A LOCAL CO2 CONTRACTOR / 200 POUND MIN. • 5 52 DUNNAGE RACKS ( DRY STORAGE ) (ALUM.) 2 A QUADRA-TECH / 24x6Ox814 i 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / 24x60 / 6016 • 1 531 EPDXY COATED WiRE SHELVING(WALK-IN) (4 TIER) 3 A METRO / 2448NK2 i 1 54 FOUNTAIN CONDIMENT HOLDER 2 A TRAEX / 4142 3-QUART (SMALLWARES) • 1 55 MOP/BROOM RACK 1 A RUBBERMAID / 1993 34" (SMALLWARES) • 1 56 TA5LE(30"x3(o")W/ 2 UNDERSHELVES 2 A WASSERSTROM / 0053-02-23 i i A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-01J01 i i 51 ONION RiNG MACHINE STAND 0 A JERO / 11124 (24"X36" - SINGLE) • i A CONCEPT SERVICES / 30"x36" • I A METAL MASTERS / 0053310200N (36"X36" - DOUBLE) • 1 58 DUNNAGE RACKS (WALK- iN) (ALUM.) 1 A QUADRA-TECH / 24x36x81-I i 1 A CONCEPT sERvICEs / 24x36 / 6014 • 1 59 5" SQUARE PVC FOR SYRUP CHASE 0 AlPVC 8'-4" IN LENGTH W/ ONE END CUT AT 45' • 60 ONION RiNG MACHINE 0 A BETTCHER / S55-1 (SINGLE BELT) • 115 1 1/4 2.4 1 B BETTCHER / S55-2 (DOUBLE BELT) i IS 1 1/4 2.4 1 611 HAND HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHER 3 A e2) 2A:10-5:C t (1) 2A:C:K NEAREST KITCHEN AREA • 9 62 PORTABLE MEAT FREEZER 1 AlWASSERSTROM / D1204SO3000 i 115 1 15 1 B BEVERAGE -AIR / UCF-2-1 • 115 1/4 6.0 1 C DELFIELD / 40'1 • 1 D McCALL / F6E • 1 63 2-DRAWER METAL FILE CABINET 2 Al"WON" OR EQUAL (WHITE) • 64 CASH DRAWER 1 A P.O.S, VENDOR i 4 65 30"x60" TABLE W / 1 UNDERSHELF 1 A WASSERSTROM / D053-01-25 i I A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-01J05 • i 66 COUNTER TOP ( 32" X 66 ") 1 A LAMINATED (WHITE) ROLLED EDGES • 61 MONITORS 1 A P.O.S. VENDOR • 4 68 SLUSH PRECHiLLER 1 A LANCER / 1500 i 115 1/3 85 3 69 COAT RACK W/HOOKS 1 A PAINTED 1x4 24" LONG W/ 10 BRASS COAT HOOKS • 10 CUP DISPENSER W / LID HOLDER 2 A ORDERMATiC / % CUP DISPENSER W/ ATTACHED LiD • 6 11 ICE CREAM CUP / CONE DISPENSER W/ LiD HOLDER 1 A ORDERMATiC / 000 DISPENSER • 6 '12 14"44" CHROME WiRE WALL SHELF 0 A METRO / (2)14248R, (4)1WD14C • 1 13 HOT FUDGE WARMER / SERVER 1 A SERVER PRODUCTS / FSP 82060 (SMALLWARES) i 1 14 VENDORS BREAD RACKS 2 A AS SPECIFIED BY LOCAL BREAD VENDOR • 1 15 SLUSH FILL STATION 1 AlLANCER / 85-0084-01 i 115 Im 3 -16 1 PRINTERS 3 A P.O.S. VENDOR • 4 11 AVERAGE TiME (SCANNER) 1 A P.O.S. VENDOR • 4 18 CLOCK OUT UNITS ( BUMPBARS) 6 A P.O.S. VENDOR • 4 19 STALL CONTROLER i A P.D.S. VENDOR • 4 80 PRE -RINSE UNIT (FOR 3-COMP SINK) 1 A T 4 S BRASS / 8-133, 8-109, 8-155LN, 63X • 3/4 3/4 I 81 MOBILE ONiON RING TRAY RACK i A WiN-HOLT / ADE 182015KOA • 1 AlNEW AGE i 6301 • I A CONCEPT SERVICES / AR-452A • 11 821 SHAKE FREEZER W/ MIX TRANSFER SYSTEM 0 A ELECTRO FREEZE / 18RMT i 208 3 2.0 20.0 1 83 PREP. SINK t A WASSERSTROM / G610-01-92 W/TtS 5230LN 060X • 1/2 1/2 3 1 84 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PULL BOX I A ANSUL I R-102 ACCESSORY (ROUGH-iN BY G.C.) i S5 CHROME WIRE SHELVING (DRY STORAGE) i A METRO / 24365R (4 TiER) • 1 g6l FILTER CADDY 1 AlDARLING / CLEANSTAR 2000 - MODEL 401 • 8 81 TABLE 30"x96" W / 2 UNDERSHELVES E DRAWER 0 JERO / 11460 i 1 JA CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-12003 i 1 88 3-COMPARTMENT SINK W/19" DRAINBOARDS 0 WASSERSTROM / D053-02-99 • 1/2 1/2 3 1 METAL MASTERS / BSC-22 • 1/2 1/2 3 1 89 1 BUN TOASTER TABLE 1 A WASSERSTROM / 0120-03-25 i 1 A CONCEPT SERVICES / KS-30016 • i 90 GREASE REMOVAL STORAGE TANK i A DARLING / CLEANSTAR 2000 - MODEL 400 i 120 8 A FRONTLINE INT'L / 3066-NA • 120 15 8 S11 HOT DOG GRILL I A ROUNDUP / HOC-50 • 120 1 15 125 i S21 CHROME WIRE SHELVING (DRY STORAGE) 2 A METRO / 244815R (4 TiER) • i c ,331 CHROME WIRE SHELVING (DRY STORAGE) 0 A METRO / 24425R (4 TIER) • i 94 CHROME WIRE SHELVING (DRY STORAGE) 2 A METRO / 183615R (4 TiER) • 1 95 EPDXY COATED WiRE SHELViNG(WALK-IN) (4 TiER) 3 AlMETRO / 2436NK2 i I 96 EPDXY COATED WIRE SHELVING(WALK-IN) (4 TiER) 1 A METRO / 1836NK2 i I 91 I EPDXY COATED WIRE SHELvING(WALK-IN) (4 TiER) 1 A METRO / 186ONK2 i 1 98 DUNNAGE RACKS (WALK- iN) (ALUM.) 1 A QUADRA-TECH / 24x48 i 1 99 WIRELESS ZONE 4 A P.O.S. VENDOR 14 100 CPU RACK SYSTEM i A P.O.S. VENDOR • 4 101 3011x30" TABLE W / 1 UNDERSHELF 0 A WASSERSTROM • i 102 POWER WASH 1 A EASIWASH / EZ5200 • 2081 1 5.0 30 1/2 1/2 10 9 FIRE SYSTEM CONTRACTOR 10 EQUIPMENT VENDOR IS EASIWASH - CONTACT GARY LAAABS (641) 843-4423 NOTE: THE PLANS ASSUME THAT EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN THE STORE WILL BE CO STENT WiTH THAT SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND THAT ;'I�UBSTITUT ONS ARE MADE, APPROPRIATE COORDINATION MUST TAKE PLACE EiTHER iN THE FIELD OR BY THE ARCHITECT (WHO MUST FIRST BE MADE AWARE OF THE CHANGES) PRiOR TO SUBMITTAL FOR PERMITS. 6 Q ul Q � Lu LLL ITO 4 Lo J ` no J >� A J1 0N_ Z ul 2 SKEET K4 DWO., 005080-K4 SONIC • IC 49 1$ I't5ril t_yj) M99 9@09 SECTION 01340 - SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Make submittals only (in follows unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, and revise and resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements. 1. Required Submittals to the Owner -'a Representative include: a. Concrete Mix Design b. Reinforcing Steel c. Structural Steel d. Electrical Equipment - disconnects, panels, fixtures. etc. a. Miscellaneous Steel f Aluminum Doom and Windows Hardware Roofing I. HVAC Equipment and ductwork 1. Hollow metal frames. doors and hardware B. Owner -'a Representative: The Owner may designate a Representative to work on his behalf throughout the construction process. The General Contractor should shall be for purposes of these specifications. verify who this representative C. No other submittals will be reviewed by the Owner's Representative unless the contractor is requesting a substitution as described In these specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of submittals: 1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each Item being submitted. 2. Verify that each Item and the submittal for It conform in all respect@ with the specified requirements. 3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submittal, certify that this coordination has been performed. B. Substitutions: 1. Proprietary nomm specified herein are used to establish and Indicate minimum required quality of materials, appearance, workmanship, and function, and are not Intended to dlscwr;inote against any unnamed manufacturers of products which most or exceed the characteristics of those products specifically named. 2. Proposed substitutions will not be considered without submittal of manufacturer's data, specifications, instructions, and samples, If requested by the Owneroo Representative. 3. Submit a typed list of proposed substitutions containing the following information: a. Name of specified product-, b. Name of proposed substitute; c. Name and address of manufacturer, local supplier, and local representative (if any). 4. Substitutions will be considered only when listed at time of bidding. and when substantiated by the Contractor's submittal of required data within 35 calendar days after award of the Contract. 5. The following products do not require further approval except for Interface within the Work: a. Products specified by reference to standard specifications much as ASTM and similar standards. b. Products specified by manufacturer's name and catalog model number. 6. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been specifically approved In writing for this Work by the Owner's Representative. C. "Or equal": 1. Where the phrase *or equal", or *or equal as approved by the Owner@ Representative". occurs In the Contract Documents, do not assume that the materials, equipment, or methods will be approved as equal unless the Item has been specifically so approved for this Work by the Owners Representative. 2. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be final. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ive for review within the first 30 calendar X Provide Submittal Log to the Owner's Reprosentati days of Contract outlining all submittals to be submitted. B. Make submittals of Shop Drawings. samples. substitution requests, and other items in accordance with the provisions of this Section to the Owner's Representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS A, Scale and measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and Its method of connection to the Work. B. Types of prints required: ot plus two 1. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of one sopla transparency of each she bluelime or blocklins prints of each shoot. 2. Blueprints only will not be acceptable. C. Review comments of the Owner's Representative will be shown on the aspic transparency when It Is returned to the Contractor. The contractor may make and distribute such copies as are required for his purpose. D. If supplied Rem matches space only a letter of confirmation is required from supplier unless drawings are required. 2.2 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, clearly show which portions of the contents to being submitted for review. B. Submit the number of copies which are required to. be returned, plus two copies which will be retained by the Owner's Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Consecutively number all submittals. 1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a now letter of transmittal and with a now transmittal number. 2. On resubmittals, cite the original submittal number for reference. a Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal showing all information required for lde�tlficctlori and checking. C. On at least the first page of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for positive Identification, show the submittal number In which the Item was included. D. Maintain an accurate submittal log at the job site for the duration of the Work, showing current status of all submittals at all times. Make the submittal log available to the Owner's Representative for his review upon request. 3.2 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS A. Unless otherwise specifled, make submittals In groups containing,mall associated items to assure that Information Is available for checking each item when it received. 1. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract. 2. The Contractor may be hold liable for delays so occasioned. 3.3 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals for enough in advance of scheduled dates for Installation to provide time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery. B. In scheduling, allow ct least ten working days for review by the Owner's Representative following his receipt of the submittal. 3.4 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S RWEW A. rRovwiew by the Owner's Representative does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for arro a. hch may exist in the submitted data, B. Revisions: 1. Make revisions required by the Owner's Representative. 2. If the Contractor considers any required revision to be a change, he shall to notify the Owners Representative. 3. Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Owner's Representative. SECTION 01410 - TESTING L480RATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: The Owner Is to provide testing and inspecting, complete, as described In this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections In Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Requirements for testing may be described In various Sections of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the services of a moll onglmeor and testing laboratory approved by the Owner"s Representative. B Laboratory shall comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E 329 and ANSI/ASTM 0 3740 and provide certifications to this effect. C. Laboratory shall maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review specific tests required by this specification. D. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate In State in which Project Is located. E. Testing equipment shall be calibrated to ensure accurate results and values In order to ensure that test results are true and valid, and at Intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.3 SELECTION AND PAYMWENT A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent testing laboratory to perform specified Inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.4 SPECIFIC TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Provide all tests and Inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, required by provisions of the Contract Documents, and such other tests and Inspections as are directed by the Owner's Representative. B Tests Include, but are not necessarily limited to, those described In detail in Part 3 of this Section. 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Society for Teeing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 29 - Test Method for Unit Weight and Voids In Aggregate. 2. ASTM C 31 - Test Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens In the Field. 3. ASTM C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C127 - Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Course Aggregate. 5. ASTIM C 128 - Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate. 6. ASTM C 136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregate. 7. ASTM C 138 - Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield. and Air Content (Grovimetric) of Concrete. S. ASTM C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 9. ASTM C 172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 10. ASTM C 231 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C 496 - Toot Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 12. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft?) (600 kN-m/m?) 13. ASTM 0 1188 - Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin -Coated Specimens. 14. ASTM D 1560 - Toot Method for Resistance to Deformation and Cohesion of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of Hveorn Apparatus. 15. ASTM D 2167 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In -Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 16. ASTM D 2172 - Test Method for Quantitative Extroctic, a Mixtures. n of Bitumen fr m Bituminous Paving 17. ASTM D 2922 - Toot Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 18. ASTM D 3017 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil end Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth), 19. ASTM D 4318 - Test Method for UquTd Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM D 3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged In Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 2. ANSIASTM E 329 - Practice for Use in the Evoluarlon of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used In Construction. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. Document D1.1, Structural Welding Codes. 2. Document D1.3, Structural Welding Codes. D. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. Document 315 (Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement). 2. Document 347 (Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork). 1.6 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide qualified personnel at site after due notice from the contractor; cooperate with Owner's Representative. Contractor, and appropriate public authorities having jurisdiction In performance of services. S. Perform specified Inspection, sampling, and testing of products In accordance with latest, up-to-date standards. C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 0. Promptly notify Owner's Representative, appropriate consultants, Contractor, Owner, and authority having jurisdiction of observed Irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. E. Perform additional Inspections and tests required by Owner's Representative, Owner, Contractor, or authority having jurisdiction. 1.7 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each Inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Owner's if Representative, one to applicable consultant, one to Owner, one to Contractor, and one to City ( required). Include: Date Issued, Project title and number, name of Inspector, data and time of sampling or inspection, weather conditions, identification of product and Specifications section, location in the Project, type of Inspection or test. date of test, results of toots, and specific Indication of conformance, or lock of such, with Contract Documents. When requested by Owners Representative/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. 1.8 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter. or enlarge an requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 0. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop Work. 1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing. together with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and ensure ready access to Work and to manufacturer's facilities, If requested by testing lob. C. Provide Incidental labor and facilities for access to work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site, or at source of products to be tested. in order to facilitate tests and Inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify laboratory of material sources and furnish lob -determined necessary quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. E. Notify Owner's Representative and laboratory 24-hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Cancel notifications In a timely manner if items or systems are not ready for Inspection as Intended. Reimburse Owner for trip charges when ations are not made In a timely fashion. F. Advise laboratory In a timely fashion to complete required Inspection and testing prior to subsequent work being performed. 0. Reimburse Owner for all subsequent re-teating of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise not In accordance with specification requirements, and for any overtime pay required as a result of any inspection requirements that may fall outside of normal jobvite weekday work schedule. Remove rejected products or Work and replace with products or Work of specified quality. H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material Is changed after the original test# or inspections hove been made. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK (SITE GENERAL) A. Make necessary soil toots (Atterbarg Limit Series ASTM 0 4318 and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor) to determine moisture content and density of existing subgrade. Perform necessary soil tests (Atterberg Ult Series and STM D 6915 Standard Proctor for each type of Imported fill) to determine the moisture content and to Inspect and test th: Placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with th pocifications for that use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 per 5,000 S.F. of site area in the area affected on each Hft prior toplacement of additional fill material. B. Imported Topsoil Toots: Testing for topsoil quality compliance shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. A. Perform one subgrade In -place density test per 7,500 S.F. of oubgrads, after subgrade preparation, In accordance with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. Perform toots within 48-hours of pavement construction. B. Pulverization toots on lime subgrade. TEX 101E. Part Ill. at some frequency as density tests. 3.3 BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Make necessary soil toots (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D698 Standard Proctor for each type of fill*) to determine the moisture content and density of existing subgrcdo and Inspect and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are In accordance with the specifications for that use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D2922 and ASTM 03017) for each 5,000 S.F. of area within the building footprint on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material. 3.4 DRILLED PIERS A. The Independent Testing Laboratory shall provide the services of their registered Gootechnical engineer at the Initiation of the on-aite pier drilling operations to determine the appropriate bearing material into which the piers are to be founded, Written documentation of the "aletermination* shall be prepared and forwarded to the Owner, Owner's ReproBentatIve, and Contractor. B. Make on -site full time inspections of pier drilling for each pier drilled and placed. C. Verify that the excavation Is of the proper size end adequately clean and dry. D. Verify that each pier Is founded at a depth In accordance with the Gootachnical report, existing on -site conditions that may be encountered, and at the proper bearing atrato. E. Verify that the reinforcing steel and concrete are properly placed In accordance with other testing provisions specified herein. F. Inspection reports of pier drilling shall contain the following: 1. Pier mark 2. Pier Depth 3. Depth of penetration into bearing stroto 4. Plumb nose deviation 5. Description of unusual conditions encountered. Including ground water. 3.5 FORMWORK, REINFORCING STEEL AND INSERTS A. Make general Inspection of formwork. B. Prior to each concrete pour, Inspect fabrication and bonding of bars, bar sizes, spacing, placement and tying in accordance with ACI 315. 3 Prior to each concrete pour, Inspect positioning of steel Inserts and assemblies, sizes, and spacing, and Insp*ct fusion -welded anchors and sheer connectorso 3.6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Design Mixes: 1 . At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mixes for review by laboratory, Including the the Owner's Representative, structural engineering consultant, and testing fi ourse aggregate ASTM C-136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C-29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM C127 and C128. mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength required. Successful post history In accordance with ACI 318 will be satisfactory. al k,,, ast one (1) test of each day's pouring of concrete or each 100 ' Me at 'a ' " h on each different portion or section of the work. Mold and C In or over a t - Ind st' I Test cubic yard' h ASTM C31, and test In accordance with ASTM C39. Test 'u, c ape .1mn, Im accordance wi.t yllndm 'hall be made and test d by the laboratory. Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each text shall consist of four (4) specimens, one (i) of which shall be broken at seven (7) days, two (2) at twenty-eight (28) days and one hold In reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders In accordance with ASTM 0231. 0. Field Quality Control: 1. Determine slump for each concrete strength test and whenever consistency of concrete varies, in accordance with ASTM C143. 2. Monitor and record addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete Is allowed to remain In truck. 3. Verify delivery tickets Indicating close of concrete, amount of water added during Initial botching, and time Initial botching occurred. 4. Monitor work being performed In accordance with ACI (American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a standard of quality. 5. Reference SECTION 03100- CONCRETE FORMWORK for additional requirements. 0. Source Quality Control: An independent testing laboratory representative shall periodically inspect and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals appropriate to monitor quality of material Issued on job. 3.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Fabrication of. erection of, and connections between, structural steel members, Including welding and tension in high strength bolts, will be accomplished under and subject to the inspection of an independent testing agency. The general contractor, structural steel fabricator, a and rector shall afford full cooperation to the laboratory. B. Perform the following testing and inspection: (Prior to placement of steel dock). 1. Check location of condition of anchor bolts. 2. Check plumbriese and tolerance of steel frame. 3. Qualification of weldons and welding techniques (at Contractor's expense). 3 Visually Inspect common bolts. 5. Inspection of high -strength bolting: a. Visually Inspect connections. b. Check tightness of at least 33% of connections. c. Check at least two bolts of each girder to column connection. 6. Visually inspect field and shop welds. 7. Ultrasonic or X-ray testing of full penetration welds. 8. Re -inspect correctly* measures required at expense of Contractor. 9. Verify that no members are damaged. 10 Verify that materials and installation are according to Contract Documents and industry stand6rds. 0. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors In the structural framing. Cutting will not be permitted on any member, unless specifically approved by the Structural Engineer, Finish goo -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas finish cutting In permitted. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. D. Corrections, The fabricator or @rector shall correct deficiencies In structural steel work which inspection and test reports have Indicated to be not In compliance with the specified requirements. -compliance of the original work and to Perform all additional tests required to reconfirm non show compliance of corrected work. Retesting of non -conforming work shall be paid by the Contractor. E. Al welders employed during erection of structural *teel must be certified by The American Welding Society for type of base materials and positions encountered. Certification testing to be performed at Contractor's expense and copies of Certifications shall be submitted for review upon request and maintained at the project site by the Contractor. 3.8 STEEL JOISTS A. All steel joints and connections to structural steel members shall be Inspected. 9. Quality Assurance: AJI welding performed during the manufacture and erection of steel joists eholl:comply with the requirements of AWS D11.1. C. nopect condition of joints after erection; chock method of attachment to structures and i accessories to verify compliance With required standards. 3.9 MEtAL DECKING A. Qualification of Welders- Qualify the welding process and all welders (at Contractor expense), and periodically monitor the work in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.3. 3 Testing Laboratory shall inspect steel docking to ensure the material and Installation is In accordance with the specifications and shop drawings. 3.10 ROOFING TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Make periodic inspections while roofing Installation is underway basing frequency on status of work being done and quality control problems being encountered. B. Verify type asphalt being used and temperature of asphalt at kettle and at point of discharge on the roof. Verify proper opreading. C. Verify that type and manufacturer of roofing felts conforms with Contract Document requirements. Verify that felts have been property stored and protected and are dry at time of Installation. D. Verify that type and manufacturer of Insulation and installation conforms with Contract document requirements. Verify proper storage of Insulation and dryness at time of Installation. E. Verify status and conditions of metal dock prior to roof Insulation Installation. F. Verify that installation of asphalt and roofing felts are according to the contract documents and roofing manufacturer's recommendations, G. Inspect roofing installation prior to flood coating and mark and report fishmouths. felt-to-falt conditions and other departure* from good roofing practices. H. Verify that size, cleanliness and moisture content of aggregate is according to specifications. 1. Verify installation of floshings, water cut-offs and other methods to protect In -place roofing from the elements has been accomplished in accordance with Contract Document requirements. J. Document the results of all Inspection and toots and distribute copies to Roofing Contractor, Roofing Manufacturer. General Contractor, Owner's Representative. and Owner. K. Immediately notify all parties of those portions of tests or Inspections which do not comply with Contract Document requirements. 3.11 OTHER WORK REQUIRING TESTS A. Refer to individual sections covered under Division 15 and 16 for other work requiring toots by Independent testing laboratory. SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL i.1 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION. TESTS: A. Before completion of the construction project, the Mechanical and Electrical Sub -Contractors shall tog all materials, equipment and systems which normally require testing. AN pi I g. etc., shall be tested to most the specification requirements. AJI equipment systems shall Coperated nuffitclently long to prove to the Owner that the equipment and systems perform satisfactorily and most the requirements set forth on the plans or theme specifications, Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 of these Specifications. B. In addition to the requirements of the above portions of these specification, all sub -contractors proposing to do work under these specifications shall comply with the following additional requirements. Mechanical Contractor shall Instruct the Owner in the proper cars, Including preventive maintenance, nd operation of the systems and equipment. Two copies of aw a ru f no bound manual shall be furnished hich shall include a resumso of the in t c io glven, complete preventive maintenance instructions, operating procedures normal operations and a simple description of the systems and their intended operating �ondltion , all spore parts list and all guarantees and warranties. Final payment will not be mode until the Owner hot received a letter from the Contractor stating that the operating personnel have been properly instructed and do, In fact. understand the Installation and further, indicating receipt of the bound manuals. WIG A. The Contractor shall keep a set of drawings on the job, noting doily all changes made in these drawings in connection with the final installation Including exact dimensioned locations of oil now and uncovered existing utility piping outside th building, and shall, with his request for final payment. turn over a clean neatly marked set of reproducible mylar or aspic drawings Indicated at "Record Drawings As Installed" to the Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTAL INFORMATION A. The Contractor shall accumulate during the job's program, the following data, In duplicate, prepared In a neat brochure or packet folder and turned over to the Owner. 1. All warranties and guarantees and manufacturer's directions on equipment and material covered by the contract. 2. Approved fixture brochures, wIring diagrams and control diagrams. 3. Any and all other data and/or drawings required during construction, 4. Repair parts lists of all major 'items end equipment including name, address and telephone number of local supplier or agent. 5. Volvo tog charts and diagrams, B. All of the above date shall be submitted to the Owner for approval at such time as the Contractor asks for his next to lost application for payment prior to his final application for payment. but in no case, lose than two weeks before final Inspection. 1.4 FINAL INSPECTION of the Contractor to personally make a careful Inspection trip of the calling upon the Owner to make a final Inspection. entire project. assuring himself that the work on the project to ready for final acceptance, before B. In order not to delay final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall have all necessary bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, and certificate of occupancy, ate., called for In the various articles of theme specification, prepared and signed in advance, together with a letter of transmittal, listing each paper included. and shall deliver the some to the Owner at or before the time of said Final Inspection. The Contractor Is cautioned to check over each bond, receipt, etc., before preparing earns for submission to as* that the terms most the requirements of these specifications. PART 2 - OCCUPANCY A. Contractor shall provide access for Owner. B. Prior to occupancy, execute Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon occupancy of now building, Owner will provide: 1. Custodial services. 2. Security 3. Maintenance 4. Utilities 5. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems. SECTION 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: To old the continued instruction of operating and maintenance personnal, and i source of information regarding the products incorporated into the Work, furnish and deliver the data described in this Section and In pertinent other Sections of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed Manual or Manuals to the Owner's Representative for review and comments. This submittal shall be mode prior to project being 517% complete. C, Unless otherwise directed in other Sections, or in writing by the Owner's Representative, submit three copies of the final Manual to the Owner's Representative prior to Indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. D. The following subcontractors are to provide Manuals explaining the respective bullding systems to the Store Manager. 1. Electrical Contractor - electrical panels, breakers, time clocks arid photo cells. 2. Mechanical Contractor - HVAC operation, thermostat setting and functions, filter location and size and warranties. 3. Landscape Contractor - irrigation controls, maintenance and warranty. 2.1 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Where Instruction Manuals ara required to be submitted under other Sections of these Specifications, prepare in accordance with the provisions of this Section. B. Format, 1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" 2. Paper White bond, at least 20 lb weight 3. Text: Neatly . written or printed 4. Drawings: I I In height forable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings mT acceptable but fold to fit withFn th drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind In with text. 5. Flyllheetq: Separate each portion of the Manual with neatly prepared flyshoets briefly describing contents of the ensulmg portion; flyshosts may be In color. 6. Binding- Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers wtth bindimg mechanism concealed Inside the Manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding to subject to the Owner's Representative's approval. 7. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet -and -inches, lbs, and ofm; where Items may be expected to be measured within ton years In accordance with metric formula, provide additional measurements In the *International System of Units" (SI). C. Provide front and bock covers for each Manual, using durable material approved by the Owner's Representative, and clearly Identified an or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS general subject of this Manual space for approval signature of Owner's Representative and approval date D. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the Manual of all emergency Information regarding the tnetallation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved Including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. S. All guarantees and warranties Issued and fully executed by respective companies. 6. Manufacturers' bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating the precise Items Included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly Indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. required In pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 8. At contact persons, company they represent, address, and phone number to be Included in respective manuals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Preliminary: 1. Prepare a preliminary draft of each proposed Manuel. 2. Show general arrangement, nature of contents In each portion, probable mumber of drawings and their size, and proposed method of binding and covering. 3. Secure the Owners Representative approval prior to proceeding. B. Final- Complete the Manuals in strict accordance with the approved preliminary drafts and the Owner's Representative's review comments. C Revi Ions: F.11,wing the indoctrination end instruction of operation and maintenance personnel, review all proposed revisions of the Manual with the Owner's Representative. 2. If the Contractor is required by the Owner's Representative to revtoo previously approved Manuals, compensation will be made as provided for under 'Changes' In the General Conditionli, D. Instruction: 1. All subcontractors submitting manuals should schedule an appointment with the Store Manager to review such Manuals and instruct the Manager on the a eration and maintenance of equipment involved. This should be conducted by an employee of t �e subcontractor who Is completely familiar with the subject equipment within 30 days of turning over the store to the Owners Representative. SECTION 02210 - SITE WORK 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide site work where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and Go needed for a complete and proper Installation. B. The site work outlined below is general in nature. Full engineering drawings should be provided and reviewed for specific requirements. All Installation and re!oted work should comply with all local and national codes and standards of practice. 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide all necessary products to complete the requirements of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE WORK A. Site Preparation: Establish extent of excavation and fill by area and elevation; Set required lines and levels. Remove all gross, waWe, roots, and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled or graded. Layout and grade staking shall provide for positive drainage away from building, and avoid creation of poriding arm. B. Grading: Cut or fill and machine grade site as shown on the drawings, to draln as Indicated, allowing for the thickness of paving sub -bass and paving. Place in horizontal lifts not In excess of 8" thick after compaction by rolling and/or tamping to 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content. C. Backfilling: Ensure excavated area is free of water, ice. snow or debris, and ground Is not frozen. Back fill and fill material may consist of on -site or off -alto tnorganic soils, which are free of debris. waste. frozen materials, vegetation matter, or make larger than 20 In any direction. Fill to be placed systematically and in 8" Ift, compacted to 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content. Remove surplus fill from site. 3.2 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Soils Report- The Owner shall provide a soils test report for review by the Sonic A&E department for foundation design or acceptance as detailed on the drawings. B. Spread footings shall bear on undisturbed soil, Drilled piers, when used, shall extend a minimum of l'-6' Into bearing material. Ref. Structural for soil under grade beams. 3.3 TRENCHING. BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING A. Follow appropriate and required bracing and shoring of all trenching operations. B. Cut and excavate for underground services from building to utilities as indicated on the drawings. C. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation. D. Out trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of services and to allow for Inspection. Excavate. share and braces as required to prevent cove-Ing and in accordance with OSHA requirements. E. Keep trenches dry. Provide necessary equipment Including pumps, piping, and temporary drains. F Place and compact granular beds and fills over services to within two feet of subgrade a-le6ations. hit remainder of trenches with a low P.I. select fill, compacted to 90X standard Proctor density. SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide soil poisoning to control subterranean termites as specified herein and needed for a complate and proper treatment. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of Its acceptance, deliver to the Owner two copies of a Warranty signed by an authorized representative of the Installing subcontractor, and co -signed by the Contractor, agreeing: 1. To make an Inspection of the Work once each year for a total period of five yeam following Date of Substantial Completion for the purpose of deiecting termite Infestation; 2. If termite Infestation Is found during that five year period, to retract in accordance with prevailing practices of the trade and within ton calendar days after such Infestation is discovered; 3. To repair damage to the Work caused by subterranean termites during that five year period; 4. To make such inspections, retrootment, and repairs at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS governmental agencies haying )uriedictlon, use working solutions of the following chemicals at the listed minimum concentration: 1. Chlorpyrifos (Dureban) 2. Parmothrin (Torpedo & Dragnet) 3. Cypermothrin (Demon) 4. laofendnoo (Pryfon 8 or Oftonol 6) B. Use only an emulsible concentrate insecticide for dilution In water. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. Only use solutions which are not Injurious to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Correct conditions detrimental to timely end proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until 3.2 APPLICATION A. Begin soil poisoning only after all preparation for slab placement is complete. a Slabs on do: 1. Apply toxymrant as an overall treatment at the minimum rate of one gallon of toxicant to a r slabs on grade within building lines. C. Utility entrances: 1. Apply toxicant at the rote of two gallons of toxicant per five lin. ft. at critical locations such an where utilities pass through exterior walls end through floor slabs. 2. Extend treatment not lose than 48" from wall into trench. D. Walls: 1. Apply toxicant at the rat* of two gallons of toxicant per five linear ft along both aides of all foundations walls, cross walls, end grade beams, after all nearby excavation hoe been completed. 2. Apply toxicant at the rate of one gallon of toxicant per five linear ft to voids In masonry walls E. Wecollonsous: Apply toxicant at the rate of two gallons of toxicant per five linear ft at the following areas: 1. Immediately below expansion joints, control joints, and all areas where slab will be penetrated by construction features. 2. Where ext*rIor facings or Yonsere extend below grade level along the exterior side of all foundation walls. 3. Where unit masonry foundation construction is used. F. If soil is disturbed after treatment, retreat disturbed areas. SECTION 02466 - DRILLED PIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Dry -installed drilled piers. 2. Temporary-cosed drilled piers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section 'Cast -in -Place Concrete* for general structural and building applications of concrete. 1.3 QUAILITY ASSURANCE A. Drilled-PTer Standard: Comply with provisions In ACI 336.1. 'Reference Specifications for the Construction of Drilled Plem." unless modified in this Section. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with Ownses testing and Inspecting agency to provide data for required reports. C. Testing Agency Qualifications, Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain In place, provide protection from damage during drilled -pier operations. 1. Should uncharted or Incorrectly charted plping or other utilities be encountered during excavation. adopt drilling procedure If necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility compamles In keeping services and facilities In operation without Interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. B. Site Information: A gootochnicall report should be prepared for this Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A $2, as drawn. C. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain. Cut bare true to are and free of burro. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, or 11 1. Fly Ash Admixture: ASTM C 618, Close C or F. 2. Ground Granulated Blost-Fumace Slog: ASTIM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Welght Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, linch (25mm) maximum aggregate size, C. Water. Potable. complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements. D. Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride Ions by mass of comentitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 3. High -Range, Water-Roducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type 11. 2.3 CONCRETE MIX A. Prepare design mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data boom. 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for laboratory trial mix basis. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal -weight concrete with the properties listed in Section 03300, C. Comentitious Materials: Umlt percentage, by weight, of comentitloua materials other than Portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as If concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals. D. Concrete-mIx design adjustments may be considered if charecterieVice of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Resubmit and obtain approval of concrete -mix proportions. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket Information. 1. Do not add water to concrete mix after mixing. 2. Maintain concrete temperature to not exceed 90 dog F (32 dog C), PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures. utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement. lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled -pier operations. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation-, Excavation is unclassified and Includes excavation to bearing elevations regardless of character of materials or obstructions encountered. 1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation includes removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. 2. Obstructions: Removol of unanticipated boulders. concrete, masonry, or other unforeseen obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with Boll or rock teeth, drilling bucket@, or underreaming tools attached to drilllmg equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work, will be paid according to Contract provisions for changes In the Work. B. Prevent surface water from entering excovated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities, C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to Indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation. 1. Excavate bottom of drllled piers to level plans within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting. D, Notify and allow GootechnIcal testing end Inspecting agency to test and Inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum Is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Geotechnical Engineer. E tons require, of uiflcTem Install watertight steel casings when local eight local lonforary Casings: a length and thickness to prevent water seepage Into stridift- to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses, and to maintain stability of shaft walls. 1. Remove temporary casings, maintained In plumb position, during concrete placement and before Initial set of concrete or temporary casings may be left in place. F. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances. 1. If location or out -of -plumb tolerances are exceeded. provide corrective construction. Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding. G, Inspection: Each drilled pier must be Inspected and totted by Gootechnical testing and inspecting agency before placing concrete. 1. Provide and maintain facilities with equipment required for testing and inspecting excavations. Cooperate with testing and inspecting personnel to expedite the Work. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with recommendations In CRSI's Nanual of Standard Practice' for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. It.8 fo C, Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts In a single un D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates. and other accessories furnished In work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrate placement. F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical d n to weather. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete In continuous operation and without segregation Immediately after Inspection and approval of shaft by Owner's Independent testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Construct a construction joint If concrete placement is delayed more than one hour. Level top surface of concrete. Before placing remainder of concrete, clean surface laltance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or with sand -cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1. B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement. 1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without strikiing reinforcing, place concrete with chutes. tromies, or pumps. 2. Vibrate top 60 Inches (1500 mm) of concrete. D. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings, as required. with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60-Inch (1500-mm) head of concrete above bottom of casing. 1. Vibrate top 60 inches (1500 mm) of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing. E. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on n subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral -containing antifreeze agents or chemical accolorctors. F. When hot-woother conditions exist that would seriously Impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of conersto at no greater then 90 dog F (32 dog C). 1. Place concrete Immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means for a minimum of seven days. 3.5 FIELD QUAUTY CONTROL A. Testing Agency, Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and Inspecting agency to sample materials, perform toots, and submit reports during excavation and concrete placement for drilled piers. B. A drIlled-plar report will be prepared by Gootachnical testing and Inspecting agency for each drilled pier as follows: 1. Actual top and bottom elevations. 2. Top of rock elevation, If encountered. 3. Description of soil materials. 4 Domerl tIon, Iodation. and dimensions of obstructions. ,P 5: Final top conterlino location and deviations from requirements. S. Shaft excavating method. 7. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout. 8. Ground -water conditions and water -infiltration rate, depth, and pumping, 9. Description, diameter, and top and bottom slavattons of temporary or permanent casings 10. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, lose of ground, and means of control. 11, Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 12. Inspection report. 13. Position of rainfo 1. rat t 6 14: Concrete placing meltode Including elevation of consolidation and delays. 1 5 R conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements. 16. Conersto testing results. C. Concrete: Sampling and testing of concrete for quality control may include the following- 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. a. Slump: AS TM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each comproselve-strength test, but no fewer than one test for each concrete load. b. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature Is 40 dog F (4.4 dog C) end below and when aO dog F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each gat of compressive -strength specimens. c. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of six standard cylinders for co each mpressive-strength test, unless otherwise Indicated. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens, unless field -cured test specimens are required. d. Compressive -Strength Toeta: ASTM C 39; one set for each drilled pier, but not more than ome set for each truck load. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days, two specimens will be tested at 28 days, and two epecimame will be retained In reserve for later testing If required. 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing will be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. When strength of field -cured cylinders Is lose than 85 percent of companion laboratory -cured cylinders. evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-ploce concrete. 4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of 3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no Individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 pal (3.45 MPG). 5. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, Owner, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tsets will contain Project Identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and Inspecting agency, concrete type and close, location of concrete batch In drilled pier, design compre a strong h 28 days, concrete -mix proportions and materlas, compressive me ng stremgth, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. S. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscape. or other nondestructive device may be ot be used as sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 7. Additional Tests: Testing and Inspecting agency will make additional tests of concrete when test results Indicate concrete strengths or other requirements have not been met. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. Remove surplus excavated material and slurry and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. SECTION 02520 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide concrete paving where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein. and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 CONCRETE AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide concrete cis specified In Section 03300 - Structural Concrete. A. Concrete reinforcement and accessories, Including chairs, bar supports. ate. shall be an specified In Section 03200 - Reinforcing Steel. B. Transparent Concrete Sealer. Provide one of the following: 1. Num-N-Seal". by Sonneborn (800) 433-9517, it. 'Servi-Seal*, by Artex, (800) 447-0224. lit. CS 309-1315, by W.R. Meadows, Inc. (800) 342-5976. C. Joint Sealer. Provide one of the following: 1. 'Sonolostic'. by Sonneborn Building Supplies, (800) 433-9517 It. "Flax Caulk% by Polytits Manufacturing, (800) 776-0930. lit, *Deck-O-Sedil", by W.R. Meadows, Inc. (800) 342-51976. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Concrete paving end curbs shall be as Indicated on the drawings. Form work to be matched, tight -fitting and adequately stiffened and braced to support weight of concrete without deflection. B. Joint fillers shall be %' thick asphaltic Impregnated fiberboard, and sealant shall be pourable, self -leveling polyurethane joint sealant equal to Sonolostic SR-1, C. Place concrete, screed. and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of open texturing and exposed aggregate. Provide exposed exterior surfaces with a light broom finish. D. Apply approved curing compound on finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply in E. Control and construction joints In concrete shall be as Indicated on the plame or as directed. i ufacturer's recommendations. Control joints shall be cost or tooled to a minimum depth of 1-1/2* x %* wide. Construction joints shall be as detailed and located not more than 50 feet on center. F. Saw cut control joints, if used, shall be made as soon as concrete has hardened to ufficlently permit sawing with excessive raveling of edges, Ali joints should be completed before ricantrolled shrinkage cracking occurs. Locate joints not more than 15 feet art center. G. Tooled control joints on sidewalks and patios shall be a minimum of 14" wide, %" deep, and not more than 6 feet on center. H. Prohibit any vehicle traffic from using pavement for a minimum of seven (7) days after placement. 1. Concrete at all walks, patios, and drive-in stalle shall be secled with a transparent secling compound to protect against stains and Insure ease of cleaning. J. Sealant to be applied moor and of project, near turnover date. K, Surface shall be pressure washed or steam cleaned and allowed to dry prior to application of soclant. L Allow 24 hours of drying time after application of sealer before allowing vehicle and heavy foot traffic on treated areas. M. Contractor to follow manufacturer's recommendations for application. NG AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1, 1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide pavement marking and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation, 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Pavement Marking Point: Provide an alkyd -bass traffic point equal to one of the following, 1. "Promor Traffic Marking Point". Sherwin-Williams, (216) 566-2000. 2, 'rraffic and Zone Marking Point". Pittsburgh Points, (888) 774-7732. 3. *Traffic Zone Point', Glidden, (216) 344-8222. B. Precast Concrete Parking Bumpers: If needed, shall be 8" wide by 6" high, 72" long, semi -circular In cross section, or other approved configuration. Provide with two prodrilled holes for doweling Into pavement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fire Lane: Unless otherwise required by local codes, provide 6" Wide, *red" sti words "FIRE LANE" and *NO PARKING", spaced at Intervals of 25 feet in 4' high loi B. Parking Stall Marking: Shall be 40 wide, "yellow* stripes as indicated on the d C. Precast Bumpers: Install parking bumpers as indicated on the drawings, using dowels grouted 4" Into pavement and countersinking dowels %" to ?* below top of bumper. D. Directional Arrows: Directional arrows shall be as detailed In "yellow' point. SECTION 02830 - FENCES AND GATES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide trash enclosure fence and gate system where shown o as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. 2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL POSTS A. Provide galvanized steel posts (size as shown on drawings) set In concrete foc and placed on the drawings, B. Galvanizing: On steel posts and appurtenances. provide galvanized finish with the following weight of zinc per sq. ft. 1. Pipe: 1.8 oz. complying with ASTM A120. C. Hardware and accessories: Comply with Table I of ASTM A153. D. Post Top Cape: Provide steel, wrought tron, or malleable lron. designed as we closure cap. Provide one cap for each post. E. Concrete: Comply with provisions of Section 03300. 2.2 WOOD FENCING A. Provide 1x6 Clear, R.S.. Cedar Planks, 8 ft. In length as shown on the drawinc B. Ratio: Provide 2x4 treated, horizontal wood rolls at a maximum of 4'-0* on �, C. Attach rolls to steel posts With galvanized through bolts. Provide 14"W bolts washers (unless noted otherwise). D. Attach wood planks to rolls with 1-1/2' galvanized, twist or ring shank nails. nails through plank at each rail. 2.3 GATE FRAME A. Provide steel angle gate frame and posts, with custom hinges ond cone bolts the drawings, Point steel framing to match canopy color. B. Attach wood fence planks to steel angles with galvanized $tool carriage bolts, each horizontal steel angle. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install posts true and plumb. B. Attach wood rolls to fence posts with through bolts, one per rail at each post C. Attach wood fence planking to each horizontal wood roll with nails as specified of plank 3" clear of concrete paving or curbs. D. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Ad for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary, E. Apply clear wood preservative to all sides of wood planks and roils after Instal SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A, Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplem Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies coat -In place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Piers. 3. Slabs -on -grade. B. Related Sections Include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Special Inspections' for Inspections required per the Buildi 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and w 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Comentitioue Materials: Portland cement alone or In combination with one or following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolons, ground granulated slog, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements, 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production fo equipment. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An Independent agency, acceptable to outhorith jurisdiction, the Owner, the Architect and the Structural Engineer qualified accordir 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing Indicated, as documented according to ASTM E .1 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testir Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certifled Concrete Strength Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Tochnlcion - Grade 1. Testing Agency an ACI-cortified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade C. Source Urnitatlons: Obtain each type or close of comentitious materlal of the from the some manufacturer's plant. obtain aggregate from one source, and obtai through one source from a single manufacturer. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements In Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concreto,w Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materic E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified Independent testing agency to pe evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent damage. 2 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below Introduce lists, the following rediulmr product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that m incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the prodt 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactui specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited to, n manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). deformed. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-stea[ bc true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, suppoi fastening reinforcing bare In place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plot concrete according to CRSI's *Manual of Standard Practice.* of greater compressive concrete and as follows: 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Camentitious Material: Use the following comentItious materials, of the some I source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. Cement may be supplemented with 10% of the following: a. Fly Ash: ASrM C 618, Close F. b. Ground Granulated Blost-Furnace Slog: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-WeIght Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Close 3S coarse aggregate or better Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of years' satisfactory service In similar applications and service conditions using similc and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: a. 1-1/2 Inches (38 mm) at the foundation b. I inch (25 mm) at slab on grade and concrete frame. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cemf C. Water ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be com other admixtures and that will nat contribute water-soluble chloride Ions exceeding In hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admi*xtures containing calCIL 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM 0 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M. Type B. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M. Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture, ASTM C 494/C 494M. S. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type 11. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder for on grade slabs: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include recommended adhesive or pressure-senottive tape. 1. Available Products: a. W.R. Meadows. Vapor -Mat 6. c. Stage Industries, LLC; Stage Wrap, 6 mile. b. Fortifiber Corporotion; Molatop Ultra A. B. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed grovie manufactured or natural send; ASTM D 448, Size 10, With 100 percent passing a (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at le passing No. 200 (0,075-mm) stove; complying with deleterious substance limits of fine aggregates. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder Waterborne, monomolocular film forming, manufactured l to fresh concrete, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not Interfere with floor covering. 1. Available Products: a. ChomMosters; Spray -Film. b. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co,. Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; A a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.. E-Con. d. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SIkcFIIm. B. Absorptive Cover AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from juts or kt approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (30 C. Moisture -Retaining Cover Z9 C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polp D. Water Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1 dissipating. 1. Available Products: 0. ChomMosters; Safe -Cure Clear. b. Conspeo Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; �A c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R, d. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. F. Clear. Waterbome, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I nonallselpating , certified by curing compound manufacturer to not Interfere with bo covering. 1. Available Products: a. ChernMasters; Safe -Cure & Seal 20. b. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; C We. a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB. d. Unitex; Hydra Seal. [pping with the ters. 'awIngs. 5/8" steel surface of i the Drawings, tings as shown ict less than nthertight o. inter. with nuts and Provide two Z 0 as shown on > per plank at ou Z connection. U) , Hold bottom WW ust hardware ation. U9 entary , concrete . . . . . . . . 0 Z g Code. 3lks. more of the bloot-furmcce concrete ilittes and e having g to ASTM C 48. g Technician, Testing aboratory 11. some brand admixtures the Contract Is.,, rform material bonding and ients apply to ay be eta specified. ers offering Z anufactu rare 0 w- rp - one of the oz F, 0 I= C4 C4 ou re, cut bars 0,,, ting, and tic, or precast W 9 strength than Z 0 A Vpe, brand, and net more than , graded. a LU WN Ig F- L.- at least 10 r aggregates 40 Z t, Z 0 nt. Z 8 3atible with those permitted M chloride. Type G. C== nanufacturees l, and /8-Inch C== LL ast 5 percent ASTM C 33 for _J to 0 (L d) (3 or application bonding of ;uafllm. C== 7 11L (0 nof. weighing �_A_ ithylons shoot. Z Close B. 0 .B. Resin Cure. SHEET Class B. idIng of floor iro and Seal SPI DWO: 005080-SP1 9@09 9@9\ffig 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. loolation-Joint- Filler Strips: ASTM 0 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self -expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type 11, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butodlene. C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881. two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid cu�ng and bonding to damp surfaces, of close suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I or 11, for non -load bearing and Types IV and V. for load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underloyment: Cement -based, polymer-modlfled, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 Inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations, 1. Cement Binder. ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined In ASTM C 21 S. 2. Primer. Product of underloyment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions. and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse Bond as recommended by underloyment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 1109/C 109M. B. Repair Overloyment: Cement -based, pofymer-modified, self -leveling product that can be applied In thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that con be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer. Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse send as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 Mpa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test date, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified Independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial rimixtures. B. Comentitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight of camentitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 10 percent. 2 Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolon: 10 percent. 3: Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slog; 10 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slog: 10 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolon not exceeding 10 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written Instructions. 1. Use water -reducing and/or high -range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a wcter-cementitious materials ratio below 0.45. D. Color Pigment: (arch verify if Pigment is required.) Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Piers: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPc) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Comentitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit, before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus or minus 1 incht a. 6 Inches (150 mm) for dry hole methods. b. 8 inched (200 mm) for temporary -casing drilling methods, 4. Do not air entrain concrete for drilled piers. 5. Aggregate: Normal weight: ASTM D44a; a. Coarse Aggregate : Size No. 57 (11" to No. 4). a. Footings,, Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength; 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio 0.45 3. Slump Limit: 5 Inches (125 mm) before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size, 5. Aggregate: Normal weight: ASTM D448; a. Coarse Aggregate : Size No. 57 (1. to No. 4). C. Slobs-on-Grods: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPc) at 28 days, 2. Maximum Water-Comentitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 3. Slump Limit: 5 Inches (125 mm) plus or minus I Inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent, 5 Aggregate: Normal weight. ASTM D448; a. Coarse Aggregate : Size No. 57 (11" to No. 4). 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure. batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 dog F (30 and 32 dog C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature Is above 90 dog F (32 dog C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cost -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates. diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with Items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, anchor bolts, seismic holdowne; accurately located. to elevation$ required and complying with tolerances In Section 7.5 of AISC'a "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1W and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lop joints 6 inches. Install the mamufacturer's recommended two-sided pressure -sensitive tape 4* from edge of the bottom sheet. Apply a single sided, 4' wide tape over the top. Use the same double tape method to repair tears and for sealed penetratloms. At pipe penetrations, Install vapor barrier material boots which overlap the vapor barrier 6" minimum. At the top of the boot install two-sided tops to the pipe and secure the boot with a hose clamp centered on the two-sided tape. S. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to manufacturer's written Instructions. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manuel of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, end other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support. and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.4 JOINTS A. Gonerali Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete ore not Impaired, at locations Indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of alab on grade. 2. Form keyed joints as required for construction joints. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) Into concrete. 3. Space vertical joints in footings as required. Locate joints beside plere, near corners, and In concealed locations where possible. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete Is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slobs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plans contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas less than 500 eq. ft. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness. 1. Grooved Joints-, Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover too] marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tsar, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction crocks. D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bare and support assemblies at joints where Indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that Installation of formwork, reinforcement. and embedded Items Is complete and that required inspections have boon performed. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. C. Deposit concrete continuously In one layer or In horizontal layers of such thickness that no now concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If 0 Match cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete In horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and In a manner to ovoid Inclined construction joints. 2 Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3: Do not use vibrators to transport concrete Inside forms, Insert and withdrew vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 Inches �150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not Insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have 'gun to lose plasticity, At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate, D ion, Within limits of 0 Za= and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operof joints, until placement of a section to complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded Items and Into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chains during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required, 5. Begin Initial floating using bull floats or derbies to form a uniform and open -textured :urface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab urfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 dog F (4.4 dog C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt. or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved In mixture designs. G. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 dog F (32 dog C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped Ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of Ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid mitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcomerit, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrode uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.6 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302,1R recommendations for screeding, restraightentng, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 8. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -floated or clarbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 Inch (6 mm) in I direction. I . Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded comentitious floor finishes. 0. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area Is small or inaccessible to power driven floats, Restralghten, cut down high spots, and fill low spot$. Repeat floot posses and restraightening until surface Is left with a uniform. smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. 0. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling posses and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph throu h applied coatings or floor coverimigs. 1. Apply a trowel w1rish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between. concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding. 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile Is to be Installed by either thickset or thin -set method. While concrete Is still plastic, slightly scarify surface With a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. Delete paragraph and subparagraph below If not applicable. Broom finish is generally used on exterior concrete steps and platforms, romps, and other surfaces subject to light foot traffic. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and romps. and elsewhere an indicated. 1, Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route, Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application, 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill In holes and openings left In concrete structures. unless otherwise Indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with In -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work, B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to Interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete Is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with Corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.a CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. Ic B. Evaporation Rota rder. Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry. or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq, ft. x h (11 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturees written Instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing Immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. 0. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1. by one or a combination of the following methods, 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materlicle: a, Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-Inch (300-mm) lop over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed In Widest practicable width, with sides and ends lopped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not lose than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-rotoining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverin b. clature cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies Will not Interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly In continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written Instructions. Recoot areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after Initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by marthod recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Scaling Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs Indicated In a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoot areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after Initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat, Maintain continuity of cocting and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: The Contractor will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and Inspecting agency to perform field tests, Inspections, and Special Inspections and prepare test reports. a' Special Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, Including conveying end depositing. 5 Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6: Concrete strength, slump, end temperature. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. im) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch If fewer then five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Ar Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normol-weight concrete; one test for each composite sompie, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 dog F (4.4 dog C) and below and when 80 dog F (27 dog C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cost and laboratory cure two sets of six standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strongth Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days, Retaing the remaining two sets for testing at 56 days if required a. A compressive -strength test shall be the overage compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from some composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-etrangth test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 We). 8. Test results shall be reported In writing to Owner, Architect, Engineer, concrete manufacturer. and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, memo of concrete testing and Inspecting agency, location of concrete batch In Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results Indicate that slump, air entrolinment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cared cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11, Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and Inspections indicate dog not comply with the Contract Documents. SECTION 04001 - MASONRY WORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all masonry, grout, mortar, related reinforcing, and installation as shown on the drawings and described here -In. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK A. Acceptable manufacturers / Product: 1. Acme Brick Co., (817) 332-4101, Color: Acme Blend #Iift *Marble Gray". 2. The Denver Brick Co., (303) 688-6952. Color: *Prairie Grey*, 3. Bolden Brick Co., (330) 456-0031, Color: "8530 A" B. Face Brick. Provide brick as follows: 1. Type: Meet ASTM standards, Grade MW above grade, Grade SW when brick is In contact with earth. 2. Size: King Size (9-5/8" x 2-3/4" x 3-5/81 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Featherlite Corporation, (512) 255-2573. 2. Equal manufacturers when approved In advance. B. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Provide as follows, 1. Split-fcce veneer and smooth face sill concrete masonry units (emu), non -load bearing veneer blocks, 4* nominal thickness, with 8*06" face dimensions, to comply with ASTM 0-90, Grade N, Type 1. fabricated using ASTM C-331 lightweight aggregate. 2. Color "Natural Gray" 3. Units shall hove a minimum compressive strength (W) of 2000 psi at 28 days. Testing procedure shall conform to ASTM E447. 4. Masonry and mortar shall have an integral waterproofing agent as determined by the manufacturer. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C150. Type I or 11, low alkali. "Masonry" cement will not be acceptable. B. Aggregate: 1. Sand for Mortar; Comply with ASTM 0144. 2. Aggregate for Grout: Comply with ASTM C404. C. unne: 1. Quick Ume: Comply with ASTM C5. 2. Hydrated Ume: Comply With ASTM C207, Type "S.B." D, Coloring Pigment: Provide pure ground mineral oxides, non -fading end alkali proof. E. Water. Provide potable water free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis. oil, amid organic matter. F. Reinforcement: 1. Bars: Comply with ASTM A615, grade 40, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Sending: Compl with ACI 318. 3. Do not use relm7orcement having any of the following defects: a Bar lengths, depths, or bonds exceeding the specified tolerances. : b Bonds or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for the Work; a, Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes. 4. Masonry Ties., Adjustable loop type, at wall studs-, galvanized steel construction of 3/16" wire, ASTM A-82. (Corrugated formed sheet style metal ties are expressly prohibited). Install at each wall stud and 16"o.c. vertically (6 courses at brick), max. wall area per anchor 2.67 sq. ft Provide one of the following: a, DA 803. by Dur-o-wall, (630) 851-8400. b, No. 316 & 315D, by Heckmann Building Products, (800) 6211-4140� c, No. 1100-2803-2102. by Masonry Reinforcing of Americo, (800) 849-6722. G. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene Material - Provide with comer and too accessories cement fused joints. H. Joint Filler. Closed cell polyurethans; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; width 14 Inch lose than masonry thickness by maximum lengths. 1. Flashing: At wall bottoms and shelf angles. Provide one of the following: 1. Fiberwob 200, Dur-o-woll, (630) 851-8400. 2. No. 80, by Heckmann Building Products, (800) 621-4140. 3. No. 4100, by Masonry Reinforcing of America. (SM) $49-6722. J. Weeps: Preformed clear plastic tubes. 3/8" O.D. x 3-1/2", hallow; 20*o.c. at wall bottoms (113"o.c. at emu) and shelf angles, Provide one of the following: 1. DA-1005. by Dur-O-Wall. (630) 851-8400. 2. No. 330, by Heckmann Building Products, (800) 621-4140. 3. No. 3600, by Masonry Reinforcing of America, (800) 849-6722. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar: 1. Unless otherwise directed or by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, provide type V mortar consisting of: a. On part Portland Cement; to b. On:-holf part Ume; to a. Six parts send measured damp and loose. 2. Measure the Ingredients accurately. 3. Mix In a mechanically operate mortar mixer for at least three minutes after all ingredients are In the drum. and at least long enough to make a thorough, complete intimate mix of the materials, 4. Re -temper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity. a. On mortar boards, re-tomper only by cddtng water within the basin formed with mortar, and by working the mortar into the water, b. Discard and do not use mortar which Is unused after 1 % hours following the initial mixing. B. Grout: 1. Where compressive strengths exceeding 2000 psi are called for on the Drawings or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, provide a laboratory designed mix to the approval. C Admixtures: �. Use only such admixture as are specifically approved in advance and by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are correarted. B. Foundations: 1. Do not commence Installation until foundations are clean, rough, and level. 2. Sandblast the foundation topes, if necessary, and remove all laltance and foreign material. 3. Verify that the foundation elevation Is such that the bad joint thickness will be between X" and ?', and that the foundation edge is true to line with masonry not projecting over more than W. 4. Clean projecting dowels free from loose scale, dirt, concrete, and other material that will Inhibit bond. 5. Verify that dowels are in proper location. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wetting of masonry units: 1. When being laid, provide brick auction sufficient to hold the mortar and to absorb water from the mortar and grout, 2. Provide masonry units sufficiently damp so that mortar will remain plastic enough to permit the masonry unit to be leveled and plumbed Immediately after being laid without destroying the bond. a Layling: micas otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make the masonry work plumb, level, and true to line with square angles and corner. 2. �se line blocks whenever possible. When it to absolutely necessary to use a line pin, fill the hole Immediately after the pin is withdrawn. 3. Use only masonry units that are clean and free from dust and other foreign matter. 4. Lay in running bond unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 5. Do not use bonding headers on grouted masonry unless specifically so directed. a Bed joints: �. Bevel all bad joints, sloping toward the cantor of the wall in such a manner that the bed joints will be filled when the masonry units are finally brought to line. b. Do not furrow the bad joints. c, Avoid fine of bed joints protruding Into grout space. �1) If they occur, leave in place 'if not projecting more than the bed joint thickness. 2) Do not, in any case, cut off and drop Into the grout space. 7 Head joints: Regardless of thickness, completely fill with mortar or grout. 8: Where masonry units are moved or shifted, remove and lay again in fresh mortar. 9 Except at the finishing course, stop grout. Ilb . At the finishing course, bring the lost grout pour flush with the top of the masonry unit. 11. Grouting: a. Whenever possible, grout from the Inside face of the masonry. b. Take extreme care to prevent grout or mortar staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or unpainted. c� Protect sills, lodges, offsets. door jambs, comers, and similar points from damage and from collecting mortar or grout. 12. Immediately remove mortar and grout from areas whore they are not scheduled to be pieced. 13. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate Into cavity air space or to plug weep holes. 3A JOINERY A. General: 1. Cut out and repaint defective joints. 2 On all joints exposed to the weather, tool and make smooth, solid, and watertight. B. Joint Pattern: 1. All joints: Provide *concave tooled' joints. 3,5 POINTING AND CLEANING A. At the completion of this portion of the Work, visually inspect the work of this Section and point, or cut out and repaint If necessary, all holes and defective joints. S. Thoroughly clean all masonry surfaces to be left exposed in the finished Work, removing all tracts of mortar, grout. and foreign matter. In the event ordinary cleaning is not adequate, provide light sandblasting when so directed, and at no additional cost to the Owner, SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section Includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Architecturally exposed structural steel. 3. Grout. B. Related Sections include the followingi 1. Division I Section -Quality Requirements* for Independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Dock* for field installation of sheer connectors. 3. Division 5 Section Natel Fabrications" for steel lintele not attached to structural -at"[ frame and other metal Items not defined as structural steel. 4. Division 9 Painting Sections and Division 9 Section "HIgh-Performonce Coatings* for surface preparation and priming requirements. 5. Division 5 Section "Motel Canoplas* for canopy deckiing and fosico. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel- Elements of structural -steel frame, an classified by AiSve 'Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 8, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents, i.e. thee canopy columns and framing 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates In the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Cortified Erector, Category CSE. S. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates In the AJSC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AJSC-Cortified Plant, Category SBD. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC'a 'Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and BrIdges." 2. AISC'9 "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings* and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC'a "Specification for Structural Steel BuildingeXiawable Stress Design and Plastic Design.* 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for Inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunncge, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners In a protected place. Clean and rolubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or repIcce damaged materials or structures as d1rected. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, Instructions, and directions for Installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. Angle Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M 8, Plate and Bar- ASTM A 36/A 36M C. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade 8 structural tubing. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Unheeded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Configuration; Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex head carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Finish: a. Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C at locations where in contact with pressure treated wood. b. Plain, at all other locations S. Threaded Rods; ASTM A 36/A 36M 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: a. Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Close C at locations where In contact with pressure treated wood. b. Plain, at all other locations 2.3 GROUT A. Cement Grout: Portland cement. ASTM C 150, Type 1; and clean, natural Bond, ASTM C 404, Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of I part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minuts working time. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steeh Fabricate and assemble In shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's *Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AlSC'8 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings- -Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 1. Mark and match -mark materials for field cosembi B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply =� fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC'a "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, end free of surface blemishes including pitting rust, scale and roughness. 2. �emcve blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding end grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plans thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS DIA. D. Solt Holes: Cut drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1. "Solvent Cleaning." G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bott holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Ptate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bare or runoff tabs. back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material, 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete bearing surfccee and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. 9. Proceed with Installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shares, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in Intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise Indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately In locations and to elevations Indicated and according to AJSC'9 *Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings cmd Bridges" end "Specification for Structural Steel Buildimga--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," 9. Base Plates: Clean conanste-bearing surfaces of bond-roducIng materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting bass plates. Clean bottom surface of bass plates. 1. Set bass plates for structural members on setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3 Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed 4: Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bass plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written Installation Instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's *Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fattening. Before assembly. clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies In elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated, F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection H. Do not enlarge unfair holes In members by burning or using drift pins, Room holes that must be enlarged. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance. and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AJSC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and *Specification for Structural Steel Buildings- -Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Deal n* for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of point on sullaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bare or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. c. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds. B. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually Inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual Inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following Inspection procedures, at testing agency's option - a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709, performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and Inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPARS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair point according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup PainUng: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections, SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof dock. B. Related Sections Include the following: 1. Division 9 Section :Pciinting" for repair painting of pointed dock. 2. Division 9 Section Special Coatings" for repair of dock special coatirigs. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who has completed steel dock similar In material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful In-servIce performance. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An Independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel dock according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members.* 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDUNG A. Protect steel dock from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stock steel dock on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Deck - a. Nucar Corp.; Vulcraft Div. b. United Steel Dock, Inc. c. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. Z2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Dock: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with *SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Dock," in SDI Publication No. 29, and the following* 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), zinc coatin 2. 8'ack Profile: Type WR, wide rib 3. Profile Depth. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Design Uncooted-Stool Thickness: 0.0295 Inch (0.75 mm). 5. Span Condition: Triple open or more. 6, Side Lops: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturaroo standard accessory materials for dock that comply with requirements Indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity. power-actucted or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self-thnsading screws. C. Side -Lop Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant. hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 12-14 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPo), not less than 0.0359-Inch (0,91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of some material and finish as dock; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit dock rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory -punched hole of 3/8-Inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter. G. Galvanizing Repair Point: SSPC-Point 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing c minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting from* and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances end other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install dock panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and Commentary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements In this Section. S. Locate docking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract sIde-lop Interlocks. D, Place dock panels flat and square and fasten to supporting fromer without warp or deflection. E. Cut and neatly fit dock panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to docking. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding. appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. H. Mechanical fasteners may be used In lieu of welding to fasten dock. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to dock manufacturer's written Instructions. 3.3 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof dock panels to steel supporting members as detailed on the Structural Drawings. B, Side -Lop and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side lope end perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals shown on the Structural Drawings. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame With a minimum and bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1, End Joints: Lopped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D. Roof Sump Pons and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof docking and weld flanges to top of dock. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least 1 weld at each corner. E. Miscellaneous Roof Dock Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plotes, and closures, and reinforcing channels according to dock manufacturer's written Instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete dock installation. F. Flexible Closure Stripe: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written Instructions to ensure complete closure. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing; Contractor will engage a qualified Independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing, B. Field welds wilt be subject to Inspection, C. Screw attachments Will be subject to inspection. D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Owner. E, Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. F. Additional testing end inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work With specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of dock with galvanized repair point according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written Instructions, B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both dock surfaces are Included In Division 9 Section . C, Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel dock Is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load -bearing wall framing. 2. Interior non-lood-becring wall framing. 3 * Roof joist framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for, wall sheathing, or roof sheathing using wood -based structural -use panels, oriented strand board. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies* for interior non-lood-becring metal -stud framing and coiling -suspension assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold -formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used In the cold -formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bonds due to cold forming. B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold -formed members, 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold -formed metal framing similar In material, design, and extent to that Indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted In construction with a 10-year record of successful In-service performance S. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency Indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, Including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength. tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and golvonized-coating thickness. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An Independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, ca documented according to ASTM E 548. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, *Structural Welding Code --Stool,' and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel.* E. FIre-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing to part of a fire -resistance -rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 1119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flrs�Resistcncs Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers In GA-600, 'Fire Resistance Design Manuel," or by design designations from Ul:9 *Fire Resistance Directory' or from the listings of another testing and Inspecting agency. F. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's 'Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold -formed metal framing ll� COFSS Technical Bulletin: *AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold -formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. S. Store cold -formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold -formed metal framing that may be incorporated Into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the following- 1, Clark Steel Framing Industries. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc., (412) 281-2805. 3. United Metal Products, Inc. 4. MarinoWers; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade. Refer to Structural Drawings for structural elements and Architectural Drawings for architectural elements. 2. Grade: Refer to Structural Drawings for structural elements and Architectural Drawings for architectural elements. 3, Coating: G90 (Z275). B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570/A 570M, hot rolled or ASTM A 611, cold rolled; cleaned, protracted, and primed with manufacturer's baked -on, load- and chrornate-free, rust -Inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements in FS Tr-P-664, of grade as follows., 1. Grade: Refer to Structural Drawings for structural element and Architectural Drawings for architectural elements. 2.3 LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel etude, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complyin with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1, Minimum Uncoated -Steel Vckness: As indicated on the Structural Drawings, 2. Flange Width: 2-1/2 inches (63 mm). 3, Section Properties: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. S. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths as Indicated on the Structural Drawings, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated -Stool Thickness: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As Indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2.4 NON -LOAD -BEARING CURTAIN -WALL FRAMING A. Metal studst 1, Cold -rolled metal framing shall comply with ASTM A-570, Grade 33 (33,000 psi yield), Grade 50 (50,000 psi yield). 2. Provide standard punched steel studs, with properties (type, size, gouge, spacing on center, etc.) as shown on the drawings. 3, Use only one type throughout the work, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifically approved non -load bearing. 4. At metal stud walls, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, provide 16 gouge standard steel "C" studs, hot-dtp galvanized. 5. Major framing members of the exterior wall sholl be equal to CSJ style studs and CSE style jolsts, B. Accessories: Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, tracks, clips, anchors, fastening devices, slip clips, sound attenuation pencil rods and resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper Installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the steel etude used. C. Horizontal Bridging: 1 1/2" cold rolled galvanized steel furring channels. 2.5 ROOF JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Roof Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths Indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTMI C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As Indicated on the Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties, As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories of the some material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa). B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1, Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5, Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girte. 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates. 2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M. zinc coated by hot -dip process c ASTM A 123. S. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex -headed b carbon -steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capabil without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per conducted by a qualified Independent testing agency. D. Power-Actucted Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indt from corrosion-resiotant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a quo Independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners,. Corrosion-realstant-cootad, self -drilling, self -threading screw$. 1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard als F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards, 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Point: SSPC-Point 20 or DOD-P-21035. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1; and clean, natural sand Mix at ratio of I part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum wo- placement and hydration. C. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 1, unfaced mineral -fiber blankets produ, combining glass or slog fibers with thermosetting resins. 2.9 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Sheathing: 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 Inch (12.7 mm) thick. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X. 5/8 Inch (15.9 mm) thick. 3. Edge and End Configuration. Square ends. 4. Size: 48 by 96 Inches (1220 by 2438 mm). 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by following: a. Georgia-Pacific Corp., (800) 284-5347. b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. (800) 628-4662 c. USG Corp.. United States Gypsum Co. (888) 834-2371. 2.10 SHEATHING ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Steel drill screws. ASTM C 954. in length recommended by shoathif for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic -polymer or other corrosion -protective cootlmg having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hour ASTM 9 117. B. Elostomeric Sealant: Medium -modulus, neutral -curing silicone sealant compotil substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials. recommended by she( manufacturers for application Indicated, and complying with requirements for slostoi specified In Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants.* C. Glass-Ftber Sheathing Tape for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Self -adhering g minimum 2 Inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads per Inch (390 1 by 780 threads per motor), of type recommended by sheathing and tape monufact with silicone emulsion sealant In sealing joints In glass -mat gypsum sheathing boo history of successful In-service use. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that n Incorporated into the Work Include, but are mot limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the follov a. Porma-Tite Tape--PGM 207A-, PormaGics-Mesh, Inc. b. Quik-Tape; Qulk-Tope, Inc. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommend, requirements in this Section. 1. Fobricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.? 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing-, do not torch cut, 3. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, a fcbricator. Wire tying of framing members Is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance welds, and methods used In correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Structural Drawings, will penetrating joined members by not loss than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold -formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or according to Shop Drawings. S. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 Inch In 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space Individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/ from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirerr sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold -formed metal framing assembly to a maxtr out-cf-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance requirements for Installation tolerances and other conditions effecting performance. Installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrooted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flor webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold -formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for Installation, or assembled, B. Install cold -formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more str requirements are indicated. C, Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to connections securely fastened, according to momufacturer'3 written recommondaftomi requirements In this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, c fabricator. Wine tying of framing membem is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance welds, and methods used In correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and Install according to Shop Drawings, with sc joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads, 0. Install framing members In one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are ir track or tension members. E. Install temporary bracing and supports, to secure framing and support loads co intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports undisturbed, until entire Integrated supporting structure has been completed and pe connections to framing are secured. F. Install Insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, and multiple studa at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing wol G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manuf standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing level, plumb, and true maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 Inch in 10 fact (1:960) and as folic 1. Space individual froming members no more than plus or minus 1/8 Inch (3 location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sh finishing materials. 3.4 LOAD -BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks i securely anchor at comers and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on the Sturctural Drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flof top and bottom triocks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 Inches (406 mm). C. Set etude plumb. D. Install headers over wall openings wider then stud spacing. Locate headers a as Indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes Indicated or required to tran supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset pli 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of from on Structural Drawings. 2. Install runner tracks and look studs above and below wall openings. Anchor etude with clip angles or by welding, and space jack etude some as full -height wt E. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing In stud framing Indicated fixtures, equipment. services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work re attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support Is not Indicated, comply with stud manufacit recommendations and Industry standards In each case, considering weight or load item supported. F. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches (1219 mm) oport. each stud intersection, 1. Bridging; Cold -rolled arteel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs etude with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, tout. steel sheet straps of width and thickneel stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat stro flanges end secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3.5 NON -LOAD -BEARING CURTAJN-WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align track@ accurately end at to supporting structure as indicated, B. Fasten both flanges of studs to (top and] bottom track, unless otherwise indli etude as followr. 1. Stud Spacing. An indicated, C. Set etude plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -I warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-lood-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent trani loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -log deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep -log deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building i 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to [bypassing] (Infill] etude and anchor to pr structure. E. Install horizontal bridging In curtain -wall studs. spaced In rows Indicated on Sl but not more than 54 inches (1370 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging wil (300 mrn) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat. tout, steel shei width, and thickness indicated and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and 11 matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to a flanges. a. Install solid blocking at [every other stud) (centers indicated]. 2. Bridging- Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs studs. 3. Bridging- Combination of flat, tout. steel sheet straps of width and thicknesi stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat stra flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flonges.hing a F. Instoll miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stifff angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complat curtain-wo 11 -framing system. 3.6 ROOF JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings Indicated on Structural Drav B. Install joist, bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to brace, end reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joints with web stiffeners, end clips, jet clip angles, or steel -stud sections as indicated on the Structural Drawings and/or Drawings. C. Space Joists not more then 2 Inches (51 mm) from abutting walls. and as fa 1. Joist Spacing: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. D. Frome openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, or another combination of connected Joists If indicated. E. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, cli clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchom, and fasteners, to provit and stable Joist -framing assembly. :cording to t )Its and ty to sustain, ASTM E 488 ;oted, fabricated equal to 10 Ified iteal drill iwhere. ASTM C 404. or required for od by one of the g manufacturer Z 0 i according to 411- ile with joint > thing ioric sealants MA 09 ass -fiber tape, to y 390 or 390 Z irers for use d and with a oy be Mill Ing: =1 in to line, and tIone and ii standard with and quality Of I screw icrow fastening, . . . . . . . 0 and erection a maximum I inch (3 mm) into of lum fith Proceed with ;as or track it may be field ngent line, and with and i standard with and quality of -ew penetrating dicated for mparable In in place, ?moment �oxacl Joists, Z k. icturer's to line to a 0 No: mm) from plan icthIng or other 11�_ 3: IWO X 0 &M ccurately and Dog gas of studs to IM I A 191kim W 141 upi U LU iove openings Z !22iE 0 ifer load to too. i as indicated < tracks to jamb MCI 11 studs. a support juiring OLU 40 Z �i irer's written vaulting from 404 * 0Z Fasten at of punched W Z 8 Indicated and is to stud IL 0 -urely anchor died. Space lumb walls or for of vertical tructure. mary building op Drawings * 12 Inches t straps of iicknese ud webs or L0 8 of punched indicated and ,a to stud 17 1) 1�te iors, clip i and stable so' 7 O_ 0 ir fasten track Ing$. final position, 3: t hangers, stool on the Shop laws: nesting Joists, SHEE7 sure places, I a complete SP2 DWG: 005080-SP2 X I01, two) 9@09 ,§@%0(9 3.7 GYPSUM SHEKrHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written Instructions. B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting construction, except provide a 3/8-Inch (9-mm) setback where non- load- boo ring construction abuts structural elements. C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and Joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly. 0. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Vertical Installation: Install 48- rich wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with vertical I edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw -attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at approximately 8 inches (200 mm) c.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm) from rds. G. Air-Inflitration Barrier Application: Cover sheathing with air- Infiltration barrier as follows: 1. Cut back air-infiltratlon barrier 1/2 Inch (13 mm) on each side of break In supporting -joint locations. members at expansion- or control 2. Apply capholt-acturated organic felt horizontally with 2-Inch (50-mm) overlap and 6-inch (150-mm) and lop; fasten to sheathing with corrosion -resistant staples. 3. Apply proprietary building wrap to comply with manufacturer's written Installation instructions. 4. Apply alr-infiltratton barrier to cover vertical flashing with 4-Inch (100-mm) overlap. H. Sealln Sheathing Joints: Seal joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written recommengetions and as follows: 1. Apply elostomeric sealant on joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweilmg. Seal other penetrations and op sninr�ly gloss -fiber sheathing tape to gices-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and 2. trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed sealant In entire face of tape, Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. FI LI A. Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified Independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. B. Flold and shop welds will be subject to Inspection and testing. C. Shear wall and roof docking attachments will be subject to Inspection and testing, D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Owner. E. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. F. Additional testing and Inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold -formed metal framing with galvanized repair point according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturst's written Instructions. B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and point scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and Installed prime -pointed. cold -formed metal framing. Point framing surfaces with some type of shop point used on adjacent surfaces. I , C. Protect paper -surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more then 30 d aye by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air -Infiltration barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is Installed. D. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints In sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing Is applied. E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, In a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure cold -formed metal framing Is without damage or deterioration at time of Substanticl Completion. SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Description of Work: . 1 Miscellaneous metal work Includes items fabricated from Iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and coatings which are not a part of the structural steel of other metal n other Sections of the Specifications, except as specified herein. syst"me I types of miscellaneous metal Items Include. but are not limited to the following: 2. The b. Angle and Channel Frames 0. Support Angles and Braces a. Roof Access Ladder d. Pipe Bollords 1,2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators In accordance i dard Qualification Procedure". Ali welders shall be certified in accordance with AWS D1.1. B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble Items In shop to greatest extent possible. so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at project site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations, Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated Installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Metal Primer Point- Use "10-99 Tnamsc Primer," *Rustoleum No. 5769 Primer," or equal approved in advance by the Architect, Primer point selected must be compatible with the required finish coots of point. Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish point requirements. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL: - A. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of size and thicknesses shown or if not shown of required size and thickness rength and durability In finished product for Intended use. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. 2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32* unless otherwise shown. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise Impairing the work. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth. Use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts for field connections and for bolting. 4. Weld corners and seams continuously and In accordance with recommendations of AWS DI.I. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 5. Provide for anchorage of type shown coordinated with structure. Fabricate and space hown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use of work. S. Cut, reinforce, drill and top miscellaneous metal work as may be required to receive finish hardware and similar Items of work. 7. Use hot rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock, unless work to shown or specified to be fabricated from cold-finleh or cold-rollod stock. 8. Connections: All connections shall be welded, unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein. B. Shop Painting: Shop point oil miscellaneous metal work except those members or portions of members to be 1;mbedclad In concrete surfaces and edges to be field welded. unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before the shop coat of point Is applied. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale In accordance with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning" or SSPC SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". Remove all, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1, "Solvent Cleaning". 3. Apply one shop coat of metal primer point to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coat$ of point to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish It from the first. 4. immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer point, applied In monufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mile for each coot. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corner, edges and all exposed surfaces. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS: A. Carpenter's Iron Work: I . Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and Iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. 2. Manufacture fabricated Items of sizes. shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere furnish B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjccent work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bare of all welded construction using mitered comers, welded brackets and splice plates and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill and top units to receive hardware and similar Items to be anchored to work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages, ouch as concrete Inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having Integral anchors. which are to be embedded In concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such Items to project site, B. FostenIng to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in -place construction; Including, threaded fasteners for concrete, toggle bolts, through -bolts end other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for Installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location, alignment and ofevotlon, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors In formwork for items which are to be built Into concrete, masonry or similar construction. D. Connections: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces of units which are galvanized and are Intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 3.2 FIELD PAINTING- I A. Immediately after erection. clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop point. Mrs brush and sand as necessary to obtain a smooth surface. Apply point by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mile. SECTION 05600 - METAL CANOPIES R A. Work Included: Metal canopy docking, gutters, fascia, bull-noaes, and C-channels. 1.1 DESCRIPTION 2.1 METAL CANOPY AND COMPONENTS A. Canopy docking shall be C12 - 12" x 2-1/2* or 3" deep, roll formed panel. Panel shell be accurately roll formed from 26 go. (embossed) carbon steel with baked polyester pointed finish. B. Gufter/Foucia/C-Channel shall be 4' deep gutter x 9" high fascia x 3' deep / 6" high C-chonnel. Product shall be accurately formed from .040 (embossed) aluminum with baked polyester pointed finish. C. C-Channel shall be 3* deep x 4' high. Product shall be accurately formed from .040 (embossed) aluminum with baked polyester pointed finish, D. Bull -nose components shall be accurately formed from .Oa3 (embossed) aluminum with a baked polyester pointed finish. E. Colors shall be: 1. Docking: Gloss White 2. Gutter/Fascia: Sherwin-Williams *Gray Area*, SW7052 3. 6" High C-Channal: Morton "Red*, 582R105 4. e High C-Channel: Morton `Yellow", 582Y80 F. Ad trim places. angles, brackets, etc.. shall be the some type and finish as adjacent material, unless specifically described in the drawings, and furnished by the same supplier of the other canopy materials to Insure quality and consistency. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS I A. Approved Vendors are: 1. Metals USA/Allmet Building Products, 227 S. Town East Blvd., Mesquite, TX 75149, (800) 827-8045, (800) 998-2898 fox. 2. Ventalre Corporation, 4345 South 93rd East Ave., Tulso. OK, 74147, (800) 324-5874. (918) 622-1191 fox. 3. Mason Corporation, 1200 Crowley Street, Carrollton, TX 75006, (800) 756-2766, (972) 242-7966 fox. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision In the work of those trades for Interface with the work of this Section. S. Make measurements as required In the field to assure proper fit. C. Reference Section 05120 for canopy structural tube and angle steel. 3.2 INSTALLA11ON A. Approved vendors must provide an Installation guideline to the contractor. B. The contractor must install metal canopy and -components In accordance with the vendors installation guidelines. C. Fastening of all components shall be with self -drilling plated screws. Screws shall be of sufficient size to Insure the strength of the connection as per the drawings, Exposed screws and rivets shall be colored to match adjacent material. D. Contractor shall clean canopy prior to completion of project. All shavings from drilling and cutting are to be blown off, not washed, to prevent premature rust. T U PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIP71ON: A. Work Included: Provide wood, nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware, and other items needed, and perform rough carpentry for the construction shown. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ers of skilled workman who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods erformance of the work of this Section. B. Codes and standards: 1. Comply with the pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Lumber and plywood shall bear the gradomark, stamp or other Identifying marks Indicating grades of material and rules or standards under which grades they are produced. Such identifying marks shall be In accordance with the rule or standard the material is produced. 3. Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 20 for indicated use. 4. Lumber shall be In dimension type In accordance with ASTM-0245. 5. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1, except as otherwise indicated, for each use. 6. Size references are nominal sizes and the actual sizes shall be within the manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standards. Moisture content shall be 19% maximum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS: A. Studs shall be Stud Grade Southern Pine, or greater, In accordance with dimension lumber equal or greater than 2' In Its least dimension. B. Structural light framing in dimension lumber which is equal to or lose than 4* shall be Southern Pine or Douglas Fir Larch No. 2 or better. C. Fabricated wood joists: Shall be equal to APA rated joists as shown on the plan. Joist n the drawings, provided with 1 1/2* thick Inner -seat rim some depth of Joist as shown, or No. 2 Southern -Pine 202. Provide joists from one of the following: 1. Louisiana Pacific, (503) 221-0800. 2. Truss Joist, (800) 338-0515. 3. Williamotte Wood Products, (541) 926-7771. D. Roof Sheathing: Shall have an APA span rating of 32/16 for structural 1 rated sheathing, with a minimum thickness of 5/8* and exposure I rating: 5/8" exterior plywood, or OSB. Use common or galvanized box nails as noted on plan. E. Exterior Wall Sheathing: Shall be equal to X" CDX exterior plywood or OSB as shown, Other plywood shall be as noted on the drawings. Use common or galvanized box nails as noted on plan. Provide from one of the following: 1. Louisiana Pacific, (503) 221-0800. 2. Hoover Treated Wood Products, (706) 595-5058. 3. Hickson, (404) 362-3970. F. Non -Structural wood Rough Bucks, Nallers. Blocking and Furring: Any species, standard grade, unless noted otherwise. 1. Preservative Treated Wood: a. Use C.C.A. (AX concentration) preservatives for all construction: AWPB LP-4 above ground. b. Field treat surface cuts and holes In accordance with AWPA M4. G. Rough Hardware: Provide rough hardware and fastenings as shown on Drawings, specified herein, or required for proper installation of carpentry. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, and similar items shall be of sizes and types to rigidly secure members In place, Hot dip galvanized Items ed d treated wood, 1. Steel items: a Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36. b: Use galvanized at exterior locations. 2. Machine bolts: Comply with ASTM A307. 3. La bolts: Comply with Fed Spec FF-B-561. 4. N al?i 9: a. Use common except as otherwise noted. b. Comply with Fed Spec FF-N-1. c. Use galvanized at exterior locations, H. Wood Framing Connectors; Shall be equal to the following as manufactured by Simpson Strong-lls Connectors, (800) 839-2588: 1. I -Joist Hangers: IS go as noted on plans 2 Bridging: TB36, 20 go 3' Plywood Clips: PSCL 15/32. 20 go 4. Holdclowns: As noted on plans 5. Acceptable Aternote Manufacturers: a. Cleveland Steel, (800) 281-8351. b. USP Lumber Connectors, (800) 32a-5934. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Provide other material, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Socrion will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. General 1. Provide cutting, fitting, fabricating, erecting, wedging, bracing, blocking. nailing and muting of items or rough carpentry throughout, including miscellaneous Items of framing, furring, grounds, blocking, ,screeds, and ncll*rs. Such Items shall be built In where and as indicated on Drawings or required for attachment of finish and other work. 2. Blocking, Bucks, Nallers: Install plumb, level, and true with joints flush, fastened securely in place. 3. Framing, Furring and Stripping: Expertly Install, using skilled craftsmen, in accordance with a rch1tectural details end standard practices. Shim as required 4. Blocking, Curbs, Nailars, Canto: Install plumb. level and *true In accordance with details on Drawings. Fasten securely. 3 2 TYPICAL NAILING SCHEDULE: Z Typical nailing schedule shall be as follows, unless noted otherwise: 1. Top Plate to Stud: 2-16d End Nall 2-16d Face Nail 2. Stud to Sole Plate: 4-5d Too Nail 2-1 Scl End Nail 3. Double Stud, Face Nail: 1 Sd at 24"o.c. 4. Built-up Corner Studs: 16d at 24"o.c. 5. Double Top Plate, Typ Face Nall: 16d at Wo.c. 6. Double Top Plate, Lop Spliced: 8-16d 7. Header, Two Pieces: 16d at Wo.c. top and bottom, staggered. 2-16d at ends. 8, Header to stud, toenaik 4-8d B. Common or Box nails unless noted otherwise. SECTION 06112 - FRAMING AND SHEATHING PART I ? GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural wall and roof framing. B. Built-up structural columns. C. Wall and roof sheathing. D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. ad trim. E. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and both accessories, wall octilinsts, we etc. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. APA (American Plywood Association). C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant by Pressure Process. E. NFPA (National Forest Products Association). F, SPIS (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau). G. WCUB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau). H. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect I-jolste from warping or other distortion by stacking In vertical position, braced to resist movement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIS. B. Joist Framing: Stress Group APA rated, as Indicated on the structural drawings, 19 percent maximum moisture content, C. Studding: Southern Pine species, stud grade, 2x6 size classification, 19 percent moisture content. D. Miscellaneous Framing: Southern Pine species, No. 2 grade or botter,19 percent moisture content. A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Structural 1. 2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS B. Particleboard Roof Sheathing: ANSI A208.1 APA Rated Oriented Strand Board (OSB)-, wood chips, flakes, set with waterproof resin binder, structural grade, C. Plywood Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Structural 1. D. Particleboard Wall Sheathing, APA Rated Oriented Strand Board (OSS), Structural 1; wood chips or flakes, set with waterproof resin binder. 2.3 SHEATHING AND UNDERLAYMENT LOCATIONS A. Fiat Roof Sheathing: As indicated on the structural drawings, B. Above Grade Sheathing: As indicated on the structural drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped, electro-golvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Make provisions for erection loads. and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and In true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Place horizontal members, crown side up. D. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices. E. Double members at openings over 36 inches wide. Space short studs over end under openings to stud spacing. F. Bridge joists as indicated on the structural drawings. Flt solid blocking at ends of members. 0. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form comers by alternating lopping side members, H. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of dock openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet. 3.2 SHEATHING A. Secure roof sheathing with longer edge parallel to framing members and with ends staggered earing. blocking between sheets. B. Use sheathing clips between shoots, between roof framing members. Provide solid edge C Secure wall sheathing with long dimension parallel or perpendicular to wall studs, with ends ;4r firm bearing and staggered. D. Place building wrap horizontally over wall sheathing; weather lop edges and ends and tape. E. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards where indicated on drawings. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 'A Inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum. SECTION 06125 - WOOD DECKING PART 1 ? GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plywood and Glue laminated structural wood docking. B. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cost -in Place Concrete B. Section 09906 - Painting: Field finishing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AJTC (American Institute of Timber Construction) 108 - Standard for Heavy Timber Construction. B. AILSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. C, APA (American Plywood Association) D. AWPA (American Wood Preservatives Association) CI - Adl Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. E. AWPA (American Wood Preservatives Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Flre Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. F. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC and AITC 108. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. 13. Glue Laminated Docking: AITC 110 and AITC 113. C. Perform work In accordance with ANSI A190.1. D. In lieu of grade stamping exposed to view lumber and plywood, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products conform to specified requirements. E. Manufacturers., Company specializing In manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum of 10 years documented experience and certified by AITC, F. Installer. Company specializing In manufacturing the Products specified In this section with a minimum of 10 years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION d members in accordance with AITC 1 1 1 requirements for unwrapped, load wrapped, bundle wrapped, and Individually wrapped material. 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: AITC 110, AJTC 112, SPIS. B. Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing Structural 1. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors. 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Adhesive. APA AFG-01, waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive docking. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing support Items. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD DECKING A. Install docking parallel to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. B. Allow expansion space at edges and ends, C. Attach docking as Indicated on the structural drawings. D. Use sheathing clips at unsupported edges of plywood between supporting framing members. E. Cut docking to accommodate roof drain and flange. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Docking Without Load: 9 Inch In 10 feet maximum and 'A Inch in 30 feet maximum. SECTION 06196 - PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS PART 1 ? GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood Chard and Plywood or Oriented Strand Board (OSB) web joists for framing. rldgng, bracing, and anchorage. ': ' rom I , for openings. C F in i nt of wood. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA (American Plywood Association). D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C2 - Timber, Timbers, Bridge Ties. and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. I. ANPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant by Pressure Process. F. SPIS' (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work In accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA and SPIB. B. Manufacturers: Company specializing In manufacturing the Products specified In this section with minimum 10 years documented experience. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, other governing load criteria, and fire retardant requirements. 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, SPIS. B. Wood Chard Members: Single top and bottom chord, species, grade, size classification and 19 percent maximum moisture content. Finger scarfing not permitted. C. Plywood Web: APA Rated Sheathing Structural 1. D. Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Web: ANSI A208.1 APA Oriented Strand Board; wood chips, flakes, not with waterproof resin binder. E. Joist Bridging: Type. size and spacing recommended by Joist manufacturer, as Indicated on the structural drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Manufacturses standard. B. Wood Blocking Support Members and Framing for Openings: In accordance with Section 061 14. C. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped Electro-golvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate joists to achieve structural requirements specified. B. Brace members for support during transit, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of support Items. 3.3 ERECTION A. Install joists in accordance with manulacturer's Instructions. B. Set structural members level and plumb, In correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and In true alignment until completion of erection and Installation of permanent bracing. D. Don not field cut or altar structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. E. Place headers and supports to franne, openings. F. Frame openings between joists with lumber as indicated on the structural drawings. G, Coordinate placement of decking and sheathing with work of this section. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Framing Members, % Inch (12 mm) maximum, from true position. SECTION 07190 - MOISTURE / VAPOR RETARDER PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section Includes- Providing envelop moisture protection and sill plate sealer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / PRODUCTS A. Envelop Moisture/Vdpor Projection: Provide an envelop type moisture / vapor barrier installed over the exterior sheathing. Provide GreanGuard *Raindrop* House Wrap, as manufactured by Pactiv, 800-227-7339. 1. Additional acceptable manufactures: a. *Tyvek HomeWrop", manufactured by Dupont, (800) 44-TYVEK. b. "Typar HouseWrop", distributed by Wolf Distributing Co., (877) 315-6669. . B. Sill Plate Sealer: Provide a Vill plate sealer between the slob and sill plate at all exterior walls. Provide "Sonneborn" NPI as manufactured by Chemrex, Inc., (800)433-9517. 1. Additional acceptable manufacturers: a. "#790 Silicone Building Sealant", by Dow Coming, (517) 496-6000 b. "Elost-o-thone 227 type R'. by Pacific Polymers International, (714) 898-0025. SECTION 07190 - MOISTURE / VAPOR RETARDER PART 4 - EXECU71ON 3.1 INSTALLA11ON A. Install Moisture / Vapor barriers In accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Provide adequate lop joints and seal all joints with manufacturer's recommended tape. 13. Install sill plate sealer In two continuous boads minimum below sill plates and one continuous bead along joint between slab and outside bottom edge of sill plate after sill plate Installation. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation. SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide thermal Insulation in stud covItles at exterior walls and beneath roof 09 on. shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installatt 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workman who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post c certificate of Insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: For the purpose of these specifications, products by Owens-Coming-Fiberglose are listed; however, the following manufacturers are accepted equals- 1. Owens-Comlng, (419) 248-8000. 2. Johns-Marinville. (800) 654-3103, 3. The Colotex Corporation, (800) 523-4684. 4. United States Gypsum, (877) 874-6655. B. Thermal Batt lnsulation (Exterior Walls : Kroft paper faced blankets as manufactured by Owens�Conrifng-Flberglcss Corporation. 4ovIde standard sizes to fit stud spacing and length. ASTM C 665-latest edition. Type 111. Class A. C. Rigid Roof Insulation: 1. The first layer shall be polylsocyanurate board, 2-1/2* thick, with an R-value of 15.6 or greater. Installation shall be with mechanical fasteners in conformance with the manufacturer's mcarnmenclations and Factory Mutual 1-60 requirements (unless otherwise required), 2. The second layer shall be V thick, porlite insulation board, with an R-yalue of 2.0. Installed with staggered joints, with hot -applied type IV asphalt bitumen. 3. Tapered Insulation for crickets and slopes to drain shall be perlite, minimum V thick, with X" per 12* slope, Installed as Indicated on the drawings. D. Tape and Sealer Provide standard as recommended by manufccturer of Insulation with fire resistive and perm rating equal to the insulation. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of the Section In strict accordance with the original design, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Thermal Batt Insulation (Exterior Wells)- 1. Install continuously in exterior walls where shown, wlth no gaps between adjacent botts, 2. Secure flanges of insulation to metal or wood studs as applicable. 3. Secure Insulation In place using wine to prevent displacement or sagging where required. 4. Carefully out and fit Insulation around pipes, conduits, and other obstructions; Insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members. 5. Close all gaps at joints and adjoining materials with tops and/or sealer. 6. Install with vapor barrier (kraft paper face) facing worm side of wall. C Rigid Roof Insulation (on roof dock): 4: Install rigid roof insulation per the manufacturers requirements for the specific substrate on the drawings and as recommended by the selected roofing manufacturer. Verify compliance of rigid roofing with the roofing manufacturer. SECTION 07460 - VINYL SIDING SYSTEM PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section Includes: Provide all vinyl siding, trim, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide horizontal vinyl siding, trim, and accessories from one of the following: 1. Platinum Series, "Horizontal Triple-3*, No. 0047, 9"x12'xI/2*, Color: "Prestige Beige", as manufcctured by Koycon, (802) 866-0114. 2. Vinyl Side Classic. "Classic 3*, No. T3VS, Traditional Clapboard Profile, 9"x12'x5/S*, Triple 3' oy", as manufactured by Wolverine Technologies, (888) 838-8100. 3. Use all trim and accessories as necessary per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 4 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrate to insure properly prepared for Installation of vinyl siding and trim. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all vinyl siding, true and square, in accordance with tha drawings and manufacturer's printed recommendations. Join members In a continuous run with a minimum 1" overlap and cope moldings in internal comers. Overlap siding in the direction of travel on all sides, generally counter -clockwise. Refer to site plan for traffic flow pattern, Miter all members at external corner. Caulk all joints with approved sealant. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of Installation. SECTION 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bose Sheet Application B. Roof Membrane Application C. Roof Flashing Application References in these specifications to standards, test methods, codes etc., are Implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted, The following to an abbreviated list of associations, Institutions, and societies. which may be used as references throughout these i ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials Philadelphia, PA FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Norwood, MA NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association Rosemont, IL Safety and Health Administration Washington, DC SMACNA Shoot Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Chantilly, VA UL Underwriters Laboratories Northbrook, IL t.3 GUARANTEE A. Roof Membrane Guarantee: Upon successful completion of the project, and after all post Installation procedures have been completed, furnish tha Owner with the manufacturer's ton year labor and materials membrane guarantee. The guarantee shall be a torm type, without deductibles or limitations on coverage amount, and shall be Issued at no additional cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not exclude random areas of pending from coverage. . 2.1 MANUFACTURERS/SYSTEMS A. System Description: Materials and component assemblies described In this specification section are based on Simplest Paradione 20/30 FR roof system, (800) 922-8800. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturem/Systems- 1. Johns Manville. 2FID system. (800) 231-1064. 2. Soprema, 2541 system, (800) 356-3521. 2.2 ROOFING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY/PRODUCTS A. Base Shoat: A fiberglass reinforced, specially oxidized asphalt coated sheet, having an minimum weight of 85 lb/sq. 1. Siplast Irox 40 2.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. Roofing Membrane Assembly: A roof membrane assembly consisting of two plies of a prefabricated. reinforced, homogeneous Styrone-Butodlane-Styrene (SUS) block copolymer modified asphalt membrane, applied over a prepared substrate, Both reinforcement mats shall be impregnated/saturated and coated each old* with an SBS modified bitumen blend. The roof system shall pass 500 cycles of ASTM D 5849 Resistance to Cyclic Joint Displacement (fatigue) at I 14�F (-10`C). Possing results shall show no signs of membrane crackggor interply delomination after 500 cycles. The roof system shall pass 200 cycles of ASTM D 58 after heat conditioning performed in accordance with ASTM 0 5147. The assembly shall possess waterproofing capatillity, e such that a phased roof application, with only the modified bitumen base ply In pl ce, can be achieved for prolonged periods of time without detriment to the watertight Integrity of the entire roof system. 1. Provide: Slplaet Paradlene 20/30 FR roof system 2. Modified Bitumen Bass and Stripping Ply a) Thickness (avg): 91 mile (2.3 mm) (AStM D 5147 b) Thickness (min): 87 mile (2.2 mm) i(ASTM D 5147� c) Weight (min per 100 ft? of coverage): 62 lb (3.0 kg/m?) d) Maximum filler content In alostomeric blend - 35X by weight a) Low temperature flexibility 0 -131F (-25'C): PASS (ASTM D 5147) f) Maximum Load (avg) 0 734F (232C): 30 lbf/Inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147) g) Maximum Load (avg) 0 01F (-181C), 70 lbf/inch (12.3 lops of ???? kN/m) (ASTM D 5147) h) Elongation 0 5X Maximum Load (avg.) 0 731F (231C): 5OX (ASTM D 5147) 1) Dimensional Stability (max): OAX (ASTM D 5147) k) Approvals: UL Class listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) J) High Temperature Stability (min): 250*F (1211C) (ASTM D 5147) 1) Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and dimensional stability m) Provide: Siplast Paradlene 20 2. Modified Bitumen Finish Ply a) Thickness (avg)- 130 mile (3.3 mm) (ASTM D 5147) b) Thickness at salvage (coating thickness) (avg): 98 mile (2.5 mm) (ASTM D 5147) c) Thickness at selvage (coating thickness) (min): 94 mile (2,4 mm) (ASTM D 5147) d) Weight (min per 100 ft? of coverage): 90 lb (4.4 kg/m?) a) Maximum filler content in elostomeric blend: 35X by weight IF) Low temperature flexibility 0 -131 F (-25* C): PASS (ASTM D 5147) g) Maximum Load (avg) 0 73'F (23*C): 30 lbf/Inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147) h) Maximum Load (avg) 0 O'F (-181C): 75 lbf/inch (13.2 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147) 1) Elongation 0 5% Maximum Load (avg.) 0 731F (231C): 55X (ASTM D 5147) J) Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147) k) High Temperature Stability (min): 250'F (1210 C) (ASTM 0 5147) 1) Granule Embedment (max loss): 2.0 grams per sample (ASTM D 5147) m) Approvals: UL Close listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) n) Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and dimensional stability criteria n) Surfacing: ceramic granules . a) Provide: Siplast Paradione 30 FR B. Flashing Membrane Assembly: A flashing membrane assembly consisting of c prefabricated, reinforced, Styrene- Butadlene-Styrone (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt membrane with a continuous, channel -embossed metal -foil surfacing. The finish ply shall conform to ASTM D 6298 and the following physical and mechanical property requirements. 1. Metal -Clad Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet a) Thickness (avg): 142 mile (3.6 mm) (ASTM D 5147) b) Thickness (min); 1.158 mile (3.5 mm) (ASTM D 5147) c) Weight (min per 100 ft? of coverage): 92 lb (4.5 kg/m?) d) Coating Thickness - back surface (min): 40 mile (1 mm) (ASTM D 5147) 0) Maximum filler content In slastomertc blend: 35X by weight f) Low temperature flexibility 0 01 F (-181 C): PASS (ASTM D 5147) 9) Maximum Load (avg) 0 731F (231C): 85 lbf/inch (15 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147) h) Maximum Load (avg) 0 O'F (-18*C): 180 lbf/inch (31.7 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147) I� Elongation 0 5X Maximum Load (avg) 0 731F (239C): 45X (ASTM D 5147) I Tear -Strength (avg): 120 lbf (0.54 kN) (ASTM D 5147) J) Dimensional Stability (max): DIX (ASTM D 5147) k) High Temperature Stability (min): 2251F (1071C) (ASTM D 5147) 1) Cyclic Ther I Shock Stability (maximum): 0.2% (ASTM D 6298) me m) Approvals; UL Approved, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) n) Reinforcement: fiberglass scrim mat or other meeting the performance end dimensional stability criteria p) Surfacing: aluminum metal foil q) Firovide,, SIplast Veral Aluminum 2.4 ROOFING ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Adhesives 1. Mopping Asphalt: Type IV asphalt certified for full compliance with the requirements listed in Table 1, ASTM D 312. Each container or bulk shipping ticket shall Indicate the equiviscous temperature, EVT, the finished blowing temperature, FST, and the flash point, FP. Mopping asphalt shall be approved In writing by the roof membrane manufacturer. 2. Provide: Siplost PA-100 Asphalt by Siplast/I lops of ????copol; Irving, TX B. Bituminous Cutback Materials 1. Primer: A high flash, quick drying, asphalt solvent bland which meets or exceeds ASTM D 41 requirements. Provide: Siplast PA-1125 Asphalt Primer by Siplost/icopol; Irving, TX 2. Mostles: An asphalt cutback mastic, reinforced with non-osbestos fibers, used as a base for setting metal flanges conforming to ASTM D 4586 Type 11 requirements. Provide: Siplast PA-1021 Plastic Cement by Siplast/Icopol; Irving, TX C. Sealant: A moisture -curing, non -slump olostomeric sealant designed for roofing applications. a approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use In conjunction with the roof membrane materials. Acceptable types ore as follows: Siplast PS-304 Elostomeric Sealant by Slploet/leopol; Irving, TX D. Ceramic Granules: No. 11 grade specification ceramic granules of color scheme matching the 2 ranule surfacing of the finish ply. Metallic Powder. A finely graded metal dust as supplied or approved by the membrane ;;onufacturer, used for covering of bitumen overruns over the foil surfaced membrane. F. Walktrecd: A prefabricated, puncture resistant polyester core reinforced, polymer modified bitumen sheet material topped with a ceramic -coated granule wearing surface. 1. Thickness: 0.217 in (5.5 mm) 2. Weight: 1.8 lb/ft? (8.8 kg/m?) 3. Width: 30 In (76.2 cm) 4. Provide: Paratread Roof Protection Material by Siplast / loopol; Irving, TX 0. Fasteners: Provide fasteners as recommended by the roofing manufacturer and appropriate for the substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Sweep or vacuum all surfaces, removing all loose aggregate and foreign substances prior to commencement of roofing. 3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARAIION A. Base Sheet Securement to Prepared Substrate: Lay the base shoot over entire area to be roofed, lopping sides 3 Inches and ends 6 Inches. Using the specified fasteners, fasten each sheet every 9 inches through lops and stagger fasten the remainder of the sheet In 2 rows on n ominal 12 Inch centers with fasteners In each row on 12 Inch centers. 3.3 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Membrane Application: Apply roofing In accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and the following requirements. Application of roofing membrane components shall immediately follow application of base shoot and/or insulation as a continuous operation. B. Aesthetic Considerations: An aesthetically pleasing overall appearance of the finished roof application is a standard requirement for this project. Make necessary preparation$, utilize recommended application techniques, apply the specified materials (i.e. granules, metallic powder), and exercise care in ensuring that the finished application Is acceptable to the Owner. 0. Priming: Prime metal flanges (all lcoke, edge metal, lead drain flashings) and concrete and masonry surfaces wlth a uniform coating of ASTM D 41 asphalt primer. D. Kettles and Tankers; Kettles and tankers shall be equipped with acourcts, fully readable thermometers. Do not heat asphalt to or above Its flash point. Avoid heating at or above the FBT, should conditions make this Improofical, heating must be no more than 251F Wow the EVT and no more then 25'F above Evr. E. Aspholt Temperatures: If the EVT information is not provided, the following asphalt temperature shall be observed. Maximum heating temperature shall be 5251F (274'C). Minimum application temperature shall be 4001F (2041C). P. Asphalt Mappings: Ensure that all mappings do not exceed a maximum of 25 lb./squars. Mopping shall be total In coverage, leaving no breaks or voids. 0, Membrane Adhesive Application: Membrane adhesive can be applied by roller, squeegee or spray unit. Apply cold lops of ????adhesive in a smooth, even, continuous layer without brooks or voids. Utilize an application rate of 2 to 2 1/2 gcl/sq (0.6 to 1.0 I/m?) over irregular or porous substrates. Utilize an application rate of 1 1/2 to 2 gal/eq (0.6 to 0.8 kg/m?) for Interply applications. Double the adhesive application rate at the end lops of granule surfaced sheets. H. Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer, and sealants will not be permitted. Roofing Application: Apply all layers of roofing free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths. Exert 1;ufficlent pressure on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air pockets. 1. Apply oil layers of roofing perpendicular to the slope of the dock. 2. Fully bond the base ply to the prepared substrate, utilizing minimum 3 Inch side and end lops. Apply each sheet directly behind the *(cspholt/cold adhesive applicator. Cut a dog ear angle at the end lops on overlapping selvage edges. Using a clean Irowel, apply top pressure to top seal T-1aps immediately following sheet application. Stagger and lops a minimum of 3 feet. 3 Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing minimum 3 Inch side and end laps. Apply * ply a minimum 3 feet. Cut a dog ear angle at the end tape on overlapping selvage edges. each shoot directly behind the *[asphalt/cold adhesive] applicator. Stagger end lops of the finish Using a clean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T-lops immediately following sheet application. Stagger side lops of the finish ply a minimum 12 Inches from side lops ln the underlying base ply. Stagger and lops of the finish ply cr minimum 3 feet from end lops In the underlying base ply. 4. Maximum sheet lengths and special fastening of the specified roof membrane system may be required at various slope increments where the roof dock slope exceeds 1/2 Inch per foot. The manufacturer shall provide acceptable sheet lengths and the required fastening schedule for all cations to applicable roof slopes. J. Granule Embedment: Broadcast mineral granules over all bitumen overruns on the finish ply surface, while the bitumen is still hot or the adhesive Is soft, to ensure a monolithic surface color. K. Flashing Application - Wood Surfaces: Flash wood or plywood parapet walls and curbs using the reinforcing sheet and the metal foil flashing membrane. The reinforcing sheet shall have minimum 3 inch side lops and extend a minimum of 3 inches onto the base ply surface and to th: top of,the parapet wall or curb. Nall the reinforcing shoot through the field of the sheet to th vertlea wood surface on 12 inch centers from the top of the cant to top of the wall or curb. Fully adhere the remainder of the flashing rainforcini sheet that extends over the cant and roof level. After the final roofing ply has been applied to he top of the cant, prepare the - surface area that Is to receive flashing coverage by torch hooting granular surfaces or by halt primer; allowing primer to dry thoroughly. Torch apply the metal foil -faced flashing Into place using three foot widths (cut off the end of roll) always lopping the factory selvage edge. Extend the flashing sheet a minimum of 4 Inche beyond the too of the cant 3 onto the prepared surface of the finished roof and up the wall to the desired flashing height. Exert pressure on the flashing shoot during application to ensure complete contact with the woll/roof surfaces. preventing air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a damp sponge or shop rag. Check and seal all loose lops and edges. Noll the top edge of the flashing on 9 inch centers. (See manufacturer's schematic for visual Interpretation), M. Use of Metallic Powder. Broadcast metallic powder over all bitumen overruns on the metal foil membrane surface while the bitumen is still hot to ensure a monolithic surface color. N. Water Cut -Off: At end of day's work, or when precl=19 Imminent. construct a water cut-0 lops of ????ff at all open edges. Cut-off* can using capholt or plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the resumption of rool"Ing. 0. Sealant: Apply a smooth continuous bead of the specified sealant at the exposed finish ply edge transition to metal floshings incorporated Into the roof system. 3.4 FIELD QUAUIY CONTROL AND INSPECTIONS A. Site Condition: Leave ell areas around job site free of debris, roofing materials, equipment and related Items after completion of job. B. Notification of Completion: Notify the manufacturer by means of manufacturer's printed Notification of Completion form of job completion in order to schedule a final inspection date. C. Final Insp ction/Post-Installation Meeting: Hold a meeting ct the completion of the project, attended by ealli parties that were present at the pro -job conference. A punch list of Items required for completion shall be compiled by the Contractor and the manufacturer's representative. Complete, sign, and mail the punch list form to the manufacturer's headquarters. 1). Issuance of the Guarantee: Complete all post installation procedures and meet the manufacturer's final endorsement for Issuance of the specified guarantee. SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shall of the building. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ers of skilled workmen who (ire thoroughly trained and experienced In the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations contained In current edition of *Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). C. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposes provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified. 2.1 MATERIALS AND GAGES A. Where sheet metal Is required, and no material or gage is indicated on the Drawings, provide the highest quality and gage commensurate with the referenced standards. B. Metal Roof Flashing: Shall be galvanized metal, 26 go,, In sizes and shapes Indicated on the drawings. C. Cap Flashing: Shall be formed true and accurate, in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Ail seems to be flat lock type, except at comers. Comers to be fabricated to minimum 18" x 18*, mitered, 1. Cap flashing finish to match metal canopy finish and siding color. soldered, and sealed In one place. 2.2 GALVANIZED IRON A. Provide shoot metal or sheet iron of a standard brand of open-hearth copper-boaring steel, copper -molybdenum Iran, or pure Iron sheets. 8 Zinc coating- �. Where galvanizing Is required, provide zinc coating by hot -dip galvanize to all surfaces. 2. Weight-, a. Provide not less than 1-1/4 oz per sq it, nor more than 1-1/2 oz per sq. ft,, to surfaces required to be 9?Ivanized. 3. Comply with ASTM A93, 2.3 NAILS, RIVETS, AND FASTENERS A. Use only soft Iron rivets having rust-resisttva coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium plated screws and washers In connection with galvanized Iron and steel, 2.4 FLUX A. Where flux is requlred, use row murictic acid. 2.5 SOLDER A. Where solder Is required, comply with ASTM B32. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative, fleshing and shoot metal are completely watertight. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. General: 1. Form shoot metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finh and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intf members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely. 2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Owner's Representative. turn exp back 1/2". S. Form. fabricate. and install shoot metal so as to adequately provide for sxpon� contraction in the finished Work. C. Weatherproofing: 1. Finish watertight and woothertight where to required, 2. Make lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 3. Make lock seams and lop seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 4. Where lop seams are not soldered, lop according to pitch, but in no case lai 5. Make flat and lop seems In the direction of flow. D. Joints; 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength an 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 40'-O". exi closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation. E. Nailing: Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing ,� ext. or metal. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8* apart and, wher 2. the weather, use neoprene washers. 3. For nailing Into wood, use barbed roofing nails 1-1/4" long by 1 1 gage, 4. For nailing Into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs. 3.3 EMBEDMENT A. Embed metal In connection with roofs In a solid bad of sealant, using moterlo described in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and methods advance. 3.4 SOLDERING A. General: 1. Thoroughly clean and tin the joint materials prior to soldering. 2. Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper, in order to heat the sec and to completely fill them with solder. 3. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinn ;. Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth. B. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution. 3.5 TESTS A. Upon request of the Owner's Representative, demonstrate by hose or standing flashing and sheet metal are completely watertight. SECTION 07610 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section Includes: The metal roofing over the drive-thru bump out on bul feature and all ficshings and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A361 - Steel Sheet, ZInc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process f, Siding. B. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, (Physical) Quality. . C. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt Impregnated Gloss Mot for Roofing and Waterproofing. D. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. E. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. F. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Fourth Edition. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A, Design Requirements: 1. Provide UL 90 rated roofing system that has been tested In accordance with procedure. 2. Provide factory performed panel systern that has been pro -tested and certifl manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under Installed conditions. B. Environmental Requirements: (Actual Independent laboratory certified test resul submitted). 1. Resistance to air infiltration: 0.059 ofm per lineal foot of I\joInt when testa with ASTM E283 at static test pressure differential of 6.24 psf. 2. Resistance to water infiltration: No leakage through panel joints when tested with ASTM E331 at static test pressure differential of 6.24 pef. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA and NRCA standard details and requi B. Regulatory Requtroments: Comply with requirements of applicable building codi agencies having jurisdiction for wind uplift rating of standing seam roofs. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Point Finish 1. Furnish manufacturer's standard 20-year warranty under provisions of Sectior architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: a. Free of fading or color change In excess of 5 NBS units as measured per D2244-66; b. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 7 when measured In accordi: cified in ASTM D659-74; a. Will not pool. crack, chip or delaminate. B. Installation I Provide twoIr ear warranty under provisions of Section 01700, 2: Warranty: clude coverage for water tightness Integrity of seats, 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. "Loksaam*, by MBCI Corp., (281) 445-8555. 2..*Snop-Lock", by Imatco, (770) 908-1030. 3. Z-Ioak Panel", by Berridge Mcnufccturing Co., (800) 231-8127. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Panels 1 24 gouge prefinishad golvalums sheet made up of 55X aluminum, 1.6X allicc bal � z a ce Inc, as described In ASTM specification A792. 2. Fabricate panels with sufficient thickness to meet specified UL 90 wind uplift 3. Factory fabricate panel with Integral continuous interlocking standing seem. 4. Provide factory installed, high-grade, hot -melt slostomeric sealant at standin 8, Clip/Fastener Assemblies: 1. Standard Clip: IS gouge galvanized steel, 33 kei yield strength, 2* long sini type. 2. Nallable substrate fasteners: #10 -12 x 1" long A -Point fastener, pancake drive screws for plywood, noncorrosive bass material. C. Accessories: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other Items essential to car standing seem roof installation. 2. Provide nylon seem end plugs for clean termination of panel. 3. Provide factory fabricated rib covers at roof slope transitions. 4. Provide transition rib covers where roofing changes directions. D. Field Sealant: 1. Color coordinated primeriess silicone or high grade, non-drying butyl as reca panel manufacturer. 2. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate In size, square, and free from dtotortio: B. Apply strippable coating to the top side of metal to protect finish during fabri and fiold handling. C� Hem exposed edges on underside % Inch, miter and seam comers. D. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward U inch and homme4 E. Fabricate flashings to allow too to extend 2 Inches over roofing fascia, Retur edges. F. Panels: 1. Provide factoty-formed panel width of 18 inch with 17" high standing seam. 2. Provide panels in full length from ridge to save. 3. Where single length panels are not practical provide mated swaged panels fol end lops, fabricated with overlap In direction of water flow. G. Seams: 1. Panel seams shall Interlock entire length of seam without use of field socir 2. Engineer standing seam to lock -up and resist joint disengagement during doi conditions. 3. Fabricate female log with pressure equalized capillary brook to prevent water throu gh 4. Pr=8factory sealant at standing seams to aid In resistance of looks and panel-to-ponal seal while allowing expansion and contraction movement. H. Clips: 1. Provide UL listed (standard) clip designed to allow panels to thermally expon( 2. Fabricate clips with embossments that raise underside of panels above substi underside/ventilation. 3. Fabricate clips with structurally embossed outstanding logo to prevent distortic uplift forces. 1. Enginear panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contractio fasteners in roofing panels will not be permitted. J. Provide factory save ponel notch for save termination. K, Match existing seams, clips and panels. 2.4 FINISH A. Fluorocarbon Coating: 1. Full-strsmgth 7OX Kynar 500? coating baked on for 15 minutes at 450 degr film thickness of 1.0 trill. 2. 15X reflective gloss (ASTM D523). (Low Gloss) 3. 0.3 trill baked -on epoxy primen 4. Color: Smooth Red PART 4 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify dock is clean and smooth, free of depressions, wo, projections. properly sloped to saves. B. Verify dock Is dry, Verify joints In wood dock are solidly supported and fastei 3.2 PREPARATION A. Felt Underloyment (solid substrate): 1. Provide one layer of No. 30 felt with horizontal overlaps and end lops staggi layers. 2. Lay parallel to ridge line with 2-'A* horizontal lapse and 6" vertical lops. B. Remove strippable coating before installation. §@%U@ - � . I 9@R999 I . �), IN J ihing molded ircepting other fl*- ",,- k osed edges A flon and n than 30. 11..# - stiffness. mpt where hrough the i exposed to s and methods approved in 'ns thoroughly U) ed for use. 9 V; � > water that the W a 2 < ta WW dIngs with this = 44 to � ir Roofing and 8 = 5tructural (n 101) - Will -* 8 �. �< C4 1 8 a I 0 UL 580 test 0 I I I I I I I d by 0 I 1 1� * s must be Z i in accordance In accordance rements. s and other 01700 stating ASTM ties with n and the requirements. seems. � le fastener . W It head Phillips . Z a N Q BE 0 W_ ,a) a a 0 iplatoness of 8= 0 %; 0: - UJ0Z < 6 I,& g eg nmended by � " 0 &f5 IN � I g j 1 9 0. I b I W wl ow )_ lZ a T U ;; .4 '. 0 ut 9 W - d) JnL i or defects. V a � � " u, � < fa,j W Z V sn 2 FE 1 , .,ation, shipping 0 � ri = 0 i.- UJ V7 < to form drip. JU 44 M 3E 003 1 � r^1 lm- I i and broke I � � a qe 00 o ZMO positive joint 0 ow (7 W L., 1_2 a a 8 i� 4 .0 40 =� J! rt 6 machines, g I g I Ign wind uplift 0 M 1; W siphoning -.a md a iE F_ § provide >_ 0 0. 0 I and contract. ata to allow U ri due to wind n. Exposed I C1 7 Z ies F to dry &� 0 .< _J d) � UU a- a W_ 6 > C== 3: 0 Ill-_ -1 LL f__ -4 ,es, or @9 :_J T d tj ed. 1.0 (C")) 0 40 -1 LU () _J P- red between U Q a A W_ -_ U�__ 7 00 U, IlL )Ii- �- = , IL W F >- 0 I- LU lir L N d) OA U 0 11 a 2 I I . SHEET I SP3 DWO: I 005080-SP3 � I �% IN 11 '11 0, tr M 9@09 9@09 Continued from SP3 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's Instructions for assembly, installation and erection. Install In i proved shop drawings. urely In place using clips and fasteners space In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria. C Fully seat adjacent panel to achieve continuous engagement of standing seam joint, D: Dissimilar Metals; 1. Where sheet metal Is in contact with dissimilar metals. execute juncture to facilitate drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action. 2. At point of contact with dissimilar metal. coat metal with protective point. E. Flashings 1. Conform to SMACNA details, Plates 61. 2. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. 3. Cleat and seam all joints. 4. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt floshings. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 5. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. F. Field apply sealant to penetrations, transitions, and other locations necessary (not standing seem) for airtight, waterproof Installation, 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of Installation, 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL k Field Inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Throughout the Work, seal end caulk joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and passage of air. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Ownees Representative, use only the types of sealants described in this Article. B. Provide one -component, polyurethane based compound complying with Fed Spec TT-S-00227c, with each color of sealant and each close of seclant the product of a single , manufacturer selected from the following, or equal products approved In advance by the Owner a Representative, 1. Interior Caulking and Sealant material for the building joints shall be equal to one of the following: a. No. 864 Architectural Silicon* Sealant, by Pecora, (215) 723-6051. b. No. 790 Silicone Building Sealant, by Dow Coming, (517) 496-6000. c. No. SCS 1000 Contractor's Silicone Sealant, by General Electric, (800) -3390. 332 2. Exterior Caulking and Sealant material for the building joints shall be equal to one of the following: a. Temoo Vulken 116 Gun Grade Polyurethans Sealant (800) 321-7906. b. Sonnebome NPI Gun Grade Polyurethans Sealant (800) 433-9517. c. No. SCS 1000 Contractor's Silicone Sealant, by General Electric, (800) 332-3390. 3. Primer. where required shall be used as recommended by manufacturer of sealant, having been tested for staining and durability on samples of actual surfaces to be sealed. 4. For other services, provide products especially formulated for the proposed use and approved in advance by the owner's Representative. C. Colors: I. Colors of sealant shall match adjacent wall material finish color. 2. Should such standard color not be available from the approved manufacturer except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost to the Owner. D. In concealed installations, and In partially or fully exposed Installations where so approved by the Owner's Representative, use standard groy or block sealant. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Use only those primers which are non -staining, have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be "clad, and are specifically recommended for this Installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used. 2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS A. Use only those backup materials which ore specifically recommended for this Installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used, which ore non -absorbent, and which are non -staining. S. Acceptable types Include: C. Preformed support strips for ceramic tile control joint and expansion joint work., Use polylsobutylems or polychloroprono rubber. 2.4 BOND -PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS A. Use only one of the following as best suited for the application, and an recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used: I. Polyethylene tape, prosaure-sonsitive adhesive, with the adhesive required only to hold tape to the construction materials as indicated-, 2.5 MASKING TAPE A. For masking around joints, provide masking tape complying with Fed Spec UU-T-106c. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative, PART 3 - EXECUTION ITI A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory candlitions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION 1. Install only an surfaces which are dry, sound. and well brushed, wiping free from dust. . 2. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air If so required. 3. Use solvent to remove oil and grease. wiping the surfaces with clean rags. 4. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing. 5. Remove laltance and mortar from joint cavities, S. Where backstop is required. Insert the approved backup into the joint cavity to the depth recommended by seciant manufacturer. B. Stool surfaces: I. Stool surfaces in contact with sealant: a. Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond. b. If sandblasting Is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the metal or wire brush to remove mill scale. c. Use solvent to remove all and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags, 2. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent which leaves no residue. C. Aluminum surfaces: 1. Aluminum Surfaces In contact with sealant a. Remove temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil, and grease. b, When masking tops Is used for protective cover, remove the tape prior to applying the sealant. 2. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for that purpose -staining. by the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and which are non 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL d A, Use only the backup material recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used, an approved for the particular installation, compressing the backup material 25X to 5OX to achieve a positive and secure fit. B. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock. 3.4 PRIMING A. Use only the primer recommended by the manufacturer of the Beclant, and approved for the particular installation, applying In strict accordance with the manufocturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.5 BOND -BREAKER INSTALLATION A. Provide an approved bond -breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, adhering strictly to the installation recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. Prior to start of installation In each joint. verify the joint type according to details on the Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative, and verify that the required proportion of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured. S. Equipment-t 1. Apply sealant under pressure with power -actuated or hand gun, or by other appropriate means. a 2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to completely fill th joints as designed. C. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of sealant on adjacent surfaces would be objectionable. D. Install the sealant In strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth, E. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required If such profiles are not shown on the Drawings. F. Precautions: 1. Install the Sealant in strict accordance with the manufactures printed instructions and warnings. 2. Provide proper and adequate ventilation during the application, during installation. and until properly cured or dry. 3. Provilds proper and adequate application, storage, and disposal of the Sealant to prevent potential of an environmental hazard. G. Cleaning up: 1. Remove masking tape Immediately after joints hove been tooled, 2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the manufacture of the sealant used. SECTION 08100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide metal doom and frames, which are not specifically described In other Sections of these Specifications. where shown on the Drawings. as specified heroin, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DOORS A. Type and design: 1. Provide full -flush design, In dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, labeled or non -labeled as indicated on the Door Schedule in the Drawings, In 18 gaug: for interior doors and 16 gage for exterior doors, properly reinforced for the finish hardware secribed In Section 08710 of these Specifications, a. Provide G90 galvanization on all exterior doors and frames. 2' type, Heavy Duty, Grade 11, 1-3/4' thick. S. Finish. 1. Pro -clean and shop prime (with baked -on zinc chromate point) each door for finish painting which will be performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications. C. Acceptable products: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doom and Frames" (SDI-100), except as otherwise Indicated by specific requirements on Drawings or these Specifications. 2. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) (is required for fire rated assemblies. 3. Cold rolled stretcher leveled steel face Sheets full flush construction, conforming with ASTM A366, 4. Face shoots connected together with continuous vertical steel stiffeners spaced 6* maximum on center. 5. Face sheets to most at both edges of door and weld to internal 14 gage continuous strip. Exposed joint filled and ground smooth. 6. Close and reinforce top and bottom of door with channels, full width of door. 7. Exterior doors shall have tops closed (waterproof) by 14 gouge continuous channel welded, filled, and ground smooth. Tops must not collect water. 8. Provide door with polystyrene core, laminated to Inside faces for Insulation and sound deadening. 9. Concealed reinforcement for hardware (some as for frames). D. Acceptable manufacturers: Provide doors by one of the following acceptable manufacturers: 1. D-Seriies doors by Fleming, (800) 263-7515. 2. H.M. w/polystyrene core, by North American Door Corp., (800) 660-3550. 3. F-Series doors, by CECO Door Products, (615) 661-5030. 2.2 METAL FRAMES A. Type and design: 1. Provide frames of the types and dimensions shown on the Drawings, labeled or non -labeled as indicated on the Door Schedule in the Drawings, In 18 gage for interior doors and 16 gages for exterior doors. 2. Shop assembled, full mitered welded joints. All edges closed to hairline fit. 3. Mitered faces welded and ground smooth. 4. Adjustable floor knees, and 3 anchors minimum each jamb (max. 24" o.c. Spacing). 5, Ship frames with spreader angles at bottom. 6. Frames shall fit wall thickness as specified with a 1/2* lop for 5/8" gypsum board walls, 7. Frame returns shall be 2*. 8. Door frame jambs shall be prepared to receive 4-1/2" template hinges (for 13/4" doors) and 4-7/8* A.S.A. strike Plates unless specified otherwise. Obtain templates from hardware supplt*r. 9. Reinforcement shall be available for the attachment of surface mounted closure$ when specified. 10. Reinforce heads to support weight of non-loadboaring partitions above frame, 11. Furnish rubber silencers. 3 for single doors, 2 for double doors, and drill frames for some. S. Finish: 1. Pro -clean and shop prime (with baked -on zinc chromate point) each frame for finish painting which will be performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications. 1 C. Acceptable manufacturers: Provide F-16 Series frames by Fleming or aqua products by one of the acceptable manufactures listed In Paragraph 2.1-D above, 2.3 FINISH HARDWARE A. Secure templates from the finish hardware supplier, and accurately Install, or make prevision for, all finish hardware at the factory. PART 3 - EXECUTION ITI A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Sectiom will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Placing frames: 1. Where practicable, place frames prior to construction of nolosing walls and ceilings. a 2. Set frames accurately Into position. plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. After wall construction Is completed, remove temporary bracts and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 4. At In -place construction, set frames end secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and suitable anchorage devices, Provide *Z* filters at each screw location. 5. Install doors with 1/16* clearance at hood and lamb, 3/8* clearance at floors, and 1/8' clearance at thresholds with no binding. Install labeled doors In accordance with local codes and NFPA Pamphlet No. 80. 6. Doors shall not bind, stick, scratch or be mounted as to cause future hardware difficulties. 7. Fit all hardware, weatherstripping, thresholds and seals, in cocordomi:6 with manufacturer's printed Instruction. Adjust door closing devices prior to final Inspection. S. Install fire -rated frames In accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Final adjustments: 1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items In hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. 2. Leave work In complete and proper operating condition. 3. Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified requirements. 0. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch-up of compatible air-dryling primer. SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide aluminum doors and frames where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 2.1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: For purposes of these specifications, provide products by United States Aluminum Corp,, (800) 627-6440. Equal products by the following manufacturers shall be acceptable: 1, No. 190 Narrow Stile, by Kawneer Corp., (770) 449-5555. 2. NS 72, Amolits Narrow Style, by Arch. Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc., (800) 432-al32. S. Materials: 1. ENTRANCES: - a. Aluminum entrances shell be United States Aluminum No. 250, narrow Stile doom. b. Vertical Stiles shall be 2'. top rail shall be 2-1/80, and bottom roil 10". c. Comer construction shall consist of both sigma deep penetration weld and bottom fastening. d. Glazing stops shall be snap -in type with neoprene bulb 4" glazing. No exposed screws shall be required to secure stops. Stops on exterior side shall be lock -in tamper proof type. a. Door loof shall be equipped with adjustable mechanism located In top rail near lock Stile, which will provide for minor clearance adjustments after installation. f. Provide with nylon pad Setting blocks for glazing bead with offset lovelizer to allow adjustment of glazing. g. Hardware for all doors shall be equal to the following unless Indicated otherwise and shall match entrance finish. 2. PNOTS: Doors to be (Center -hung, Double Acting) or (Offest-hung, Single-AcIting) as indicated on the drawings. S. THRESHOLDS: Aluminum 1/2* x 4". with weatherproof odapter. Provide one piece, full width of all door openings. 7. WEATHER-STRIPPING: Provide 'Wool" pile weather-stripping. Provide bottom roil weather-strip at all exterior doors. 8 GLAZING: To be 14" thick, tempered clear glass. thickness 9: STOREFRONT. Aluminum door frames shall hove 1?" x 4%" profile and 0.125" wall as manufactured by United States Aluminum. 10. FINISHES: Door and frame aluminum finish to be anodized bronze. 2.2 FINISH HARDWARE A. Prepare for, receive, and Install the finish hardware furnished under Section 08710 of these Specifications. Provide any other hardware not specifically listed, but required for proper door operation. S. Procedures: 1. Perform all fitting of finish hardware to doom and frames at the factory; except do not drill or top for surface mounted items until time of installation at the site. 2 Comply with finish hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. 3: use concealed fasteners to the maximum extent practicable. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate anodized aluminum frame to allow for clearance and shim space around perimeter of assemblies, to enable Installation. Provide for thermal movement. 8, Fabricate In strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and Shop Drawings as approved by the Owner's Representative, prefabricating In the shop to the maximum extent practicable. C. Provide hairline fit at joints, with smooth continuity of line and accurate rotation of planes fasten. PART 3 - EXECUTION ITI A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions ore corrected, 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for Interface with the work of this Section. 8. Make measurements as required In the field to assure proper fit. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section In strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended Installation procedures as approved by the Owner's Representative, ri nents firmly Into position for long life. B. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as progress of the Work will permit with safety. C When glazing to performed under this Section, provide the types of glass required and glaze in �ccordcncs with pertinent provisions of Section 08800 of these Specifications. D. Anchors and Bracing. Properly locate and fasten anchoring devices Into structure. E. Dissimilar materiels: Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting steel or other ferrous metals using EC-1202 tape or chromate point. Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting concrete or masonry using asphalt mastic. Apply isolation materials to dissimilar surfaces. SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1, 1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide aluminum doors and frames where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS . A. Acceptable Manufacturers: For purposes of these Specifications, provide products by United States Aluminum Corp., (800) 627-6440, Equal products by the following manufacturers shall be acceptable: 1. Tri-fab, by Kowneer Corp., (770) 449-5555. 2. NR6 Thermal, by Arch. Alum & Glass, Co., (800) 433-8132. S. Materials: 1. ALUMINUM WINDOWS; Types 1. 2. 3. and 4, shell be approximately 1-1/4' x 2-1/2' sash, profile no. M-22i. 2. GLAZING: Fixed lites shall be 5/8" thick, double pone, sealed Insulating glass, both tiles clear. 3. FINISHES- Anodized Bronze. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate In strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and Shop Drawings as approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Provide extruded penning and/or extenders as detailed on the drawings for complete closure of opening. Contractor shall coordinate with the vinyl sidIng or other exterior finish requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed, Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work, Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate aa required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for Interface with the work of this Section. B. Make measurements as required In the field to assure proper fit. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section In strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended Installation procedures as approved by the Owner's Representative, nents firmly into position for long life. ARDWARE 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. Furnish finish hardware required to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein; 2, Furnish trim attachments and fastenings, specified or otherwise required, for proper and complete Installation; 3. Deliver to the job site those items of finish hardware scheduled to be Installed at the job site; and deliver to other points of Installation those Items of finish hardware scheduled to be factory Installed. 4. Comply With requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and any applicable state or local code. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lockeets, hinges, closers, etc.) from only one manufacturer, even though several are indicated as acceptable manufacturers. 1.3 TEMPLATES A. Furnish necessary templates and template data to manufacturers of items that will The fitted With finish hardware in ample time to avoid delay in the work. B. Furnish hordwcre with required screws, bolts and fasteners necessary for installation, packaged In some packages with hardware, Including instructions (no keys). C. Legibly mark and adequately label each package indicating part of work for which hardware is intended. Markings shall correspond to numbers on approved hardware schedule. D. Deliver hardware for shop application to factories of respective manufacturers in ample time In order not to Impede progress of their work, 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following hardware schedule is based on several manufacturers. Additional acceptable Manufacturers/Products are as follows: 1. Thresholds: a. 43258 x length, by Hagar. (800) 325-9995. b. No. 227 x length, Pernko, (800) 283-9988, 2. Panic Device-. a. 700007, by Alarm Lock, (613) 842-9400. b. 9300A. by Dorma, (800) 523-8354. 3. Closures: a. No. 4041, by LCN, (815) 875-331 1. b No 7SOIDS, by Dorma. (800) 523-a384. I W. W;atherstripping: a. WSGO3 AJ. by Ultra Industries, (323) 260-7330. b. No. 303, by Pemko, (800) 283-9986. 5. Door Bottom: c. D8037, by Ultra Industries, (323) 260-73,30. b. No. 345, by Pemko, (aoo) 2a3-9988, S. Drip Cap: a. WS025, by Ultra Industries, (323) 260-7330. b. No. 348, by Pemko, (800) 283-0988. 7. Hinges: a. 881279, by Hager, (314) 772-4440. b. 881079, by Morthard, (800) 363�6120. a. Stops: a. 122R. by TrImco, (323) 262-4191. b G544. by Glen Johnson, (800) 525-0336. F. silencers: a. 1229A. by Trimco, (323) 282-4191. b. G566, by Glen Johnson, (800) 525-0336. a. 307D. by Hager, (314) 772-4440. S. Cylinders and a anufactured by Schloge. No Substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Butt Hinges: Full mortise template hinges, S-knuckle type, plain-becring and ball -bearing as noted on schedule. tion as S. Lockesto and Lctchoets; Schloge AL Series cylindrical lockod lovers; Saturn design, fume listed on schedule. Backests and strike types as required by conditions. C. Furnish silencers for door frames at the rate of three for each single door and two for each door or pair of doors, except w*ather-stripped doors end doors with light seals or sound goals. D. Weatherstripping; Provide wootherstripa at all exterior hollow metal door lambs and heads. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials. not spectfically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. 2.4 FINISHES A. US 26D on all hardware, unless noted otherwise. 2.5 KEYING A. Keying system shall be a Schloge grand -master key system (No Substitutions). Final keying shall be in accordance with Owner's requirements and approved keying schedule. Supplier shall most with the Owner or his representative in order to finalize keying requirements. S. Lock keys, knock -out keys and master and grand-moster keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner's Representative by the Hardware Supplier. C. Keys shall be togged with Lund C 1607 togs Indicating the door number shown on the architectural drawings. D. Furnish three (3) keys for each lock and deliver to Owner's Representative. 2.6 TOOLS AND MANUALS A. With the delivery of permanent keys, deliver to the Owner one complete set of adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals for lockeeta, latcheds, closers, and panic devices. Hardware Set No. 1 1 Sgl Or #101A Exterior FM Vast 101 Y-0*0-0*0-3/4' RHR AL x AL I Sgi Or #101B Exterior FM Vast 101 3'-O"x7'-O*x1-3/4* LHR AL x AL 2 so Mortise Cylinder 30-008-613 Schloge 2 so Threshold 327x36" National Guard 2 so Door Stop 267FxUS26D Hager Balance of hardware by door manufacturer Hardware Set No. 1 A 1 SgI Dr #103 Exterior FM DT-Window 103 2!-6*x7'-O"x1-3/4" LHR AL x AL 1 cc Mortise Cylinder 30-008-613 Schloge so National Guard Balance of hardware by door manufacturer Hardware Set No. 2 I Sgi Or #108 Exterior FM Receiving 108 3'-8*x7'-O'xI-3/4* RHR HMD x HMF 2 pr. Butte BB1191 4.5x4.5x63OxNRP Hager I Exit Device V40XEB Detex I I/C Rim Cylinder 20-057-626 Schloge I I/C Cores 23-03EVx626xCI23 Schloge I Door Closer 85OISFxAL Norton I Kickplate I 90S I O*x42*x630 Hager I Threshold 324ALx44" National Guard I Weatherstrip 1 1 ONS 44*x84" National Guard I Door Bottom 102AV-44* Notional Guard o National Guard I Reinforcement Pivot 253XU$26 Stanley 12*x2C Hager Hardware Set No. 3 I Sgl Or #109 Exterior FM Utility 109 V-0"0-O"x1-3/4" LHR HMD x HMF 1.5 pr Butts 885000 4.5x4.5x63OxNRP Sommer I Locked AL8OPDxSATx626XIO-O25 Schlogs I I/C Corse 23-O3EVx626xCI23 Schloge I Threshold 324ALx36* National Guard National Guard I Wootherstrip 11ONS 36*x84" I Drip Cap IWx4O* Notional Guard I Door Sweep 102V-36* Notional Guard C I Cone Bolt D1009-12"x2C Hager Hardware Set No. 4 10 3'-O"x7'-O*xI-3/4" HMD x HMF I Sgl Or #1 1 1 Restroom 1 1 1 3'-O*x7'-O*xI-3/4" HMD x HMF 3 pr Butte 885000 4.5x4.5x63OxNRP Sommer 2 Privacy Looked AL4OSxSATx626XlO-O25 Schloge 2 Kickplate 190S 10"x34*430 Hager 2 Door Closer 8501BFxAL Norton 2 Wall Stops 23SWx630 Hager I Signage HC "Women* 0 110 (Mounted to side of door - ref plan) 1 1 (Mounted to side of door - ref plan) The following Is additional hardware (per door) where doom are used In exterior walls 1 Deadlock 8660JDX626 Sommer I Threshold 324ALx36* Notional Guard 1 Weatherstrip IIONS 36*x84* Notional Guard National Guard 1 Door Sweep 102V-36" Notional Guard Hardware Set No. 5 I Sgi Dr #1 12A Ext to Restroom Vast 112 3'-O"x7'-O"x1-3/4" LH HMD x HMF 1.5 pr Butte B85000 4.5x4,5x63OxNRP Sommer 1 Latchset ALIOSxSATx626XIO-025 Schloge I Dbl Cyl Deadlock 866ORD4264-3/e Schloge 1 VC Cores 23-03EV4264123 Schloge 1 Door Closer 8501BFxAL Norton I Kickplate 190S 110*x34"430 Hager . 1 Threshold 324ALx36" Notional Guard I WoothereW I IONS 36'xBe National Guard I P I Door Bottom 102V-36" National Guard I Signage "Restroomrs' (Mounted to side of Door) Hardware Set No. 6 I Sgl Or #1 128 RR Vast 112 to Rec'g 108 3'-O*x7'-O"x1-3/4" RHR HMID x HMF 1.5 pr Butte 885000 4,5x4.5x63OxNRP Sommer 1 Latched ALBOPDxSATx626XlO-O25 Schloge I I/C Cores 23-03EV4264123 Schloge I Door Closer 8501BFxAL Norton 2 Kickplates I 90S 1 O*x3ex630 Hager I Threshold 324ALx36" National Guard I Door Bottom 102V-36" Notional Guard I Signage 'This door to remain unlocked during business hours* PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION; HARDWARE A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended In "Recommended locations for BuIlder's Hardware by NSHA except as required to comply with governing regulations. B. Install each hardware Item In compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wh rover cutting and fitting Is required to Install hardware onto or Into surfaces which are lat:r to be pointed or finished in another way. Install each item completely and then remove and store In a secure place during the finished opplication. After completion of the finishes, re -install each item. Do not Install surface -mounted Items until finishes have bean completed on the substrate. C. Adjust and check each operating Item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as Intended for the application made. D. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware fi nishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION; WEATHERSTRIPPING AND THRESHOLDS A. Weatherstrip all exterior doors at heads. jambs and Stile in a manner to completely seal the openings. B. Install an extruded aluminum threshold at all exterior wood doors unless noted otherwise by the details on the Drawings. curately fitt thresholds to door openings. Set thresholds In full bed of non-ferrous screws and expansion shields at V-O" o.c. D. Scribe ends of thresholds to door frames. E. At completion of job, adjust oil wootherstripping for ease of operation. Shim as required. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean up material, carton, packages, and other debris for the job site. Replace any damaged material. SECTION 09220 - LATH AND PLASTER 1.1. DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all Portland cement piaster, metal loth, trim, accessories, and installation. PART 2 ? PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Building Paper: 15# asphalt Impregnated paper. B. Metal Loth: Galvanized metal, self -furred, expanded or woven wire with booking, (ASTM 847 or ASTM 01032) C. Comer and Casing Beads: Zinc alloy expanded flange, or plastic components (polyvinyl -chloride). D. Mechanical Fasteners: Non -corrosive, self taping, with hood or washer added so that fastener hood holds the loth. E. Tie Wire: Galvanized stool, 16 gouge, soft annealed. F. Aggregates: Natural or manufactured sand comforming to ASTM 0897. G. Water. Shall be clear, clean and potable without foreign matter. H. Cement: Type I or 11 Portland cement meeting ASTM C150. 1. Additive for Portland Cement. Acryl 60 as manufactured by There System Products. J. Finishing Coat, Thoroesol Picater Mix, Color shell be #447, "There Gray*, waterproof coating by There. K. Color Coat- Thorocoat, IOOX Acrylic, color shall be #447, "There Gray", texture shall be fine, as manufactured by There System Products. L Contact There System Products, a division of Chemrox for any additional Information or for local suppliers at (800) 433-9517. 2.2 MIXES A. Proportions: to feet 1. Scratch coat. 94 pounds portland cement, 40 to 50 pounds lime and 5 to 6 cub� send. 2. Brown coat: 94 pounds portland cement, 50 pounds lime, and 6 to 7 cubic feet send. B. Finish Coat: Mix In accordance with manufactursea Instructions. C. Mixing: 1. Mechanically mix materials. Thoroughly mix materials dry before adding water, 2 Clean equipment after each batch. 3: Discard frozen, caked, and hardened mixes; do not retemper. PART 3 ? EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATH � A. Install over building paper attached with nails to plywood substrate. B. Apply with long dimension perpendicular to supports. with and joints staggered. Secure and tops with tie wire where they occur between supports. C Lop ends minimum 1 Inch and sides minimum 1-1/2 inches. D: Secure to metal framing with wire ties at maximum 6 Inches on center. E. Cut and secure lath at each side of control joints. F. Reinforce comers of openings with 6 x 12 Inch loth strip Installed diagonally at each comer, wire tied to loth. G. If loth Is mot continued minimum 3 inches on each side of Internal comers, reinforce with 12 inch wide loth strip bent at 90 degrees and wire tied to loth. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Set level end true to line; securely wire tie to loth, B. Casing Beads: Install where plaster abuts dissimilar material or stops with edge exposed. Install around door, window, and louvered openings so that a 34" wide joint for caulking Is created and framing. Install casing beads at all areas where wall panels end against concrete floors leaving a 'A* wide joint for caulking C. Comer Beads: Install at external comers. D. Control Joints: 1. Run vertical joints continuous; butt horizontal joints into vertical joints. 2. Apply sealant to form waterstop, behind joints at Intersections, 3. Install joints with flange under salf-furrtng loth. See drawings for specific control joint locations. E. All joints and casing beads at Intersections and terminations should be embedded in and weather-secled with caulking. 3.3 APPLICATION OF PLASTER A. Apply piaster by hand or machine In accordance with ASTM C 920. a Apply scratch, brown, and finish coats to minimum 5/8 inch thickness from face of loth. C: Dampen each coat prior to applying succeeding coats. D. Scratch Coat: 1. Apply to nominal 3/8 Inch thickness. 2. Form full keys on loth. Cross make surface to bond brown coat. 3. Damp cure. E, Brown Coat: 1. Apply to nominal 3/8 Inch thickness. 2. Bring out to grounds and rod level. 3. Dcmp cure. F. Finish Coat: 1 Apply to nominal 1/8 Inch thickness. 2: Work from wet edges to apply unbroken area in one continuous operation to eliminate joints. 3. Apply texture to match approved samples. 4. Finish surfaces true to plane, plumb and with neat, sharp corners and Intersections, 5. Work in panels to moored natural break formed by Intersections, corners, trim, and accessories. 6. Tool plaster to V-joInt at trim, grounds and accessories. 7. Wet finish coat periodically for minimum 48 hours after application; apply as much water as is readily absorbed. G. Installation Tolerance: Surfaces true to 1/4 Inch In 10 feet. 3.4 COLOR COAT A. Apply per manufoaturem recommendations. B. Apply color coot, fine, by roller, brush or plaster type finish sprayer. When using roller, finish strokes should finish in the some direction. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Repair or replace damaged, discolored, and defective plaster. Match patched areas to surrounding plaster, 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean trim and accessories. SECTION 09260 ? GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS PART I ? GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide gypsum drywall and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. PART 2 ? PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. General: 1. Provide gypsum we Ilboord complying with Fed Spec SS?L?3OD, in 45" widths and In such lengths as will result n a minimum of joints. 2. Gypsum board shall be M", with tapered long edges. 3. Flro?retardant wallboard. Provide type 111, grade X, class 1, 5/8* thick. Provide behind and adjacent to all kitchom heads. 4. Woter?residont wallboard: Provide type MI. grade W or X as required, class 2, 5/8* (thick except as may be Shown otherwise on the Drawings) at Map Sink. 5. At the Contractor's Option, and at no additional charge to the Owner, 5/8* Type 'WR-X' may be used throughout the building for simplicity of ordering, storage, and construction. 2.2 LIGHT GAUGE METAL STUDS A. Load bearing cold -rolled metal framing shall be as specified in Section 05400. B. Unless noted otherwise, Light gouge metal etude for Non-loodboaring interior partlittone shall be equal to USG ST10 Style studs, 25 gouge, 3-5/8* wide, spaced 16"o.c. 2.2 LIGHT GAUGE METAL STUDS A. Load bearing cold -rolled metal framing shall be as specified in Section 05400. B. Unless noted otherwise, Light gouge metal etude for Non-loodbooring Interior partitions shall be equal to USG ST10 Style studs, 25 gouge, 3-5/5* wide, spaced 16"o.c. 2.2 METAL TRIM A. Form from zinc?coated steel not lighter than 26 gouge, complying with Fed Spec QQ?S?775, typo 1. class d or e. B. Casing beads: 1. Provide channel?shopes with an exposed wing, and with a concealed wing not less than 7/8* wide. 2. The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to the metal, but shall be suitable for joint treatment. C. Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with wIngs not less than 7/8* wide arld perforated for nailing and joint treatment, or with combination metal and paper wings bonded together, not lose than 1?1/4* wide and suitable for joint treatment. 0. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings: 1. Provide angle shapes with wing* not less than 3/4* wide. 2. Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing, and exposed wing edge folded flat. 3. Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color. 2.3 JOINTING SYSTEM A. Provide a jointing system, Including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as a system to be used together end as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use on this Work, S. Jointing compourid may be used for finishing if so recommended by Its manufacturer. 2.4 FASTENING DEVICES A. For fastening gypsum wallboard In place on metal etude and metal channels. use flot?head :crows, shouldered, specially designed for use with power?driven tools. not less than I' long. with elf?topping threads and self?drilling points. B. For fastening gypsum wallboard In place on wood, use 1?1/4" type W bugle?head screws, or usa annular ring type molls complying with ASTM 0514 and of the length required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Rep. 2.7 MANUFACTURER A. Provide all gypsum wallboard and trim as manufactured by United States Gypsum (U.S.G.), �808jhelr34-23711. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. "Gold Bond". by National Gypsum Company, (800) 628-4662. 2. "Gyproc*. by Pacific Corp -Gypsum Products, (800) 284-5347. PART 3 ? EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct cond Itions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory condtt;ons are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard in cccordance with the Drawings and with the separate boards in moderate contact but not forced Into place. 2. At Internal and external comers, conceal the cut edges of the boards by the overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards. 3. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical comers. 4. Need slip joint at top of etude where attachment to to clock. S. Walls: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard to etude at right angles to the furring or framing members. 2. Make end joints. where required, over framing or furring members. C. Attaching: 1. Drive the specified screws with clutch?controlled power screwdrivers, spacing the Screws B" on centers at ceilings and 12" on centers at walls. 2. Where framing members are spaced 24* apart on walls, space screws 12" on centers. 3. Attach double layers In accordance with the pertinent codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Attach to wood as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. General: 1. Inspect areas to be joint treated. verifying that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against supporting framework, 2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, end unt:I joint and finishing compounds hove dried. 3 4y the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. 4: Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time In poody ventilated areas. S. Embedding compounds: 1. Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads In a thin uniform layer. 2. Spread the compound not less than 3" wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape In the joint, I and embed the tops in the compound, Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. 3. After this treatment has drled, apply a second coat If embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading In a thin uniform coat to not less than 8' wide at joints, and feather edged. 4. Sandpaper between coots as required. 5. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points. C. Finishing compounds: 1. ound Is thoroughly dry and has been completely Bonded, apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads. 2. Feather the finishlmg compound to not less than 12" wide. 3. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care to ff the paper surface of the wallboard. 3.4 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal comers: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly into the corner, S. External comers: 1. Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the comer and securing with the come type fasteners used for installing the wallboard. 2. Space the fasteners approximately 6" on centers, and drive through the wallboard into the framing or furring member, 3. After the comer bead has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint compound and rainforcin tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8" to 10' on each side of 11he comer, 3.5 OTHER METAL TRIM A. General: 1. The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal trim. 2. Carefully Study the Drawings and the Installation, and provide all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use In this Work. B. Control Joints: Space at 30'-O' OC maximum. Locate over door heads, borrowed tiles, etc. in line with metal frames. 3.6 CLEANING UP A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary core to prevent scattering gypsum d dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces. S. At completion of each segment of installation In a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap, debris, end surplus material of this Section. OUS TILE BACKER BOARD A. Work Included: Provide gypsum drywall end accessories where shown on the Drawings, as 1.1 DESCRIPTION specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. 2.1 CEMENTITIOUS TILE BACKER BOARD A. Provide fiber reinforced cement tile backer board, %0 thick (or 5/8". see drawings). B. Provide backer board by one of the following: 1. "Ourock", by USG, (888) 834-2371. . 2. "Permabose", by National Gypsum Co., (704) 365-7300. 3. "Gyproc Moisture Guard", by Georgia Pacific -Gypsum Products, (800) 284-5347. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Provide cement tile backer board as manufactured by United States Gypsum (U.S.G.). 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 ? EXECU71ON ITI A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct l to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install the comentitious backer board in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and as shown on the drawings. 2. Install with 1/8* thick shims where used in conjunction with 5/8* gypsum wallboard. SECTION 09270 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELS 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide fiberglass wall panels where shown on the Drawings. as specified herein and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed herein are as manufactured by Marlite (330) 343-6621. B. Pt,her acce, able manufactures: G asbord �t 1. - .. by Kemilts Company, (800) 435-0080. 2. Vass A". by Losco, (859) 371-7720. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 3/32" thick, 4'x8' panels, P-100 " . White", Pebble finish, Close C/111 B. Where higher fire rating may be required by local codes, provide panels of Class A/I rating. C. Provide PVC outside corner guard, M-961, P-100 "White*. D. FRP accessories including adhesives, corner trims, division trim, and edge trim shall be as indicated on the drawings, or as otherwise required for a complete and proper installation. E. Silicone sealant shall be am specified In Section 07900. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Trim: Vinyl Molding Trim as supplied by the manufacturer of the panels for comers, vertical joints, openings and ceiling Intersections. B. Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets, C. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation, ce selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 ? EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIO A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation of panels shall be In strict accordance with the manufccturer's recommendations. B. C. Promptly upon completion of Installation, clean all exposed surfaces with methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer of the panels. SECTION 09306 - QUARRY TILE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quarry tile floor finish using the Lotex-Portland Cement mortar application moth A. ANSI A108.5 ? Installation of Quarry Tile with Portland Cement Mortar. a' ANSI AIOSAO - Installation of Grout in Tislework. C. ANSI A118.4 - Lotex-Portiond Cement Mortar. D. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. F. ANSI A137.1 ? Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. G. ICA (Tile Council of America) - Current Edition Handbook for Ceramic Tile lnst 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer. Company specializing In manufacturing the Products specified In with minimum three years documented experience B. Installer. Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with mli perience, and approved by tile manufacturer. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment, B. Maintain 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during Installation of mortar materials. 2.1 TILE MANUFACTURERS a i be VxV with abrasive groin and cove base trims to match. B. Color. "Ashen Grey*, T03 C. Provide Quarry Textures tile as manufactured by Dal -Tile Corp. or equal. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar Materiels: ANSI A118.4 Latex Modified, Portland cement, Sand and late) 2.3 GROUT MATERIALS A. Grout: ANSI A118.6, tile grout. B. Color No. 47, *Charcoal" C. Provide grout from the Classic Collection as manufactured by Mapol, equal to 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum 2.5 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion comontitious materials for site mcde mortar bed and bond 2.6 ANTIFRACTURE MEMBRANE A. Mix and proportion comentitious materials for site made mortar bed and bond c PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARA11ON A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. S. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install tile and grout In accordance with TCA Handbook, F113-03 Installation me S. Install smooth and non -slip floor tile as scheduled on the drawings. C. Lay tile to pattern indicated, Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. F at locations scheduled D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases ne and base joints. E. Place tile joints uniform In width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tl rInto watertight, without voids, cracks. excess mortar, or excess grout. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Appi sealant to joints H: Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior Zo grouting. 1. Grout tile joints. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials, junction of dissimilar p control joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01710. B. Clean tile and grout surfcces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK I A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01640. S. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after Installation. CEILINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide acoustical ceilings where shown on the Drawings, as sp4 and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and exper necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements al needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Qualification of Installer: Minimum of 3 previous project installations of compair C. Fire Hazard Classification: 1. Maximum Flame Spread: UL (ASTM E84): 25. 2. Smoke Developed: 0 2.1 'To GRID SYSTEM A. Provide a complete system of supporting members, anchors, wall cornices. adc fixtures and grilles, and accessories of every type required for a complete suspend system of the arrangements shown on the Drawings. and complying with pertinent Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and the governmental agencies having jurisdiction. ( B. Provide a "T" grid system, aluminum capped, 15/16", white color. C. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12 gouge, galvanized, soft -annealed, mild stool wire. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. For the purpose of these specifications, the following are acceptable monufc products: a. Prelude 7300 series, by Armstrong World industries, (717) 397-0611. b. 1530 Series, by Chicago Metallic Corp, (708) 563-4600. c. ZXA System, by U.S.G. Interiors, Inc. (888) 834-2371. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Materials- 1. Coiling tiles shall be Stipple pattern, vinyl -faced gypsum lay -in panels, whit4 %" thick, 24"x48", square edge. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. For the purpose of these specifications, the following are acceptable monufc products. a. No. 3270, by U.S.G. Interiors, Inc. (868) 834-2371. b. Clean Room VL, by Armstrong World ridustries, (717) 397-0611. c. Endure Vinyl Panels, by Chicago Metallic Corp, (708) 563-4600. 2.3 OTHER MATERIAUS 2. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete installaVion, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's F PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be per Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do nol unsatisfactory conditions are corrected, 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Except as modified by requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdictio recommendations of the manufacturer as approved by the Owner's Representative, directions of the Owner's Representative, Install in accordance with ASTM C636. B. Lateral bracing: 1. Provide lateral bracing as requirad by pertinent codes end regulations. 2. Secure lateral bracing to structural members. Secure at right angles to the dtre partition and four ways In large coiling areas. C. Provide hold-down clips for coiling broods In stockroom and elsewhere so reqi governmental agencies having jurisdiction. D. Make all grid level within a tolerance of one in 1000 and straight within toleron 1000. E. Space main toes at 48" o,c., suspend from structure with hanger wire spaces c Install additional hanger wires at ends of each suspension member and at light fix F. Space cross tees at 24* o.c., connect to main toes. Space sub cross toes b 24* o.c. Rest main end cross toes on wall moldings. 3.3 CLEANING UP traces of soil from surfaces of grid and acoustical materials, using only those clai A. In addition to other stipulated requirements for cleaning, completely remove fing, recommended for the purpose by the manufacture of the material being cleaned. I , 9@RM9 1§1@11MA9 I �$_ 1YI )d. (,- 11�. I �,N )llotton. this section - ilmum three additive. I Wapoi-Kerapoxy. 0 Z I 0 0 > coat. W 29 oat. a Z < 0 Nu =1 to 4a � a thod. a 0 I I I I I I I lace thresholds atly. Align floor au 1 [a size. Make or. < 8, to I 0 anes and In - - - - - 0 I- I 41+1�* Z cified heroin, lenced in the id the methods ible size. 1 pters for light ed "r grid ,equiremento of Ion -fire rated). oturem and 111.11 *1 . color, norr iincl Z 1>v -4 M 111116 0 a t- = � 0 I �_ V cx - W29 (A < a � cturers and I= Z R I:= C4 If5 0 I � T 9 1L ; RJ-J 09 15 � a �Za 0 )_ - (Z in I A ­ V Z .4 .. on x0g, 0 and proper bitrosent"ve. . LL (A a V 6 P, 0 W � a U in -2 FE Z I a n 0 i.-_ 0 u, In -< � 10 M #A :9 003 I g formed. proceed until -1 < �- I--.1W 61 -V 0002 ZMC3 a i, wow (" % W FE I iEw )r specific a ago 0 a 2 �, the 4p. X g P-m g C 315 I :tion of n � M, 65 � I Ired by the a F_- g § .9 of one in )P- t 48" o.c. 1111116 0 1 ure comers. � cross toes at V ir print$ and ming materials I () 7 6 r_�__ � .4 (L a d) 1 W W_ 6 > I— 0 -1 =3 *- C== 3.. @g _1 LL , T *.- A 0 (M-) L0 &W�_ 0 ") 40 -A _J 0 �u U - Q :r CA WE U - :1 0 C== Z .. 16M �_ �- = 0- L-U I 0 � ui 4 N I L ,eq 0) OA V V5 9 3: 4A I 1 SHEET SP4 DWO: 005080-SP4 I I } I SON1C SON►C SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Point and finish the exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on the Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1. Listed below are areas required for pointing although not necessarily all inclusive. This listing, however, does not relieve this contractor of verifying all other sections of these specifications for provisions regarding pointing. a. EXTERIOR: Galvanized metal Hollow metal door and frame Structural steel shapes Mechanical piping and equipment (except roof mounted Items) Electrical conduits, panels, etc. (except roof mounted items) b. INTERIOR: Galvanized sheet metal Miscellaneous metal items Hollow metal doors and frames Exposed Mechanical piping and equipment. Exposed Electrical conduits, panels, etc. c. PAINTING DOES NOT INCLUDE: Painting roof mounted mechanical and electrical work. 2. This subcontractor shall thoroughly examine the other sections of these specifications for provisions regarding painting. He shall understand that all surfaces that are left unfinished by the requirements of other sections shall be painted or finished under this section of the Work. Notify Owner's Representative of discrepancies. 3. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, filters, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. B. Related work specified elsewhere: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100 Gypsum Wallboard System - Section 09620 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 03500 C. Work not included: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. 2. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section except as may be so specified. 3. Do not paint moving parts such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not paint over required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 5. Do not paint concrete which has been sandblasted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The specified painting formulas are based on the top line products of Sherwin Williams, Inc. (216) 566-2000. Other acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Glidden, (216) 344-6222. 2. Devoe, (216) 344-6532. 3. Benjamin Moore, (201) 573-2600. B. Touch-up point for the canopy fascia, dock pans, etc. to be fumished by the canopy materials manufacturer to insure color match. 2.2 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. All paint formulations are based on products of Sherwin Williams, Inc. The surfaces listed in the painting schedule shall receive the surface preparation, paints and number of coats necessary to achieve accurate full color coverage. Exposed piping shall not be painted until the piping has been tested and approved. B. Primer and undercoat paint to be by some manufacturer as the finish costs. Use only approved thinnere and within recommended quantities. C. Refer to the end of this Section for painting schedule. All points specified are for brush or roller application. Driplese spraying is acceptable for large areas using comparable materials. Caution shall be taken to not spray adjacent surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Hardware, hardware accessories, machine surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove door atlencers from hollow metal door from" and replace after painting. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean before applying point or surface treatments, 3.2 PAINT APPLICATION A. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with requirements of paint manufacturer. All paint shall be applied under strict controls as established by manufacturer. B. If spraying is elected to be used by this Contractor, care shall be taken to not damage adjacent finish areas. If damage does occur. Contractor shall correct or replace surfaces at no cost to owner. C. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be complete, and each coat shall be so applied to produce film of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to Insure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces. Adjacent areas and Installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures. Sufficient time shall elapse between successive coats to permit proper drying. 3.3 CLEANING A. Cloth and cotton waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work, staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the site. Paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left clean and acceptable. B. Provide a minimum of one gallon each of all paints for the Owner's use. 3.4 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Colors: 1. Interior White: SW1004 "Pure White" (interior of Doors) 2. Exterior White: SW2123 "White" (Canopy Beams & Purlins) 3. Exterior Gray: SW7052 "Gray Area" (Exterior Doors) 4. Exterior Black: SW8258 `Tricorn Black" (Canopy Columns) B. The following exterior coating applications are to be addition to those specified elsewhere. 1. Ferrous Metal: (Canopy Steel and including mechanical and electrical Items of ferrous metal not factory finished painted): a. lot coat Kem Kromik Metal Primer 85OW21, (Touch-up Prime Coat) b. 2nd coat Industrial Enamel, (light colors: 854W2101), (dark colors: 854T2104) c. 3rd coat Industrial Enamel, (light colors: B54W2101), (dark colors: 854T2104) 2. Galvanized Steel and Iron: (including mechanical and electrical Items of galvanized iron and steel not factory finish painted). a. solvent clean b. 1 st coot: B66 W1 DTM acrylic primer/finish, 3 mils DFT c. 2nd coat, Pro -Mar 200 Latex, Egg -shell, 82OW201 3. Wood Trim: (Exterior) a. 1st coat: A-100 Alkyd Wood Primer, Y24W20 b. 2nd coat: Industrial Enamel, 9502101 c. 3rd coat: Industrial Enamel, 854W2101 4. Plywood: (Exterior) a. tat coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W41 b. 2nd coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, ABW525 C. 3rd coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, ABW525 C. The following interior coating applications are to be in addition to those specified elsewhere. 1. Galvanized Metals d. solvent clean e. let coat: 866 W1 DTM acrylic primer/finish, 3 mils OFT f. 2nd coat: Pro -Mar 200 Latex, Egg -shell, 82OW201 2. Gypsum Board a. Texuro: Light Stipple Texture b. 1 at coat Pro -Mar 200 Latex, Egg -shell, 82OW201 c. 2nd coat: Pro -Mar 200 Latex, Egg -shell, 02OW201 3. Wood Trim a. lot coat: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W22 b. 2nd coot: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Semi -gloss, A40W25 c. 3rd coat: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Semi -gloss, A40W25 4. Misc. Metals (Hollow metal doors, frames, access doors, equipment) a. let coat: 865 Wi OTM acrylic primer/finish, 3 mile DFT b. 2nd coat: Pro -Mar 200 Latex, Pont. -shell, 020W201 D. See Section 02580 for Traffic Po E. Any other exposed surfaces and areas not specifically mentioned above and which are not covered in "Related Work", or items listed in "Do not paint" paragraph, shall be pointed with not isse than two coots of an appropriate type of point as directed by the Owners Representative unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. SECTION 10426 - SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS PART 1 ? GENERAL 1.1. DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic Interior signs. PART 2 ? PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Signs: 1. Type: Matte finish melamine plastic laminate with contrasting color core; non static, fire retardant, and self extinguishing 2. Thickness: i /8 inch. 3. Restroom and other accessible area signs shall comply with the ADA and other state and local accessibility codes. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products as manufactured 1. Other manufacturers: a. Signs Now, (800) 356-3373. b. SS Graphics Co., (800) 513-1695. by Fostsigne, (800) FASTSIGNS, or equal. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Chrome plated brass screws. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate signs by reverse engraving process to produce characters and graphics in contrasting color, raised 1/16 inch. S. Characters: 1. Height, 5/8 inch. 2. Style: Sans serif, upper case. 3. Width to height ratio: Between 3:5 and 1:1. 4. Stroke width to height ratio: Between 1:5 and 1:10. C. Graphics: Universal handicapped symbols, 6 inches high. D. Provide Grade 2 Braille indications for each character and graphic. E. Comers: 1/2 inch radius. F. Edges: Square. PART 3 ? EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of loose and foreign matter. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate signs on wall adjacent to scheduled doors or as noted on the drawings. C. Conform to applicable accessibility code for mounting height. SECTION 10800 ? TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES PART 1 ? GENERAL 1,1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide toilet room accessories where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. PART 2 ? PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and fasteners: 1. Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a retaining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted, and well suited for use with the supporting construction. 2. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide oval head fasteners with finish matching the accessory. 3. Provide 2 X wood blocking as called for on drawings and as required for proper anchorage. B. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bradley Washroom Accessories, (414) 251-6000. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., (818) 784-1000. c. American Specialties, Inc., (914) 476-9000. 2. A model number for each item from each of the three acceptable manufacturers Is provided below, Provide all accessories from one manufacturer. C. Accessory items: 1. Mounting Devices: Manufacturers standard devices and concealed plates, suitable for each mounting surface. 2. Toilet Tissue Dispenser., Install one by each wc. (Supplied by Owner) o. Bradley. No. 5126 b. Bobrick, Series 6999. c. American Specialties, No. 74022-HSM, 3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Install one in Women's toilet. a. Bradley, No. 4722-15. b. Bobrick, No. 254. c. American Specialties, No. 0473-1A. 4. Mirror. la" x 36" framed mirror. Install one above each lavatory. a. Bradley, No. 780. b. Bobrick, Series 290. c, American Specialties, No. 0600. 5. Paper Towel Dispenser: install one beside each lavatory. (Supplied by Owner) a. Bradley, No. 250-15. b. Bobrick. No. 262. c. American Specialties, No. 0210. 6. Grab Bar. 36" a. Bradley, No. 8320-001-3600 b. Bobrick. Series 5806, 36". c. American Specialties, No. 3700, 36". 7. Grob Bar. 42", securely anchored grab bare with manufacturer's recommended mounting kit for this type of construction and will support loads in excess of 900 pounds. Provide one at each toilet where indicated on the Drawings. a. Bradley. No. 8320-001-4200 b. Bobrick, Series 5806, 42". c. American Specialties, No. 3700, 42". S. Soap Dispensers: one per lavatory. (Supplied by Owner) a. Bradley, No. 857. b. Bobrick, No. 170. c, American Specialties, No. 0351. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Stainless Steel: Type 304, ASTM A167, finish satin. B. Steel: 1. Cold Rolled Sheet: ASTM A365, commercial quality. 2. Zinc Coated: ASTM Al23. 3. Chromium Plating: ASTM B458, Type SC2. C. Aluminum: 1. Extruded: 6463?TS alloy, anodized satin finish. 2. Sheet Stock: 5005?H14. D. Mounting Devices: Galvanized Steel, ASTM A386. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 ? EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision In the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. S. Install each Item in its proper location, firmly anchored Into position, level and plumb, and in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. C. Locate accessories as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with mounting heights as recommended by the manufacturer. Mounting heights shall conform to state do local handicap codes and ADA. D. After inspection of the installation and approval, remove all labels and clean accessories. Adjacent work of other trades soiled by work under this Section shall oleo be cleaned. E. Defective accessories shall be replaced with matching accessories at the expense of the Contractor. soN�c soN►e v Z 6B9 0 0 ® f- 0 V c w� C4 ® 1Z lu 7 _ W U ttf'���111 F ® ?� ® ow 0" •gZ V Q Do�� U c r� dL ® u :r N !dr��rrr 4A SHEET SP5 TWO: 005080-SP5 I I - � __L�L K F I �l I I , _� - - I L - T11 1_1 III _ I P. i ,§@Rqg@ 9@W89 1.1 1.2 ALL FEES, PERMITS, TAXES, ETC. SHALL BE PAID BY THIS CONTRACTOR, (�D 1.3 AS SPECIFIED, OR SUB M=m TALLATION. SUBMIT SIX (6) COPIES OF A BOUND BROCHURE �2 U Q� 1.4 O HL CONDITIONS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS BID [IN THE PROJECT, MY DISCREPANCIES WITH THE PLANS AND Q�D SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY BROUGHT TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE's ATTENTION FOR IDDING. 1.5 L GUARANTEE ALL WORK AND ACCEPTANCE, 1.6 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT, CONTACT OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, 2.1 PIPINGi ALL PIPING SHALL BE RUN SUBSTANTIALLY AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. A. ATER PIPING, SHALL BE TYPE 'L' HARD DRAWN COPPER TUBING INSIDE 'K' SOFT COPPER BELOW SLAB, JOINTS PERMITTED BELOW SLAB IF SILVER HE JOINTS. PROTECT CONCRETE. R STE PIPING, ALL SANITARY SOIL AND WASTE P SCHEDULE 40 PVC WHERE ALLOWED BY CODE. WHERE PVC IS NOT ALLOWED BY CODE, PROVIDE co VENT PIPING ALL VENT PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 4 CODE. WHERE PVC IS NOT ALLOWED BY CODE, PROVIDE STANDARD WEIGHT CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS. D. GAS PIPING, GAS PIPING ABOVE GRADE SHAL E SCHEDULE 40. PIPE INSIDE ION. PROVIDE O LDING. INSTALL A GAS COCK FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL APPLIANCE OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED. H E. UL GS. ALL WRAPPED IN THE FIELD. PROVIDE INSULATING UNIONS AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE THE PIPING U R THE BUILDING. INSTALL A 17# ANODE BETWEEN THE METER AND THE BU CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, WHERE PERMITTED BY F. , ALL ROOF DRAIN PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC WHERE ND QUALITY. ALL ELLS SHALL BE OF THE LONG RADIUS TYPE, 2.2 A. E PING ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE INSULATED WITH GLASS U B. DOMESTIC COLD WATER WHEN S, C. NG, ALL HORIZONTAL RUNS OF ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE, SHALL BE D 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE& SHALL HAVE STOP VA LL HAVE C,P. U L CHAMBERS, FIXTURES SHALL BE WHITE UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISF- 2.4 ROOFTOP UNITS, PROVIDE AND INSTALL ROOFTOP UNITS AS SPECIFIED, THE COOLING SECTION SHALL CONSIST NK ALVES, AND MOTOR WI S, U IREMENTS. EVAPORATOR D BALL BEARING MOTORS. MOTORS SHALL HAVE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION. FANS SHALL HAVE CAPACITIES AS SCHEDULED. GAS -FIRED HEATING SECTION SHALL BE COMPLETELY ASSEMBLED, WIRED AND PIPED, CERTIFIED BY AGA FOR OUTDOOR APPLICATION. SECTION SHALL W IO PROTECTION. FAN MOTORS SHALL BE U.L. LISTED FOR OUTDOOR SERVICE. UNITS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MANUAL CONTROL OUTSIDE AIR VOLUME DAMPERS. QU 350'/MIN. WITH THE CFM SPECIFIED. THEY SHALL COME WITH COMPLETE ROOF SER FAN, EVAPORATOR FAN AND COMPRESSO MER, PROVIDE AN AD S. THE THERMOSTAT SHALL BE LOCATED WHER G. WIRING HE RICAL PLANS, RACTOR. CAPACITIE H 2.5 H RECTANGULAR SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS SHALL HAVE 112' THICK DUCT LINER INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER's RECOMMENDATIONS. RECTANGULAR SIZES SHOWN ARE SHEET METAL SIZES. ROUND SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK SHALL HAVE 2' THICK VAPOR SEAL EXTERIOR INSULATION. WHERE ROUND DUCTWORK IS SHOWN, RECTANGULAR MAY B HOWEVER, THE FIRST 5' ON THE SUPPLY AND RETURN FROM A UN TWORK. ROUND UCT. 2.6 DEVICES: SHALL BE F FIED OTHERWISE. MO RED BY KRUEGER. 2.7 UP AIR SYSTEM, FANS, ROOF CURBS, AND EXHAUST DUCT TRANSITIONS ARE WNER, AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER'S MENTS. EXHAUST DUCTWORK SHALL BE 16 GAUGE STEEL, WITH WELDED JOINTS. MAKE-UP B N PARAGRAPH 2.5 PPLY AIR DUCTWORK. THE ENTIRE EXHAUST AN KS. 2.8 EXHAUST HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSIONi EXHAUST HOOD WILL BE FURNISHED BY OWNER, NOZZLES AND PIPING, FOR INSTALLATION BY THE G.C, CONTRACTOR SHALL PR13VIDE U U WITH NFPA, L ALL - REGULATIONS. X 3.1 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS, 3.2 A ER IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANLlFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 3.3 TRADES. 3.4 N OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND OWNER. 1.1 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE A COMPANY OR FIR CAL CONTRACTING, THE FIRM SHALL HAVE UM OF FIVE (5) 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, APPLIANCES, EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION, B. INSTALL ALL THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HTING, WITH CONDU TELEPHONE, COMPUTERS AND MONITORS. LOCATIONS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. TELEPHONE CONDUIT TO C. MAKE THE ROUGH -IN AND FINAL CONNECT ION, EXHAUST AND INTAKE FANS, AND MENU LIGHTS. REF. 'SPECIALTY ITEMS'. D. INSTALL THE CONDUITS FOR MUSIC SYST HOWN ON THE PLANS, OR AS DIRECTED BY OWNER. E. THE SPEAKERS AND MENU ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE OWNERS, THE ELECTRICAL BY THE OWNER, THE CANOPY CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE ALL INSP OOK UPS. CONDUIT FO NSTALLED BY E.C., AND RUN INTO STRUCTURE TUBING ANOPY CONTRACTOR. F. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO FURNISH CONDUIT, CIRCUITS, WIRING, AND HOOK UP THE FRONT SIGN, AN IT SIGNS, SIGNS FU R. G. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE WIRING AND HOOK UPS FOR THE WAL BOX, COILS AND FANS. SWITCHES AND FIXTURES FOR W/I UNITS ARE FURNISHED BY THE OWNERS, (SEE 'AREA OF RESP H. FOR ELECTRIC COOKING THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTAL BREAKERS, OR CONTACTORS, FOR FOUR PIECES OF EQUIPMENT. (3 FRYERS & I GRIDDLE), WHICH ST HOODS. LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF THE BREAKERS, CONTACTORS, AS PER EQUIREMENT, N.F.C., NFPA %-7-3.1.3j AND THE FIRE MARSHALL. ORS. SHUNTS .SECTION 15, PART 3. I. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL THE 'PIGTAIL' WIRE FOR THE REACH IN REFRIGERATOR. REF. 'SPECIALTY ITEMS' AT FRONT OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS, J. OWNER SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL MUSIC SPEAKER AND WI KERS. REF. 'SPECIALTY ITEMS' IN FRONT OF SPECIFICATIONS, 1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS AND ATTACHED DRAWING R's WORK. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFIC T BY THE OTHER, WILL GH REWIRED BY BOTH. B. THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE PRESUMED TO BE ACCURATE, BUT EXTREME ACCURACY IS NOT GUARANTEED. AN O W WORK IS STARTED. OMISSION OF PARTIC ME AT NO EXTRA COST, C. IN CASE OF A DISPUTE CONCERNING THE TRUE INTENT AND MEANING OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, THE OWNER's REPRESENTATIVE SHALL INTERPRET THE SAME, AND HIS INTERPRETATION SHALL AL, D. ANY CHANGES TO T U T 1.4 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE AND EXISTING FACILITIES A. ALL CONTRACTORS SUBMITTING PROPOSALS FOR THIS WORK SHALL, BEFORE SUBMITTAL OF PROPOSALS, 1.5 ELECTRICAL STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, AND CODES A. ALL ORDINANCES, LAWS, AND CODES OF THE CITY, COUNTY, STATE, AND NATIONAL GOVERNMENTS, AND DOES NOT COMPLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE HELD RESPONSI NF OWNER, 1.6 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES, AND TAXES A, ALL NECESSARY LICENSES OR PERMITS FOR THE CARRYING OU B CTOR, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPO WORK. 1,7 COOPERATION A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE FULLY WITH ALL OTHE HIS PROJECT. IF ANY PART OF THIS CONTRACTOR's WORK DEPENDS FOR PROPER EXECUTION OR RESULTS UPON THE WORK OF ANY OTHER CONTRACTOR, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT AND P HE OWNER'S 's ION OF THIS WORK, 1,8 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. SEQUENCE, COORDINATE AND INTEGRATE THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF ELECTRICAL WORK SO THAT THE ER'S REPRESENTATIVE WILL NOT SUPER RACTOR, B. LOCATIONS, HORSE POWER, AND ELECTRICAL RATINGS OF MOTORS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT O NSTALLED. COORDI NS OF CONNECTIONS, 1.9 GUARANTEE A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE THE APPARATUS AS INS AS SPECIFIED, AND SHALL GUARANTEE TO K OF SAME, AND SHALL FURNISH FREE OF COST TERIAL, LABOR AND OTHER EXPENSES MATERIAL, WORKMANSHIP, AND EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE, 1.10 DAMAGE A. DAMAGE TO THE OWNER'S PROPERTY OR OTHER CONTRACTOR's WORK CAUSED BY THIS CONTRACTOR, OR U CONTRACTOR's EXPENSE, 1,11 SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. WHERE A MANUFACTURER AND CATALOG/MODEL NUMBER OF A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT I T MANUFACTURER's AND CATALOG/MODEL N RATION. 1,12 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. THE CONTRACTOR MUST OBTAIN IN WRITING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S APPROVAL OF EACH ITEM VE'S APPROVAL OF SU OWNER's REPRESENTATIVE TO SUCH DEVIATIONS AT THE TIME OF SUBMISSIONS. THE OWNER'S 1.13 MODIFICATION PROPOSALS (RFP) A. AFTER BIDS ARE RECEIVED ON THE PROJECT, THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY ISSUE A REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL (RFP) FOR PROPOSED CHANGE S PROJECT. THIS CO NT, SUBCONTRACT, AND OVERHEAD COSTS AS WELL AS PROFIT. THE PRICE BREAKDOWN SHALL COVER ALL WORK ED, ADDED, OR CHANGED. B. ANY CHANGE AMOUNTS CLAIMED FOR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL B LAR BREAKDOWN. HE ED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, 1.14 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS, EQUIPMENT CATALOG, SPARE MATERIALS A. AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT, AND BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT IS MADE, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL ING, B. SUBMIT TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR TRANSMITTAL TO THE OWNER, 1. ONE (1) NEAT, CLEAN, COMPLETE SET OF ELECTRICAL WORKING DRAWINGS ON WHICH ANY AND ALL IL. THESE MARKED CHANGES SHALL INCLUDE ANY CHANGES IN CONDUITS, RELOCATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, ETC. MARK THE SET OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS To U W IONS. SHOW THE ACTUAL PANELBOARD CIRCUIT NUMBER OF EACH CIRCUIT. 2. ONE (1) LOUSE -LEAF THREE-RING BINDER WITH TABS CONTAINING A COMPILATIO U G, INSTRUCTIONS, GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS, MAINTENANCE PROPOSAL NCLUDED. A COMPLETE TYPE WRITTEN INDEX SHALL BE PROVIDED LISTING OG NUMBER, 3. TWO KEYS OF EACH TYPE OF KEY ON THE JOB. 4. DELIVER SPARE FUSES, LAMPS, AND OTHER SPARE EQUIPMENT AND STORE AS DIRECTED, 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. THE DIVISION 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS APPLYING TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ALSO APPLY TO THIS O 1.2 WORKMANSHIP A, THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED AS A PART OF THIS CONTRACT SH IN A NEAT, CAREFUL, AND WORKMAN -LIKE MANNER, AND IN FULL COMPLIANCE WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE NEC, LATEST REVISION, AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE BES Y. 1.3 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROPE NT, ETC., ITE. BUILDING MATERIALS, CONTRACTOR's EQUIPMENT, ETC., MAY BE STORED ON THE PREMISES, BUT THE PLACING OF SAME SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE A R'S REPRESENTATIVE. WHEN ANY ROOM IN TH AS A SHOP, STOREROOM, ETC., THE ONE MAKING 1.4 DAMAGE A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO HIS WORK OR MATERIAL, E, 1.5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. PERFORM REQUIRED TESTS AND PROCURE REQUIRED APPRO ITIES, PRIOR TO THE OWNERS PANCY, B. THE SYSTEM WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED FOR ACCEPTANCE UN ES, PANELS, BREAKERS, SAFETY SWITCHES, MOTORS, LIGHT FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES, DEVISES AND ITEMS OF 1,6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM ALL NECESSARY TRENC OU WOO HE CAY, BACK COMPACTED. WHERE TRENCHES ARE UNDER BUILDING, PAVED AREAS, ETC., SAND BACKFILL SHALL 1.7 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP A. PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN THE CONSTRUCTION DUST FROM ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAWS DEVICES, AND TOUC ENT, 1.8 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL FOR THE WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL U B. AFTER THE NOTICE TO PROCEED IS ISSUED, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE LOCAL TILITY COMPANY. 1,9 TELEPHONE SERVICE A, TELEPHONE SERVICE CABLES TO THE BUILDING WILL BE FURH UTILITY COMPANY. THE CONTRACTOR SH MPANY. B. INTERIOR TELEPHONE WIRING WILL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. 1.1 MATERIALS A, MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND A STANDARD CATALOGED PRO TURER. EXPERIMENTAL PTABLE, 2.1 GENERAL A. ALL WIRING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN NEW, 112' MINIMUM, GALVANIZED OR SHERARDIZED, STEEL CONDUITS SHOWN. CONDUITS INSTALLED IN OR UNDER THE FLOOR SLAB SHALL BE 3/4' MINIMUM SIZE, B, REFER TO SECTION 16120 FOR MC CABLE OPTIONS. 2.2 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS) CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A, CONDUITS SHALL BE HOT -DIP GALVANIZED WITH UNDERWRITERS' APPROVAL AND LABEL, RGS CONDUITS I 1. ALL CONDUITS 2' AND LARGER, 2, CONDUITS EXPOSED TO THE OUTDOOR WEATHER. 3. CONDUITS EXPOSED IN MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ROOMS AGE MAY OCCUR 4, CONDUITS INSTALLED IN CONCRETE OR MASONRY. B. COATED RGS CONDUITS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL CONDUITS IN CONTACT WITH THE EARTH, BOTH UNDER NG. PROVIDE CORROSION PROTECTION EQ L RGS CONDUITS. 2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. EMT AND FITTINGS SHALL BE ELECTROGALVANIZED, HAVE LIQUID TIGHT CONNECTORS, AND SHALL HAVE UL APPROVAL AND LABEL. EMT CONDUITS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR CONDUITS 1 1/2' OR S E COUPLINGS. 2. 4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUITS 2. 3 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES, A. FLEXIBLE CONDUITS FOR INDOOR AND DRY LOCATIONS SHAL A, DEVICE PLATES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DEVICE PLATES SHALL BE TYPE 302 STAINLESS STEEL CCEPTABLE. Y SIERRA. B. FOR OUTDOOR OR WET LOCATIONS, PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT WITH A PVC LIQUID -TIGHT JACKET AND B. ALL SWITCHES AND OUTLETS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH OVE S. 1. I MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND A STANDARD CATALOGED PRODUCT OF THE MANUFACTURER. AL -TIGHT'. C. COVERPLATES FOR DATA OUTLETS SHALL BE TYPE 302 STAINL 1 Y SIERRA. REMOVE GROMMET. 2.5 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. CONDUIT FITTINGS SHALL CONFORM TO UL 467 AND UL 514 AS A 2. 4 TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLETS 2. 1 PANELBOARDS & LOAD CENTERS NDUIT, EMT, AND MI CABLE. FITTINGS FOR EMT SHALL BE COMPRESSION TYPE, A. TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLETS SHALL A. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SHALL BE AS SHOWN IN THE SCHEDULE WITH: DEAD -FRONT CONSTRUCTION, COPPER BUS BARS, CONCEALED TRIM CLAMPS, GRAY ENAMEL CODE GAUGE STEI CEILING, DIRECTED IN THE DIRECTION ION. ETS SHALI T. ONTHE CONDUIT, PLATES FOR THE OUTLETS SHALL BE PER 2. 3. STEEL. LOAD CENTER TYPE CONSTRUCTI B. EXPANSION JOINT FITTINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE CONDUITS PASS THROUGH BY LOCAL CODES. JOINTS. FITTINGS SHALL BE TELESCOPIC AND WATERPROOF AND P P TO 4 INCHES. B. PANELBOARDS SHALL 13E FURNISHED WITH ALL ACCESSORIES AS NOTED IN THE PANELBOARD Sl . 2,6 WIREWAYS A. WIREWAYS SHALL BE ZINC COATED RIGID STEEL SHEETS, FORMED INTO RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE SHAPES, UIRED BY THE NEC. WIREWAYS SHALL BE FURNISHED COMPLETE WI S. 2,7 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. CONDUIT SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, AND FASTENERS SHALL BE 'CADDY' OR EQUAL, 2,8 PLASTIC CONDUIT (PVC) SUBSTITUTE FOR METAL CONDUITS A, PVC CONDUITS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR RIGID STEEL GAL AS FOLLOWS, 1. CARLON PLUS 40, TYPE 40, 90 DEG. C, UL RATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED MASONRY, DIRECT BURIED IN EARTH, OR IMBEDDED IN OR UNDER THE FLOOR SLABS. REQUIREMENTS ARE, A. OXES, B. TERTI GHT, � C. FITTINGS, COUPLINGS, AND CEMENT TO BE AS MANUFACTURED BY CARLON OR EQUAL. D. ITS. INSTALL SPAC RUNS. E. I F, GALVANIZED. 3. 1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION AND WIRING METHODS A. CONDUITS IN GENERAL SHALL BE CONCEALED THROUGHOUT, EXCEPT IN MECHANICAL ROOMS, ETC. , OR ED ON THE DRAWINGS. B. INSTALL CONDUITS STRAIGHT AND TRUE, ALIGNED WITH OTHER WORK, CLOSE TO WALLS AND OVERHEAD STRUCTURE, CONCEALED WHERE POSSIB CES, AND OUT-OF-W EACH SPACE, EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE INDICATED, ARRANGE SPACES, AND 8'-6- HEADROOM IN OTHER SPACES. ARRANGE WORK TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE AND MENT (IF EQUIPMENT, LOCATE SERVICES R NECTING, WITH MIN INISH, SUSPENSION, DUCTWORK, AIR DIFFUSERS AND OTHER WORK, SO THAT REQUIRED PERFORMANCES OF EACH WILL HE ACHIEVED. C. SUPPORT CONDUITS FROM STRUCTURE WITH STRAPS ON SMALL CONDUITS, AND CONDUIT HANGERS ON LARGE CONDUITS, MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONT U THE SYSTEM. PLUG EN RUCTION. INSTALL REMOVABLE COVER PULL BOXES ON LONG RUNS. INSTALL EXPANSION U EMPTY CONDUITS, ALLOW FOR NATURAL DRAIN OF CONDENSATE. INSTALL CONDUIT BUSHINGS AT ALL BOXES, CABINETS, ETC, AND AT THE TERMINATION ENDS OF CONDUIT STUB -OUTS. A ALL CONDUITS INSTALLED BELOW GRADE OR UNDERFLOOR SHALL BE RIGID STEEL GA COUPLINGS(OR P. V. C. WITH CEMENTED COUPLINGS IF SPECIFICALLY SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION). NO NGS WILL BE ALLOWED, E. ALL UNDERGROUND CONDUITS INSTALLED OUTSIDE THE BUI F THE NEC. INSTALL CONTINUOUS PLAST F. CONNECT ALL VIBRATING EQUIPMENT, DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS, MOTORS, AND RECESSED LIGHTING THAN 12' IN LENGTH. WHEN EXPOSED TO MOISTURE, OILS, VAPORS, ACIDS, ETC., CONNECT ALL VIBRATING EQUIPMENT WITH A 12. MINIMUM LENGTH OF' SEALTI UIT, WITH APPROPRIATE FITTINGS. G. FLEXIBLE CORD/CAP AND RECEPTACLE CONNECTION FOR MOTORS IS NOT ACCEPTABL RAWINGS. 1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS I A. NEC COMPLIANCE, COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF NEC FOR CONSTRUCTION AND A UL COMPLIANCE, COMPLY WITH UL STDS B3 AND 486A PROVIDE WIRING/CABLING AND CONNECTOR TH THEIR USES, 2.1 WIRES AND CABLES, A. PROVIDE WIRES AND CABLES AS INDICTED SUITABLE FOR THE TEMPERATURE, CONDITIONS AND LOCATION WHERE INSTALLED, INSTALL ALL WIRE IN RACEWAY. B. CONDUCTOR MATERIAL, USE COPPER CONDUCTORS FOR ALL WIRES AND CABLES. C. INSULATION, PROVIDE THHN/THWN INSULATION FOR ALL CONDUCTORS SIZE 500MCM AND LARGER AND NO. 8 AWGAND SMALLER. FOR ALLOTHER SIZES PROVIDETHW, THHN/THWN OR XHHW INSULATION RE INSTALLED, D. CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS: PROVIDE UL-LISTED FACTORY -FABRICATED, SOLDERLESS METAL NGS, MATERIALS, TYPES AND CLASSES FO , USE CONNECTORS WITH TEMPERATURE RATINGS EQUAL TO OR HICH USED, E. OPTIONAL USE OF TYPE MC CABLES: THE CONTRACTOR MAY USE TYPE MC CABLE IN LIEU OF WIRE ED BY LOCAL CODES, TYPE MC CABLE SHALL B IBLE CEILINGS. 3. 1 WIRING INDICATED ON DRAWINGS A. THE NUMBER OF WIRES TO BE INSTALLED IN EACH CONDUIT RUN IS INDICATED ON T MARKS. REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, B, EACH CONDUIT RUN SHALL HAVE A GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR INSTALLED WIT S. THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE D AND/OR PER THE NEC, 6452. C. NEUTRALS SHALL NOT BE COMBINED ON CIRCUITS SERVING LIGHTING FIXTURES C BALLASTS. A SEPARATE NEUTRAL SHALL BE PULLED FOR EACH CIRCUIT. 3.2 INSTALLATION METHODS A. PULL CONDUCTORS SIMULTANEOUSLY WHERE MORE THAN ON ED IN SAME RACEWAY, HE SARY, B. USE PULLING MEANS INCLUDING, FISH TAPE, CABLE, ROPE AND BASKET WEAVE WIRE/CABLE GRIPS WHICH BLES OR RACEWAYS. OR CABLE. C. TIGHTEN ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS, INCLUDING SCREWS AND BOLTS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED TORQUE TIGHTENING VALUES. WHERE MANUFACTURER's TORQUING NOT INDICATED, TI IN UL STD 486A AND B. D. THE WIRING LAYOUT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS IS INTENDED TO BE SCHEMATIC A LAYOUT, (JE, INSTALL CONDUITS OVERHEAD WHERE INDICATED TO BE UNDERFLOOR, ETC. ), HE SHALL OBTAIN THE APPROVAL OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE BEFORE NETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS 1.1 MATERIALS A. MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND A STANDARD CATALOGED PRODUCT OF THE MANUFACTURER, EXPERIMENTAL PTABLE, 2. 1 OUTLET BOXES A. BOXES SHALL BE PROVIDED IN THE WIRING OR RACEWAY SYSTEMS WHEREVER REQUIRED FOR PULLING OF WIRES, MAKING CONNECTIONS, AND MOUNTING DEVICES OR F AND WALKWAYS. 13OXES IN OTHER LOCATIONS SHALL BE SHEET S WABLE. B. BOXES FOR USE WITH RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 1. 5 INCHES DEEP EXCEPT WHERE E APPROVED. BOXES FO U AS APPROVED. C. PULL BOXES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF CODE GAGE GALVANIZED SHEET STEEL EXC D. COVERS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON OUTLET BOXES, PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES IF NO DEVICE OR ED, COVERS SHALL BE BLANK, SUITABLE FOR PAINTING AND EXACTLY FIT THE BOX. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. WIRING DEVICE BOXES AND PLATES, ETC., SHALL BE ACCURATELY SET PLUMB AND LEVEL. EXPOSED RUNS LEVEL, AND VERTICAL LINES PLUMB, B. BOXES SHALL BE MOUNTED TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE WITH APPROVED MOUNTING C CADDY, C. ALL BOXES MOUNTED IN METAL STUD WALLS SHALL BE MOUNT PS. 4' BOXES MOUNTED TO METAL STUDS SHALL HAVE FAR -SIDE BOX SUPPORTS. 1.1 MATER IALS A, EQUAL DEVICES AS MANUFACTURED BY G.E., P L S, LEVITON, OR HUBBELL WILL HE ACCEPTABLE, 2.1 SWITCHES, A. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES: HUBBELL #1201 GRAY. B, PILOT LIGHT SWITCHESi HUBBELL #1201PL. 2,2 RECEPTACLES, A. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE& HUBBELL#5252 GRAY. B. OUTDOOR WP RECEPTACLE& HUBBELL #GF5362GY. FURNISH #WP-26 PLATE FOR VERTICALLY ES, #CWP26H FOR HO ECEPTACLES, C. INDOOR GFI RECEPTACLE& HUBBELL #GF5362 WITH SS PLATE, D. THREE AND FOUR WIRE RECEPTACLES, HUBBELL) TYPE, VOLTAGE, CONFIGURATION, AND CAPACITY AS NGS. E. ISOLATEDGROUND DUPLEXRECEPTACLESi HUBBELL #IG5262 3.1 INSTALLATION A. WIRING DEVICE BOXES AND PLATES, ETC_ SHALL BE ACCURATELY SET PLUMB AND LEVEL. EXPOSED TICAL LINES PLUMB. B. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, DEVICES SHALL BE MOUNTED AS FOLLOWS, 1. WALL MOUNTED SWITCHES, 48' ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 2. DUPLEX RECEPTACLES, 24' ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, DUPLEX RECEPTACLES NOTED 'C' SHALL BE O ERTOPS. C. ALL BOXES MOUNTED IN METAL STUD WALLS SHALL BE MOUNT O S, 4' BOXES MOUNTED TO METAL STUDS SHALL HAVE FAR -SIDE BOX SUPPORTS. 1. I GENERAL A. EACH MOTOR OUTLET SHALL CONSIST OF A MOTOR DISCONNECT DEVICE, MOTOR RUNNING OVERCURRENT ADS, OR MOTOR CONT O BE SERVED. ALL SHALL COMPLY WITH THE SIONS OF THE N.E.C. THE MOTOR RUNNING OVERCURRENT DEVICE MAY BE INCLUDED OLLER, THE DISCONNECT AND ISOLATIO 1. PROVIDE CIRCUIT BREAKERS OR SAFETY SWITCHES AS IND D, To COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF N. E. C. 2. USE FUSELESS SAFETY SWITCHES FOR ISOLATION SWITCH H,P, OR LESS MAY BE ISOLATED BY TOGGLE SWITCHES, RATED AT LEAST TWICE THE AMPERE RATING OF THE MOTOR, OR BY 2, 1 GENERAL A. SWITCHES SHALL BE SQUARE D, G.E_ OR CHALLENGER. B. SWITCHES SHALL BE TYPE HD, HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK, SIDE OPERATED, SINGLE THROW, FUSIBLE GENERAL PURPOSE ENCLOSURE NEMA TYPE 1 FOR INDOOR LOCATIONS IDE LOCATIONS. C. NEMA TYPES 4 AND 12 SWITCHES SHALL BE FURNISHED WERE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. D. NON -FUSED DISCONNECTS SHALL BE FURNISHED ONLY WHE DRAWINGS, E. ALL MOTOR DISCONNECTS SHALL HAVE F. DISCONNECT SWITCHES FOR ELECTRI H 2510/KG-1. 3.1 SWITCH LOCATIONS A. LOCATE SWITCHES AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS, B. LOCATIONS FOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES FOR ROOF TOP AND GROUND MOUNTED HVAC UNITS, CHILLERSj 3.2 SWITCH SIZES A. SWITCHES SHALL BE SIZED AS INDICATED [IN THE DRAWINGS. IF A SWITCH FOR A MOTOR OR OTHER ITEM INSTALLED, REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER'S DATA FOR SWITCH SIZING INFORMATION, A. FURNISH CLASS K DUAL ELEMENT FUSES, SIZED AS INDICATED OR AS REQUIRED BY EQUIPMENT SERVED, 4.1 CODES AND STANDARDS, RICAL CODE.' 5. 1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS, A, UNDERGROUND LINE MARKING TAPE: PERMANENTj BRIGHT -COLORED, CONTINUOUS -PRINTED, PLASTIC TAPE B. WIRE/CABLE DESIGNATION TAPE MARKERS, VINYL OR VINYL -CLOTH, SELF-ADHESIVE, WRAPAROUND, D LETTER. C. ENGRAVEDj PLASTIC -LAMINATED LABELS, SIGNS, AND INSTRUCTION PLATES, ENGRAVING STOCK MELAMINE PLASTIC LAMINATE, 1/16-INCH MINIM LENGTH; 1/8-INCH IZES. ENGRAVED LEGEND IN WHITE LETTERS ON BLACK FACE AND NICAL FASTENERS. D. CABLE TIES, FUNGUS -INERT, SELF -EXTINGUISHING, ONE-PIECE, SELF- LOCKING NYLON CABLE TIES, 0,18-INCH MINIMUM WIDTH, 50-LB MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH, AND SUITABLE FOR A TEMPERATURE RANGE FROM MINUS 50 DEG F TO 350 DEG F. PROVIDE TIES IN SPECIFIED COLORS WHEN USED FOR COLOR CODING. E. 'DYMO' TYPE TAPE LABELS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR LABELING, 6. 1 GENERAL, U EC. CODING, PROVIDE COLOR CODING FOR SECONDARY SERVICE, FEEDER, AND BRANCH BLACK RED BLUE WHITE GREEN GROUND U FOLLOWS: 1. THE FOLLOWING FIELD -APPLIED COLOR -CODING METHODS MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF GER THAN NO. 10 AWG. 2. APPLY COLORED, PRESSURE -SENSITIVE PLASTIC TAPE IN HALF- LAPPED TURNS FOR A DISTANCE OF 6 PECIFIED, DO NOT OBLITERATE CABLE I KINGS BY TAPING. 3. IN LIEU OF PRESSURE -SENSITIVE TAPE, COLORED CABLE TIES MAY BE USED FOR COLOR IDENTIFICATION. APPLY THREE TIES OF SPECIFIED COLOR FF EXCESS LENGTH. R APPLY EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS OF ENGRAVED PLASTIC -LAMINATE ON PANELBOARDS, EXCEPT CATED, PROVIDE SINGLE LINE OF TEXT, W SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, A. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT STANDARD, NFPA 70, 'NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, FOR COMPONENTS AND INSTALLATION. B. UL STANDARD, UL STANDARD 467, 'GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT,' A. GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCT& TYPES AS INDICATED. WHERE TYPES, SIZES, RATINGS, AND EC REQUIREMENTS, HE GREATER SIZE, RATING, AND QUANTITY INDICATIONS GOVERN. B. CONDUCTOR MATERIALS, COPPER, NDUCTORS, COMPLY WITH DIVISION 16 SECTION 'WIRES AND CABLES,' CONFORM TO NEC TABLE 8, EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE INDICATED, FOR CONDUCTOR PROPERTIES, INCLUDING STRANDING. D. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORt GREEN INSULATED. E. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR, STRANDED CABLE. F. BARE COPPER CONDUCTORS, CONFORM TO ASTM B-3, G. BRAIDED BONDING JUMPERS: COPPER TAPE, BRAIDED FROM NO. 30-GAGE BARE COPPER WIRE AND OPPER FERRULES. CTS, LISTED AND LABELED AS GROUNDING CONNECTORS FOR TH WHICH USED, 1. PRESSURE CONNECTORS: HIGH -CONDUCTIVITY PLATED UNITS, J. BOLTED CLAMPS, HEAVY-DUTY UNITS LISTED FOR THE APPLICATION, K. EXOTHERMIC WELDED CONNECTIONS, PROVIDED IN KIT FORM AND SELECTED FOR THE SPECIFIC TYPES, SIZES, AND COMBINATIONS OF CONDUCTO TO BE CONNECTED. L, GROUND RODSi COPPER -CLAD STEEL, 5/8 INCH BY 10 FEET, MINIMUM, 3,1 INSTALLATION, LICATION, COMPLY U ARE INDICATED, B. GROUND RODSi LOCATE A MINIMUM 13F ONE -ROD LENGTH FROM EACH OTHER AND AT LEAST THE SAME O CTRODE, INTERCONNECT GROUND RODS WI S BELOW GRADE, CONNECT BARE -CABLE GRO POSING THE STEEL. DR C. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR, PROVIDE INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTOR, SIZED AS INDICATED, IN CONDUIT. BOND THE GROUND CONDUCTOR C TTING. DO NOT INSTALL A GROUNDING JUMPER AROUND NGS. BOND THE GROUN AT EACH END, R BRAIDED -TYPE BONDING JUMPERS: INSTALL TO CONNECT GROUND CLAMPS ON WA ASS WATER METERS. USE ELSEWHERE FOR CONNECTIONS. E. ROUTE GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS USING THE SHO IMPACT, OR DAMAGE, EXCEPT AS INDICATED. F. CONNECTIONS: MAKE CONNECTIONS IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MINIMIZE POSSIBILITY OF GALVANIC LYSIS, SELECT CONNECTORS, CONNECTION HARDWARE, CONDUCTORS, AND CONNECTION 1. USE ELECTROPLATED OR HOT -TIN -COATED MATERIALS TO ASSURE HIGH CONDUCTIVITY AND MAKE O 2. MAKE CONNECTIONS WITH CLEAN BARE METAL AT POINTS OF CONTACT. 3. COAT AND SEAL CONNECTIONS INVOLVING DISSIMILAR METALS WITH INERT MAT E G. EXOTHERMIC WELDED CONNECTIONS, USE FOR CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND FOR OSE AT TEST WELLS. DES, COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER's WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS, WELDS THAT H. TIGHTEN GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS, INCLUDING SCREWS AND BOLTS, IN I. GROUND/RESISTANCE MAXIMUM VALU . SPECIFIED HEREIN, C. PANELBOARDS SHALL MEET FEDERAL SPECIFICATION #W-P-115A, TYPE 1, CLASS 1, AND UL6' S. 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL COMPLY WITH FEDERAL SPECIFI SHALL BE MOI BOLT -ON, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK THERMAL MAGNETICj WITH ON, OFF AND TRIPPED POSI O , CHA SCHEDULE. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A PANELBOARDS .SHALL BE SQUARE D. EQUIPMENT AS MANUFACTURED BY GENERAL ELECTRIC, I U 3.1 A. PANELBOARD BOXES AND TRIMS SHALL BE INSTALLED ACCUR ONS. B. FLUSH MOUNTED PANELBOARDS SHALL HAVE TWO (2) ONE INCH EMPTY CONDUITS EXTENDED FR E. E. REFER TO SECTION 16195. 3.2 LE, THE LOADS CONNECTED TO EACH PHASE, AT THE COMPLETION OF TH ANCES. 1. I A. HE A. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS 1. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS FOR FRACTIO B. EQUAL STARTERS AS MANUFACTURED BY SQUARE D, G,E, OR ALLEN BRADLEY WILL BE ACCEPTAD 3. 1 A. MOTOR STARTERS SHALL BE FURNISHED URES. STARTERS LOC NEMA-4. 1. 1 A. MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND A STANDAR HE TABLE. 2.1 A. LIGHTING FIXTU R' S LABORATORIES, INC., APPROP B. LIGHTING FIXTURES NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE 'LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE' ON THE DRAWINGS, C. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE IN AC 1. ALL FIXTURE FIN LE. 2. FINISHED INTERIOR HOUSING SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM REFLECTANCE OF 90%. 3. FIXTURES SHALL BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY AT 27 DEGREES C. SPACE AMB OLTAGE. 4. FIXTURES SHALL BE TESTED BY A RECOGNIZED LABORATORY FOR CONFORMANCE WITH THE D 5. ECIFIED, LENSES SHALL BE PATTERN 12, VIRGIN ACRYLI S OF 0. 125'. 6. FLUORESCENT BALLASTS SHALL BE ELECTRONIC TYPE, LOW HARMONIC, RAPID START, UL 20, 000 HZ, MAX I MUM 1. 7 CREST FACTOR, M I N I MUM 90% POWER FACTOR, THD LESS THAN 25%, MAXIMUM LAMP FLICKER 10%, MINIMUM 3 YEAR WARRANTY WITH LABOR ALLOWANCE. U ADVANCE, EBT, MAGNETEK/TRIAD, MOTOROLA, AND VALMONT WILL B R FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE FUR U UT FOR 90 MINUTES, S AND TEST SWITCH. E. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE FURNIS U 2.2 LAMPS A. EACH LIGHTING F ITH LAMPS, LAMPS SHALL BE AS M IC, PHILLIPS, OR OSRAM AND SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FIXTURE S FOLLOWS. 1. F40TI2 FOUR FOOT FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE G. E, F4OSPX35/RS/WM, 3500 DEGREE 82 CRI, 'WATT -MISER' OR EQUAL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, 2. F32TB FOUR FOOT FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE G.E, F32TB/SPX35 OR EQUAL UNLESS N OTHERWISE. 3. COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL HE G. E. ' BIAX', 3500 DEGREE K, CRI 82 UNLESS OTHERWISE. 4. INCANDESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE RATED AT 120 VOLTS. 5. ALL OTHER LAMPS SHALL BE AS INDICATED IN THE 'LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE'. 2.3 EXIT SIGNS A. EXIT SIGNS ARE SPECIFIED IN THE 'LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE'. SIGNS SHALL BE FURNI ACKS. POWER PACKS SHALL HAVE FIELD REP N THE SIGNS. LAMPS, LEDs, OR ELECTROLUMINANCE PANELS SHALL BE AS FOR THE SIGN. B. FINISH OF EXIT S C. SIGNS SHALL BE FLRNISHED WITH DIREC AWINGS, 2. 4 MENU LIGHTING A. LOW VOLTAGE 12V. (OPTION) IF LOW VOLTAGE IS REQUIRED BY OWNER OR BY LOCAL CODES F RING AS SPECIFIED. CIRCUITS STANDARD ON PLANS, TRANSFORMER ON EACH CIRCUIT, (4OT8,5 4OV) 3.1 A. REFER TO ARCHI TECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN( S) FOREXACT LOCATIONSOF FIXTURES, B. COORDINATE FIXTURE LOCATIONS WIT CO O THE OWNER, C. EACH LAY -IN TROFFER MOUNTED IN T-BAR D, RECESSED INCANDESCENT AND COMPAC E. OUTLET BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTED F. INSTALL FIXTURES WITH FINISHING S, G. EXIT SIGNS SHALL BE FIRMLY MOUNTE WALLS AS SPECIFIED. H. INSTALL LAY -IN TROFFERS WITH MINIMUM OF 5 FT. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT WHIPS, I. PRIOR TO THE PROJECT COMPLETION INSPECTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN THE CONSTRL 312 A. SUPPORT FIXTURES IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 16190. B. COORDINATE FIXTURE LOCATIONS ARCHITECTURAL AND SIT U UP TO TWELVE (12) FEET IN ANY DIRECTI TO IT'S INSTALLATION WITHOU TO THE OWNER, C. INSTALL WITH GASKETS AS REQUIRED D. PRIOR TO THE PROJECT COMPLETION INSPECTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALLI 1. CLEAN THE CONSTRUCTION DUST, INSECTS, AND OTHER DEBRIS FROM THE LAMPS AND THE ENSES. 2. TOUCH UP ANY SCRATCHES OR BLEMISH NER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 3. REPLACE ALL BURNED -OUT LAMPS. SECTION 16520 - NE13N LIGHTING 1. AULT 'GFI' TYPE. 2. NEON TRANSFORMERS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY FRANCE, LECIP, OR MAGNETEK. 3. NE13N TRANSFORMERS SHALL GROUNDED AND OPERATING WIT 4. NEON TRANSFORMER COVERS SHALL BE SECURED BY SCREWS TO TOP OF CANOPY. 5. NEON GLASS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY VOLTARC, EGL, OR EQUIVALENT, 6. NEON GLASS AND GTO WIRE SHALL NOT T FACE, 7. GTO WIRE CONNEC OT'. 8. GTO WIRE SHALL BE RUN THROUGH NON-METALLIC FLEX CAB R, 9. HIGH VOLTAGE GTO WIRE SHALL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND IT, OR 10. NEON ELECTRODES TO BE RATED UP TO 60MA, AND MANUFACTURED BY VOLTARC, EUROCOM, EGL, 11. EXTERIOR NEON SHALL BESUPPORTE S, 13. ALL NEON COMPONENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ONE YEAR (INSTALLATION&ABOR) WARRANTY, 14. ALL NEON SHALL BE 15MM TUBING. 15. COLORS SHALL BE: RED NEON - COLORt CLEAR RED R, CLEAR GOLD II 9@%O@ B@%O@ 'L I RPROVED :HEDULE AND ' AND .DED CASE, 'IONS. 'ED - ). :AKERS. IARD -E, SIEMENS, �IFICATION. I AND IN gn IM THE z 0 G > lu @9 AS a - WORK, z ;SARY TO < 4n 09 D 4n 4n 0 Lu :3 En I Ln I I I I I I 09 * 0 0 G. E. �_ nj -E. < .1 62 0 1 to 0 I I I I I I I I 4DOORS SHALL 1 IT ENCLOSURES 20 : W�** ?IMENTAL ZIATE FOR THE `_RS SHOWN is, O NBOVE RE- -ISTED, CLASS CY OF _E, BALLASTS 7 - -R ( ROOM FINISH. ILD DOWN CLIPS. It � Q Q . z 96 (D (V (A Q @9 NNUFACTURED - o r- Q 0 D- gj in w - < a: )I I woz (I - ,JF tA L, LD @g Q U In dr- a �- - 0: < a. � cl I er LZI 0 0 z M Lu )- , am i 9 ]TED @. ,-, (a i-- > 00 @2 - - CTED 0 ),- j3 � = � � Lw� n I E5 gj Z -< w W Lu an 0 2t a- i r- 6 L� W in . 0 v 13 Lu a w () < - -r U , 0 m Z --� U in 2 �_ .4 - R mo�- 0 NICAD Q mm w in < to Q � m ox 9 p LU frk, cq �- T I w I , > a -V 6 2 FE ZOO w 40 - in Lu cm nZ ui F- 2 1 x: 0 tn �- u- 400 0 - 410 Z A3 Z 0% 3: 0 I--, :9 z = i D_ < b Of , �_ 1 = w w w W ,3 cn p: �i = 1: Z ;m �- �_ a i �_ 0 U dL. I 0 DEVICES, IF u -TOR SHALL OU D DOWN CLIPS, %LL BE ZS. ,EILING () 7 6.4 0) , 'TION DUST AND � ft- 0 :z LENSES, ANY PAINT. ANY ILU >- ii 0 () > I f-- u 3: - � .4 2� _j D_ d r ADDITIONAL COST L0 Q 0 -1 0 , __& FIXTURES, - - Q :r LL INSIDE AND u cq (Y 0 r_____l �_ NINT. z 00 LLD >- = w - IL < (L O_ (D >. D LLJ IL,- 3: N d) w u D rE 7 0 E U, - I - - OR EQUIVALENT. P6 -ATION. DWG: 005080-SP6 I I .. is :: � .. _ i} _.... 1 /�o•, �, ��--� S�/'t rG �P ��-�" ��y9 �3 a° ��?n //�